JP7199727B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball wins a prize based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and patterns are variably displayed on a display device to stop and display the patterns in accordance with the lottery result. There is known a game machine which, when the result is a big hit, stops displaying the winning symbols on the display device to generate a winning game state.

In addition, as such a winning game state, many gaming machines have been proposed that include a plurality of winning game states with different expected acquisition numbers of game media (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-220861 A

However, there is room for further improvement with respect to the effects in each of the plurality of winning game states. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in a game by devising an effect in each of a plurality of winning game states.

Means 1: Lottery means for performing a win-lose lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition;
Any one of a plurality of winning games including at least a first winning game and a second winning game in which the expected acquisition number of game media is smaller than that of the first winning game, based on the result of the winning lottery by the lottery means. a winning game executing means capable of executing
an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the winning lottery;
A gaming machine comprising an effect display means for displaying an effect executed by the effect execution means,
When the first winning game is executed, the congratulatory image notifying that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state is not displayed on the performance display means, and the second winning game is executed. Sometimes it can be displayed on the effect display means ,
As an indication effect of the display of the blessing image, it is possible to execute an anticipation effect to expect the control to be in the advantageous state, and the anticipation effect is executed and the control to the advantageous state is not performed. The congratulatory image is always displayed when the effect is controlled to the advantageous state instead of the effect result,
In the advantageous state after the blessing image is displayed, a blessing continuation image can be displayed indicating that control is being performed to the advantageous state different from the blessing image, and the second winning game is executed again. In this case, both the anticipation effect and the congratulatory image are not displayed, and instead a predetermined effect image is displayed,
Further, when the execution of the first winning game is suggested under the condition that the blessing continuation image is displayed, an effect based on the result of the winning lottery despite being controlled to the advantageous state. The blessing continuation image is hidden in the progress of
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the above configuration, the congratulatory image indicating that the player is controlled in an advantageous state is not displayed on the effect display means when the first winning game is executed , and the game is played more than the first winning game. It can be displayed on the performance display means when a second winning game with a small expected acquisition number of media is executed .

Although there is a risk that the player's exhilaration will decrease in the second winning game in which the expected winning number is small, the display of the congratulatory image in the second winning game can suppress the decrease in the player's exhilaration. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game (for example, see paragraphs [2499] to [2590] and FIGS. 239 to 244).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front lower part. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is in the upward movement end position; is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where has moved to the raised position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is a connection between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). FIG. 10C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching portion is provided between the plate units, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the same. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit. , and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame; Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a closed state; It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is the perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging and seeing the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of 2nd embodiment from back. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of a game ball in the tank rail of FIG. 107; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like according to the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. (a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114(b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the vicinity of the tank rail. (a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a ) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc., seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of FIG. 116 and viewed from the front; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., shown in FIG. 116 and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. Fig. 3 is a viewed perspective view; 119(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 119(b) is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a), viewed from the front; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) being exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squeak line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right; (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left; is a perspective view. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the corrugated line in (a). It is a cross-sectional view. FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 when it is exploded and viewed from behind; 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory view showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which center accessories and the like are made opaque; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged left side of FIG. 145; FIG. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit. (a) is a front view of a side unit in the front unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view of the center accessory in the front unit, (b) is an enlarged view of the arrow A portion in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (b). It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the left rear bottom. (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel plate and an obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 152 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and center right front plate in FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 152 , viewed from the front, with only the center right front plate viewed from the rear; It is a front view of the back unit in the game board. It is a front view of the structure related to the back box of the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. 157(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 157, which is viewed from the front, with the main members of the back box-related components disassembled; and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 158 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (a) is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is placed face down using the functional surface portion, and (b) is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is placed face up using the functional surface portion. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front-back decorations of the front-back-lower effect unit and the rear-back decorations of the back-lower-front effect unit in the back unit are moved to raised positions; The back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back top rear decoration of the back top rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back bottom front decoration. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom rear ornament of the back-bottom rear effect unit is moved to the lower side of the back-bottom front front decoration. FIG. The front of the game board showing the state of FIG. 162, in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit move to the open position and the center decoration appears. It is a diagram. A state in which the back top rear decorative body of the back top rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back bottom back decoration body of the back bottom rear effect unit rises and abuts on the back top rear decoration body. It is a front view of the game board showing. The front of the game board showing the state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position to reveal the center decoration in the state of FIG. It is a diagram. The back top front decoration of the back top front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back top rear decoration of the back top rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the back top front decoration. The back bottom front decoration of the front production unit rises and moves to the bottom of the back top front decoration, and the back bottom rear decoration of the back bottom rear production unit rises to the rear of the back bottom front decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which it is in contact with the rear upper back decoration. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate. (a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guide unit in the right half of the center accessory in FIG. 169, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 169, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Seuss line in FIG. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sesse line in FIG. 171, and (c) is the Sose line in FIG. 171, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the tarter line in FIG. 171. FIG. 171(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 as seen from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 171 as seen from the front left. It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view of the assembled state of the front component, the game panel and the panel decoration substrate in the game board of FIG. 174, and (b) is the front component and the game in the game board of FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the assembled panel and panel decoration substrate. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 174, with the front constituent members, the game panel, and the panel decoration substrate in an exploded state, as seen from the front; FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 174, viewed from behind, with the front constituent members, the game panel, and the panel decoration substrate exploded; FIG. 1 schematically shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board, and (a1) of (a) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LEDs of the panel decoration board turned off, and (a2). is an explanatory view showing (a1) in cross section, (b1) of (b) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration substrate turned on, and (b2) is an explanatory view of (b1) It is explanatory drawing shown in a cross section. 179(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of a part of a game panel provided with a specifying portion having a form different from that of FIG. 178, and FIG. FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram showing a part of the game panel in a perspective view, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the game panel provided with a specific part of a different form. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a game panel provided with specific portions having different thicknesses together with a panel decoration substrate, and (b) is a game panel provided with a specific portion having a conical rear surface. It is an explanatory view showing a panel together with a panel decoration substrate in a cross section, and (c) shows a game panel provided with a specific portion provided with a light-shielding film on the side surface of a blind hole-shaped concave portion together with the panel decoration substrate in a cross section. It is an explanatory view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of a game panel provided with a specific portion in which a blind hole-shaped concave portion is provided with a light-shielding sleeve together with a panel decoration substrate. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel provided with a specific portion formed by a groove-shaped concave portion together with a panel decoration substrate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a game panel provided with a substrate accommodation recess for accommodating the panel decoration substrate. It is an explanatory view showing a panel together with a panel decoration substrate in a cross section, and (c) shows a game panel in which a specific part filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the rear surface of the game panel together with the panel decoration substrate. It is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a game panel in which a specific portion filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the front surface of the game panel together with a panel decoration substrate. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a game panel and a panel decoration substrate whose plate thickness is changing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a different relationship from (a). FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate, the rear sheet, and the panel decoration substrate in the game board of the fourth embodiment, viewed from the front. (a) is a plan view showing the structure of a prize-winning slot on a game board, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of (a). (a) is a side cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a winning opening of the present embodiment, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a conventional winning opening. (a) and (b) are perspective views showing a prize winning hole provided with a guide piece portion according to a different embodiment in a winning hole where the ball entering direction is inclined. (a) and (b) are perspective views showing a prize winning opening provided with a guide piece portion according to a further different embodiment. (a) and (b) are perspective views showing a prize winning opening provided with a guide piece portion according to a further different embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a conventional winning hole in which the ball entering direction is inclined; (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the starter unit and the center accessory in the front unit of another embodiment, and (b) is the positioning pin and mounting hole in (a) and the game panel. It is explanatory drawing which expands a relationship and shows it with a cross section. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a portion of a positioning pin in a front unit of another embodiment. (a) is an explanatory view showing the position of a positioning pin in a front unit of a further different embodiment from the front, (b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in cross section, and (c) is (b). It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which made the site|part contact|abut the game panel in the cross section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a distribution passage in which the passage is cranked downstream of a detection sensor, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution passage of an embodiment different from (a). and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing a distribution passage having a conventional detection sensor. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stop prevention portion for a game ball on a rolling surface, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention portion of an embodiment different from (a), and (c) FIG. 12D is an explanatory view showing a stop preventing portion of a further different embodiment, and FIG. 11D is an explanatory view showing a conventional rolling surface without a stop preventing portion; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 195; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 198. FIG. FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of power-on of the payout control unit subsequent to FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation preliminary determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 1st special design normal processing (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit design determination table (B), and a small hit design determination table (C). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process (step S284). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about jackpot control processing (step S235A). It is an example of a table showing the winning probability of the pachinko machine and the distribution of the winning symbols of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is an example of a table showing the winning probability of the pachinko machine and the distribution of the winning symbols of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transition of the pachinko machine. It is an example of a time saving frequency table of low probability non-working time saving game state. It is an example of a time saving frequency table in a high probability time saving gaming state. It is an example of a time saving frequency table in a low probability time saving gaming state. It is an example of a time saving frequency table in a high probability non-time saving game state. It is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table. It is an example of a variation pattern auxiliary table. It is an example of a hit time table. It is an example of a special prize opening opening time table. It is an example of a special winning opening opening pattern table. It is an example of a special winning opening opening pattern table. It is an example of a special winning opening opening pattern table. It is an example of a simultaneous variation rule table. It is an example of a simultaneous variation rule table. 4 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 4; 4 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 5; 4 is a timing chart showing state transitions of external information 6; It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production from the low probability non-time-saving gaming state to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state via the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (with ceiling). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production from the low probability non-time-saving gaming state to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state via the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (with ceiling). It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the production from the low probability non-time-saving gaming state to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state via the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (with ceiling). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation in a high probability non-time-saving game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the production|presentation of a high probability non-time-saving game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation performed at the time of shifting from a high probability non-work-time-saving game state to a low-probability time-saving game state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of comment selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of comment selection effect;

This embodiment includes means described below.
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A flat plate-shaped game panel in which a game area in which a game is played is provided in front,
A game machine comprising a rear unit having a decorative body visible through the game panel and a holder holding the decorative body and attached to the rear side of the game panel. There is
The holding body is
A specific surface portion is formed behind the front surface of the decorative body,
The specific surface portion is
It is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front.

Here, the ``game area'' is defined as ``a receiving port (for example, a starting port, a variable starting port, etc.) where a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which a player is advantageous by receiving game media. "Area where is provided", "receiving entrance where benefits including payout of game media are granted by accepting game media (for example, general winning entrance, start opening, big winning opening, accessory winning opening, V winning opening , etc.) are provided”, etc.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of one member", "things composed of a flat panel plate and a frame-like panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate", etc.

The "game panel" may be transparent, opaque and translucent, or non-translucent. In addition, the materials of the "game panel" include "polystyrene", "acrylic resin", "polycarbonate", "acetal resin", "vinyl chloride", "polyethylene terephthalate", "polyethylene", "polypropylene", "plywood", and the like.

In addition, as a configuration that is "visible" through the game panel, "the game panel is transparent and can be seen through the transparent part of the game panel", "the game panel has an opening penetrating back and forth, Visually visible through the opening of the game panel”, and the like.

Further, the "decorative body" may be immovable or movable as the game progresses. Further, the "decorative body" may or may not be capable of luminous decoration. In addition, the "decoration" of the decorative body may be a three-dimensional decoration with unevenness such as a 3D model or relief, or printing and display (liquid crystal display device, organic EL display device, light guide plate, etc.), etc. It may be a planar decoration by

The "decoration" of the decorative body includes "decoration imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine", "decoration imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the game machine", and "decoration imitating the concept of the game machine". "decoration imitating a predetermined background or scene in accordance with the game machine concept", "decoration such as a predetermined logo or dialogue in line with the concept of the game machine", "geometric pattern decoration", and the like.

In addition, the ``holding body'' includes ``a box-shaped object that holds the decoration at the front end or inside and has an open front'', ``a frame-like object that holds the decoration at the front end or inside'', and ``a decoration that holds the decoration. A box frame-shaped device that holds a performance display device that can be held at the front end or inside and can display a performance image at the rear. Further, the "holding body" may hold the decoration so that the front surface of the decoration protrudes forward from the front end of the holder, or the front surface of the decoration protrudes forward from the front end of the holder. It may also hold the decorative body so that it does not protrude forward.

Furthermore, as the "specific surface portion", there are "flat surface portion parallel to the front surface of the game panel", "curved surface portion recessed backward in the shape of a cone or truncated cone", "backward in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated pyramid". concave polyhedral portion”, “curved surface portion protruding forward in the shape of a cone or truncated cone”, “polyhedral portion protruding forward in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated polygonal pyramid”, and the like.

Further, the "specific surface portion" may be provided at the front end of the holding body, or may be provided behind the front end of the holding body. Further, the “specific surface portion” may be composed of a plurality of island-shaped surface portions that are separated from each other, or may be composed of a plurality of band-shaped surface portions along each edge of the holder. Alternatively, it may be configured by one belt frame-like or frame-like surface portion along the periphery of the holder.

In addition, the "predetermined member" includes a "mounting table such as a workbench used for assembly, transportation, storage, etc.", "tools used in assembly work", "other parts before assembly", etc.

By the way, it is conceivable that the decoration is held in the holding body as far forward as possible so that the decoration can be brought closer to the game area and can be easily seen. However, if the ornament is held as far forward as possible with respect to the holding body, the workbench, tools, other members (parts), etc. may be placed in front of the ornament during assembly of the game machine. The easier abutment makes the decorative body more susceptible to damage. If the ornament is damaged, it must be replaced with a new one, which increases the cost of the game machine. In addition, if the decorative body is assembled into the game machine without noticing the damage, the appearance of the game machine is deteriorated due to the presence of the damage, and the player's interest is reduced.

According to the configuration of means 1, a flat plate-like game panel having a game area in front of which a game is played, a decorative body visible through the game panel, and a decorative body are held and attached to the rear side of the game panel. and a rear unit having a holding body with a specific surface portion formed behind the front surface of the decorative body in the holding body of the game machine, and the specific surface portion It is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [5-9a. Back box relationship] chapter, FIGS. 156 to 160, etc. see description).

Accordingly, since the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the decoration, the decoration can be made more conspicuous than the specific surface, and the decoration can be provided relatively forward. , the distance from the player to the decoration can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the decoration can be made more visible. In addition, since the decoration can be provided further forward, the front of the decoration can be brought closer to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area. As a result, the decoration of the decorative body can be clearly visually recognized while viewing the inside of the game area. As a result, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and reliably exhibited, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the holding member holding the decoration is provided with the specific surface portion, for example, in the assembly of the game machine, when the holding member holds the decoration, the mounting table such as a workbench can be used. A columnar or block-like intermediate member higher than the distance from the front surface of the decorative body to the specific surface part is interposed between the specific member and the specific surface part when the predetermined member is placed face down with the front end side facing downward. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the contact of the predetermined member with the front surface of the decorative body. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the holder does not tilt or swing, and the holder is stabilized. Can be placed face down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative body from being damaged due to contact with a predetermined member, thereby maintaining the decorative body in good condition, and producing defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body. The occurrence can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed. Note that the columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from the predetermined member.

In addition, as described above, since the contact between the decorative body and the predetermined member can be avoided by the specific surface portion, when the holding body holding the decorative body is placed face down, the rear side of the holding body can be Installation work and wiring work of other members can be performed.

Furthermore, since the holding body is provided with the specific surface portion, the holding body can be placed face down even when the decoration body is not held, compared to the case where the decoration body is provided with the specific surface portion. Therefore, the holder can be placed face down even during assembly, and various working conditions can be handled.

Note that when the specific surface portion provided to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit is composed of a plurality of surface portions separated from each other, it is desirable to provide each specific surface portion at the same position in the front-rear direction. As a result, the length (height) of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion of the holding body and the predetermined member can all be the same when the holder is placed face down on the predetermined member, and the above-described effects can be obtained. While being able to show|play an effect reliably, labor, such as an assembly work, can be reduced. More specifically, when the positions of the specific surface portions in the front-rear direction are different, the length of the intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion of the holding body and the predetermined member when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down (height) is different. As a result, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, there is a risk of using an intermediate member having a length that does not correspond to the specific surface portion. There is a risk that the rear unit will tilt and the front surface of the decorative body will come into contact with a predetermined member. On the other hand, as described above, the length (height) of each intermediate member can be made the same by making the positions of the respective specific surface portions the same in the front-rear direction. When placing the back unit face down, it is sufficient to prepare intermediate members of the same length, and it is possible to prevent the use of intermediate members of different lengths that do not correspond to the specific surface portion, and to prevent the use of intermediate members of different lengths. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to the contact of a predetermined member, and to reduce labor for assembly work, etc., and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Further, the functional surface portion may have a shape other than a flat surface, such as a shape recessed backward or a shape protruding forward. Thereby, the intermediate member that abuts against the functional surface portion when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down has a shape that fits (engages) with the shape of the functional surface portion. When placed, movement in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding body or the rear unit from tilting or falling due to the functional surface part coming off from the intermediate member, so that the front surface of the decorative body comes into contact with the predetermined member due to tilting or falling. This can be avoided, and the effects as described above can be reliably achieved.

Also, the specific surface portion may be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (visible when viewed from the back). As a result, when an assembly work is performed to hold a decoration or the like on the holder from the front, the front end side of the holder is directed upward (upside down), and there is a gap between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member. By interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member longer than the distance from the specific surface portion to the rear surface of the rear unit, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member with the rear surface of the rear unit. The unit can be stabilized in a supine position, and assembly work from the front end side of the holder can be facilitated.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide the specific surface portion behind the front surface of the holder. As a result, when attaching the holder to the rear side of the game panel, the specific surface portion does not contact the game panel, and the holder (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problems.

In addition, the holder may further include a restricting portion capable of restricting relative movement of a member (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member) in contact with the specific surface portion. can be As a result, when the holding member or the rear unit is placed face down with the intermediate member interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and the specific surface portion during assembly work or the like, the intermediate member comes into contact with the restricting portion. It is possible to restrict the movement of the holder (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the particular surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member by the restricting portion of the holder and the holder or the rear unit from tilting or falling. can be avoided from coming into contact with a predetermined member, and the effects as described above can be reliably achieved.

Further, in the case where the holding body is provided with the regulating portion as described above, the regulating portion can regulate the movement of the holding body or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member. Since it is possible to make the unit difficult to move, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work in the face down state, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the front surface of the decorative body protrudes forward from the holding body. As a result, since the front surface of the decoration protrudes forward from the front surface of the holder, the distance from the player to the decoration can be shortened compared to the conventional one, and the decoration of the decoration can be made more visible. In addition, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of making the ornament stand out and strongly attracting the interest of the player. In addition, when the front surface of the ornament protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, the front surface (ornament) of the ornament can be positioned in the front-rear direction as close as possible to the front-rear position of the game area. Therefore, when the game area is focused, the decoration is also focused, so that the decoration of the decoration can be clearly seen while viewing the inside of the game area, and the decoration of the decoration can be surely seen by the player. be able to. As a result, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and reliably exhibited, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Also, the ornament may be configured to be capable of executing a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game. Thus, when the decoration executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the decoration can be made conspicuous by the effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decoration can be made to the player. In addition to being able to entertain the performance by the game, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player's expectation for the game can be heightened to suppress the decline in interest. can.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The specific surface portion
It is provided behind the front surface of the holding body.

According to the configuration of means 2, the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the holder (see the description regarding the functional surface portion 3011 of the back case 3010 in [Description of the Invention]). .

As a result, when attaching the holder to the rear side of the game panel, the specific surface portion does not contact the game panel, and the holder (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problems.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The holder is
and further comprising a restricting portion capable of restricting relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface portion.

Here, as the restricting portion, "a plate-shaped portion extending forward from the peripheral edge of the specific surface portion", "a portion projecting forward from the peripheral edge of the specific surface portion", "a hole-shaped portion", and "a groove-shaped portion" may be used. of", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 3, the holding member is provided with a restricting portion capable of restricting the relative movement of a member in contact with the specific surface portion (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member). , further (see the description of the back box 3010 and the functional surface portion 3011 in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, when the holding member or the rear unit is placed face down with the intermediate member interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and the specific surface portion during assembly work or the like, the intermediate member comes into contact with the restricting portion. It is possible to restrict the movement of the holder (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the particular surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member by the restricting portion of the holder and the holder or the rear unit from tilting or falling. can be avoided from coming into contact with a predetermined member, and the effects as described above can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the movement of the holder or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member can be regulated by the regulating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to move the holder or the rear unit in the face down state. As a result, the assembly work can be easily performed in the state, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said decoration is
The front surface protrudes forward from the holding body."

Here, the ``decorative body'' whose front surface protrudes forward from the holding body is defined as ``the rear surface of a portion of the game panel at least in which the game area is provided in front is recessed forward, and the recessed portion "Decorative body into which the front end is inserted", "Decorative body having an opening penetrating the game panel in the front-rear direction, into which the front end is inserted", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the front surface of the decorative body is projected forward from the holding body (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the back front peripheral edge decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 See description for body 3201).

As a result, since the front surface of the decoration protrudes forward from the front surface of the holder, the distance from the player to the decoration can be shortened compared to the conventional one, and the decoration of the decoration can be made more visible. In addition, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of making the ornament stand out and strongly attracting the interest of the player. In addition, since the front surface of the ornament protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, the front surface (decoration) of the ornament is positioned as close as possible to the front and rear positions of the game area. Therefore, when the game area is focused, the decoration is also focused, so that the decoration of the decoration can be clearly seen while viewing the inside of the game area, and the decoration of the decoration can be seen by the player. I can definitely show you. As a result, the decorative effect of the decorative body can be sufficiently and reliably exhibited, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The said ornament is
A predetermined effect can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game.

Here, ``according to the progress of the game'' means that ``the game media driven into the game area by the player is received by a receiving slot provided in the game area (for example, a general winning slot, a starting slot, a large "According to the acceptance of the game medium into the game medium into the game area, such as a prize winning opening, a prize winning opening, a V winning opening, etc." (For example, a gate, a warp passage, a stage, etc.) ", "the game medium thrown into the game area by the player is received by a receiving opening (for example, starting point) provided in the game area. "according to the result of a special lottery drawn by acceptance into the game area", "a game medium driven into the game area by the player is accepted by a receiving opening (e.g., starting opening) provided in the game area. Depending on the type of effect (for example, ready-to-win effect, jackpot effect, losing effect, etc.) for suggesting the result of the special lottery that has been selected and drawn, ``depending on the amount of game media that is driven into the game area Depending on", "depending on the length of the blank of the game medium to be driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, the predetermined "effect" includes "light emitting effect", "movable effect", "display effect of effect image", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body can execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 See the description regarding the back front peripheral decoration 3201).

Thus, when the decoration executes a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the decoration can be made conspicuous by the effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decoration can be made to the player. In addition to being able to entertain the performance by the game, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player's expectation for the game can be heightened to suppress the decline in interest. can.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A flat plate-shaped game panel in which a game area in which a game is played is provided in front,
A game machine comprising a rear unit having a decorative body visible through the game panel and a holder holding the decorative body and attached to the rear side of the game panel. There is
The decoration is
The front surface protrudes forward from the holding body, and a predetermined effect can be executed according to the progress of the game,
The holding body is
a specific surface portion provided behind the front surface of the holding body so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit when viewed from the front;
and a regulating portion capable of regulating the relative movement of the member in contact with the specific surface portion.

According to the configuration of means 6, a flat plate-like game panel having a game area in front of which a game is played, a decorative body visible through the game panel, and a decorative body are held and attached to the rear side of the game panel. and a rear unit having a holding body, wherein the front surface of the decorative body protrudes forward from the holding body, and a predetermined The holding body has a specific surface portion provided behind the front surface of the holding body so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit in a front view, and a member in contact with the specific surface portion. and a regulating portion capable of regulating the movement of the object.

As a result, the decorative body visible through the game panel having the game area provided in front thereof is held by the holding body attached to the rear side of the game panel, and the front face of the decorative body is positioned forward of the holding body. Since the decoration is protruded, the distance from the player to the decoration can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the decoration can be made more visible. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided behind the front surface of the holding body, the specific surface portion does not come into contact with the game panel, and the holding body (rear unit) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel without any problem. In addition, the decorative body can be made more conspicuous than the specific surface portion. In addition, since the front surface of the ornament protrudes further forward than the front surface of the holding body, the front surface (decoration) of the ornament is positioned as close as possible to the front and rear positions of the game area. Therefore, when the game area is focused, the decoration is also focused, so that the decoration of the decoration can be clearly seen while viewing the inside of the game area, and the decoration of the decoration can be seen by the player. I can definitely show you. As described above, the decoration can be made conspicuous, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the decorative effect of the decoration can be fully and surely exhibited, thereby entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Further, since the decoration can execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, when the decoration executes the predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, the effect can make the decoration stand out. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can enjoy the performance by the decorative body, and the player can be made to think that something good will happen. , it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the holding member holding the decoration is provided with the specific surface portion, for example, in the assembly of the game machine, the holding member holding the decoration can be placed on a mounting table such as a workbench. A columnar or block-like intermediate member higher than the distance from the front surface of the decorative body to the specific surface part is interposed between the specific member and the specific surface part when the predetermined member is placed face down with the front end side facing downward. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the contact of the predetermined member with the front surface of the decorative body. At this time, since the specific surface portion is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the rear unit, when the holder or the rear unit is placed face down, the holder does not tilt or swing, and the holder is stabilized. Can be placed face down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative body from being damaged due to contact with a predetermined member, thereby maintaining the decorative body in good condition, and producing defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the decorative body. The occurrence can be prevented, and an increase in the cost of the game machine can be suppressed. Note that the columnar or block-shaped intermediate member may protrude from the predetermined member.

In addition, as described above, since the contact between the decorative body and the predetermined member can be avoided by the specific surface portion, when the holding body holding the decorative body is placed face down, the rear side of the holding body can be Installation work and wiring work of other members can be performed.

Furthermore, since the holding body is provided with the specific surface portion, the holding body can be placed face down even in the middle of assembly without holding the decoration body, compared to the case where the decoration body is provided with the specific surface portion. , can be adapted to various working conditions.

In addition, since the holding body has a restricting portion capable of restricting the relative movement of a member (for example, an intermediate member interposed between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member) that is in contact with the specific surface portion. In assembly work, etc., when the intermediate member is interposed between a predetermined member such as a workbench and the specific surface portion and the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member abuts against the restricting portion, thereby causing the holding body to move. It is possible to restrict the movement of the (rear unit) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the particular surface portion from falling off from the intermediate member by the restricting portion of the holder and the holder or the rear unit from tilting or falling. can be avoided from coming into contact with a predetermined member, and the effects as described above can be reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, since the movement of the holder or the rear unit in the direction along the predetermined member can be regulated by the regulating portion of the holder, the holder or the rear unit in the face down state is made difficult to move. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work in the face-down state, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine.

It should be noted that the specific surface portion may have a shape other than a flat surface, such as a shape recessed backward or a shape protruding forward. Thereby, when the holding body or the rear unit is placed face down, the intermediate member that abuts on the specific surface portion has a shape that fits (engages) with the shape of the specific surface portion, so that the holding body or the rear unit can be laid face down. When placed, movement in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding body or the rear unit from tilting or falling due to the specific surface portion coming off from the intermediate member. This can be avoided, and the effects as described above can be reliably achieved.

Also, the specific surface portion may be provided so as to face the rear of the rear unit (visible when viewed from the back). As a result, when an assembly work is performed to hold a decoration or the like on the holder from the front, the front end side of the holder is directed upward (upside down), and there is a gap between the specific surface portion and the predetermined member. By interposing a columnar or block-shaped intermediate member longer than the distance from the specific surface portion to the rear surface of the rear unit, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member with the rear surface of the rear unit. The unit can be stabilized in a supine position, and assembly work from the front end side of the holder can be facilitated.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
The game machine is
a plurality of receiving ports provided in the game area so as to be able to receive game media;
A pachinko machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the receiving slot.

Here, the ``acceptance opening'' includes a ``general prize winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``advantageous game state that is always open within the game area and gives an advantage to the player by accepting game media.'' A start prize winning opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether to generate a Acceptable variable winning openings (variable starting openings, prize winning openings, etc.)", "Normal symbols that are drawn when game media pass through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area Depending on the result of the lottery, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that enables the acceptance of game media, and a specific area within the game area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.) Depending on the lottery result of the ordinary symbols drawn by passing the medium, it is possible to accept the game medium, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous due to the acceptance of the game medium. Variable start winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning that generates an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous when the game media received in the accessory winning opening is distributed and accepted by the distribution means , and ``advantageous gaming states in which the player is advantageous, such as a large winning opening or a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media'', and the like.

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and special symbols drawn by the lottery means. A special lottery result display means for displaying the lottery results of the special patterns drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special patterns after variably displaying the special patterns in accordance with the lottery results, and the special lottery result display means. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing the large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol that generates the advantageous game state is displayed (so-called digipachi machine) ), ``distributing means for distributing game media received in the prize winning openings, and opening and closing the prize winning openings in a predetermined pattern when the game media distributed by the distributing means are received in the V prize winning openings. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous (so-called Hanemono machine)", "has a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, and a game to the start opening Depending on the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by accepting the medium, the big winning slot or the prize winning slot is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game media received in the winning slot is distributed to the V winning slot. Equipped with an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing the prize winning opening or the big winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

According to the configuration of the means 7, the game machine comprises a plurality of receiving ports which are provided in the game area so as to be able to receive game media, and a payout device which pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receiving of the game media into the receiving port. and a pachinko machine. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 89) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Main control unit 1300 having cage main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311; A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is arranged, an effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 that provide (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout). The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2004 , a gate 2002 , a second starting opening 2005 and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. Thereby, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Thus, the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 195 .

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the lower right unit 2400, and the back unit according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. 3000 back front edge decoration unit 3200, back top front effect unit 3300, back bottom front effect unit 3400, back top back effect unit 3500, back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. are used to perform light emitting effects and movable effects. , can entertain the player.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. Lateral fixing portion 23b, flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the rear side of horizontal fixing portion 23a, and from the rear side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain board by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 at the . As a result, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the balls are discharged from the port member 47 to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, since the effect sound can also attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass, and it is possible to amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the tray unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end when viewed from the rear at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame secondary relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 covering a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 operates a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to release the ball. 540 is used to play a game of hitting the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. .

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42). A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in a front view. and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front-rear direction and exposes the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 forward.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the player can be guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 in a favorable manner.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 82). and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decoration board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4; It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101 d of the door frame base 101 .

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to rotate with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can support.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. Fig. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. 2 is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 2, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a). Fig. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and Fig. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Fig. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34(a) from the front, and Fig. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of Fig. 34(a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing with the frame 4 . The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder main body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 attached rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A band plate-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at the lower end side of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is the first cam member 134 that rotates. a strip-shaped second arm 137 which is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from behind except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets that rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and .

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. are doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a cylindrical shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the rear cover 138. The shaft portion 138a is engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are made of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder main body 131 which passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end of which is attached to the front piece. there is A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131. 34(a) and 34(b), etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131. As shown in FIGS.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 positioned at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower portions of the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the second arm 137 has its upper end side attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that acts upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is generated by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the portion where the first cam member 134 is attached. 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance from the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. greater power to do so.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136 . , mainly via the second arm 137, the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is used to rotate the first cam member 134 clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 from the normal state, the upper end side of the first cam member 134 rotates to the right of the center of rotation. As the first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, the second arm 137 attached to the lower end of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of .

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. , and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tends to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases. The arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 .

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137 . Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned clockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the operation is reversed to that described above. It will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are phased at an angle of 90 degrees to each other, are attached. , so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is engaged regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132). , the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be used. cost increase can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who has knowledge of the structure may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to commit a fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, since the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated, and the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc. are opened. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 at the part attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. be in a state where Therefore, by positioning the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the dead center by either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation from the first cam member 134 can be transmitted to the second cam member 135 by the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137, so the rotation of the first cam member 134 The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a large resistance to rotation, and unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of the tool from being caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, thereby preventing the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 from moving. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from being unlocked due to illegal operation of the locking unit 650.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but not limited to, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , and so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the discharge solenoid 542 by the discharge control section 633b (see FIG. 167) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball extracting member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being caught in the partition portion 143a. You can prevent bouncing.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to make the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2004, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the portion with a narrowed shape, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, through which the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200 are communicated. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is moved by the player's operation. It can be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later; A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. a front lens 185;

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the handle 195 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 195 so that the handle 195 can be returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handlebar cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c. is inserted, the handle base 181 is brought into a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291 .

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two ring portions extending in an arc around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. A slit 195d and a locking projection 195e projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 195d and locking the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and clockwise around one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend counterclockwise from 120 degree angles. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. there is The mounting stays 196b of the three handle guides 196 are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are positioned behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference. (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I'm trying

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and a command and address line from the peripheral control board 1510. , and a clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510 are connected. . Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into five groups according to the command. Each set of ten LEDs 184a can be illuminated with an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, can be individually (in this case, assembled). Since it is possible to control each unit, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electric wiring can be simplified.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the handle 195 rotates. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with strength according to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195, and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be pressed. By canceling the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, An annular board cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration board 293 from the front and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylindrical portion 291a whose inner diameter decreases forward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a tubular rear tubular portion 291c penetrating through the intermediate wall portion 291b and extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter allowing insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181; and the inner periphery of the rear tubular portion 291c. A plurality of (here, three) projections 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylindrical portion 291a, and a portion extending from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front cylinder portion 291f; and an opening 291h penetrating at the lower portion of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. A guide piece 291g can be positioned within 196a to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front cylindrical portion 291a with a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. .

The inner member 292 has an annular base portion 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center. divided (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with 3 systems for a total of 18 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and A wiring cable made up of four wires, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. there is Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address through the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into six groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b with an outer peripheral edge of the cylindrical side plate portion 294b extending short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at its front end, and has a spindle frustum (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b are provided in the circumferential direction by notching forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. , circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. A portion behind the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are positioned on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 is mounted. 101b.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported while its movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 being decorated with light, the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light.

The handle cover unit 290 has cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is positioned on both the left and right sides and on the lower side. It is possible to make it look as if a hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a is open. As a result, the player is relieved from the mental anxiety of sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. can be done.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is positioned below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed into the outer frame base assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension line of the slanting direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional structure 40. As shown in FIG. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening portion 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening portion 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his/her fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame speaker By vibrating the 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, and the door frame 3 and the like can be pulled. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant strength even without continuing to twist the hand. In this way, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in a variety of ways, so the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. A handle 195 and a handle cover unit 290 in a form never seen before can be seen at the site where the player is, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained and entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to output the production sound, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to be output. The air inside the enclosure 624 due to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the inner space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47 causes the sound pressure to rise. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Sound pressure stimulation can be applied to the player's finger operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the steering wheel operation can be changed, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The interior of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving the stress on the player and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. can.

In addition, as described above, the handle 195 and the handle 195 may be pressed against the finger of the player operating the handle 195 while inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 on which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is applied to the grill member 46. Since stimulation is applied by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are reduced compared to the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism, etc., and the handle unit 180 can be made difficult to break. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile. Although the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's fingers can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it is possible to give a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player is relieved. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward through the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover unit 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be grasped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only fingers, and the outer ring The portion 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be operated by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and outside of the 290 with fingers and capable of various game ball B hitting operations (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, fingers may be hung between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 to grasp them, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by fingers while straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform a handle operation that cannot be performed with a conventional pachinko machine, so that a variety of handle operations can be provided to the player. , making it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to avoid narrowing of the game area 5a, and it is possible to relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the luminous decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are conspicuous. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports an outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and A guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, since the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be hit even if the handle 195 is operated in a touched state. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B in a state in which the handle 195 is not touched, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . Mounting base (illustration omitted) protruding forward attached to the mounting base, Dish unit relay board (illustration omitted) attached to the right of the mounting base, and ball attached to the top surface of the mounting base A rental operation unit 220, an upper tray ball removal pre-unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray ball removal pre-unit, It has

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed in the production operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation part base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer periphery board cover 325 covering the upper side of the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. and a partial relay board unit 330 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 is provided, and the operation unit base 315, and is attached to the effect operation unit 350. A production operation part elevating mechanism 360 that supports the part unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. there is

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. A guide passage portion 201a (Fig. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the game ball B is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

In addition, the guiding passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball B static electricity can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the portion of the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a conventional door frame cut at the same portion as (a). It is a cross-sectional view showing the main part, and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be discharged through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the center axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by the lower tray ball supply port 211j, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a possibility that the game balls B are concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B flow from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full-tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room left in the lower tray 202. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guiding portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is extended obliquely to the left and forward, as shown in FIG. is tilted to More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it becomes a distance.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned to the left of the center axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. are moving to

As a result, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is moved leftward by moving the lower plate ball removal hole 202a to the left. In the state where 202a is closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of game balls B stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. Since the left side wall of the port 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202 through which the game ball B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the post-extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and released. , and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. It has a main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. It has a pre-extraction unit (not shown) and an after-extraction upper tray unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the pre-extraction upper tray unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. and an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) extending vertically and having an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 .

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed opening, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper tray. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feed guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-ball removal unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feed opening 211a is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210. The game ball B inside is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guiding portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left portion of the lower tray 202). be. As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms part of the inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall facing the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower tray ball supply port 211c. It is inclined so as to move leftward from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guiding portion 213), at least one game ball B is placed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (the rear end of the lower plate 202) and the portion directly behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. A distance (gap) is formed through which the liquid can flow. As a result, when the game ball B, which has flowed through the ball extraction guideway 241c from the upper plate 201, contacts the ball guide portion 213 from the right side, it is guided left forward by the inclination of the ball guide portion 213, and the game is played. The ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower plate 202 away from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a in the lower plate 202. - 特許庁In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower dish ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, so that it is guided by the ball extraction guideway 241c. When the game ball B contacts the inner wall on the left side of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rebounding to the right, and is sent to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b in the lower tray 202. Instead, it is stored in the area on the right side of the bottom plate 202 where the bottom plate ball extraction hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, the accumulation of the game balls B (indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) concentrates in the area on the right side of the center of the lower tray 202, and the right side in the lower tray 202 When the game balls B concentrated in the area block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, and the tank is full. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and determine that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room in the left area within the lower tray 202 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guideway 241c is guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. can do. Also, in the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. From the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guidance path 241c) The game balls B discharged to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game balls B can be accumulated throughout the lower tray 202. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202. More game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

As evidence of the above effects, the inventors of the present application have found that when the full tank detection sensor 154 is activated, the fuel is stored in the respective lower trays 202 in the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The number of game balls B was counted. The game ball B was counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the lower tray 202 of the present embodiment (product of the present embodiment) holds more game balls B than the conventional product at any time. It was confirmed that it was possible to store about 40% more game balls B than the conventional product on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning cash or a prepaid card thrown into the machine after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball ejection button 222 located near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a button on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the upper tray ball extraction button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball rental operation base 223, a ball rental display unit 226 arranged in the rear lower part of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental button 224 on the outside of the base unit 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern is applied to the part of , as if the sound is coming out of the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern of a light bulb is applied to the part of . The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the sound volume and the amount of light are adjusted using the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation portion 301 is not executed. Sometimes, the effect operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the amount of light have to be changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted. can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
The unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging B to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be vertically slidable. , a spring (not shown) that urges the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward; A ball removal guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward from the position and then guiding it rightward in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guiding path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper disk ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion. and a projecting operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward. The lower end of button 222 abuts. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the post-upper-disc-ball-extraction unit 240, the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper-movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 moves through the operation receiving portion of the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is positioned at the end of upward movement. In addition, since the upper disk ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball ejection button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball extracting member 143 can move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves toward the entrance 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201, is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b opening below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c which is engaged, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. and a lower front decorative portion 252b that protrudes forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with an effect operation unit attachment portion to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid. 265 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

When the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed to move the lower tray ball removal lid 265, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a remains open. , and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pressed rearward and then released. returns to its normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 includes a left plate decoration body 271 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and which has translucency, and a left plate decoration which has translucency penetrating the left plate decoration body 271. It is provided with a lens 272 and a left plate decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 has a semi-circular arc projecting forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The right plate decoration unit 275 includes a right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends in the left and right direction and has translucency, and a right plate decoration that has translucency penetrating through the right plate decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a right plate decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right plate decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the center axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are lit, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side swelling portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from front and lower. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position, and (b) is a effect operation from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the part unit has moved to the raised position; FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. (vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the plate unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape, and the production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside and is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). An outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315. 330 and .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projection force. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation portion base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular shape having an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the production operation section 301 is inserted. and a unit top cover 312 . The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled on the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral substrate cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operation part relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body part 315a of the operation part base 315, the operation part relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation part relay board 332 from behind. and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 as shown.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the production operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, inside button decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It relays connection between the elevation drive motor 367 , the pressure detection sensor 373 , the elevation detection sensor 374 , the protrusion force detection sensor 375 , the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 .

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed tubular button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to move up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354 and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. a contact sensor body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353 .

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. and a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a portion of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 can be satisfactorily controlled. It can be decorated with light emission in a normal state.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. can be done. In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disc shape with a diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351 . The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a center hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protruding from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. and a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352 . In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body can be detected with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351 . Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation portion 303. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and enters a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing force. It is detected by sensor 373 . Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the effect operation section unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation section 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302 . Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 , by forming minute unevenness or a plurality of streaks on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 , an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation part 302 . can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more can be provided.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be made opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351 . This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button main body 351 can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 provided below. can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can raise and lower the production operation unit unit 350. As shown in FIG. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached inside the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylinders arranged symmetrically, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operating portion base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 and a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353 are attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 to direct light upward. and a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and urging the button base 354 upward. and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363 .

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operating button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lift cam drive gear member 370 having a central shaft 366 therethrough and rotatably mounted thereon.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected at the lower end to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366. When rotated, the elevating cam raises and lowers the button base 354. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 is attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating mechanism base 361 that is attached to the elevation cam drive gear member 370. (Elevation cam member 371) up-and-down detection sensor 374 that detects the up-and-down of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotation position, and the elevation mechanism base 361 attached to the elevation mechanism base 361, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 of the elevation undersprung holding member A projection force detection sensor 375 that detects the projection force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 and lifting springs that penetrate the base body 361a. and a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 . A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a projection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The lower protrusion of the upper base 363 is brought into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 to form a space between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361 in which the lifting cam member 371 can be accommodated. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The lift cam member 371 is configured so that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the lift cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b. is formed in The elevation cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a by rotating, and the button base 354 (the effect operation portion unit 350) which is urged upward by the elevation spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 . be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved above the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. When the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370 c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 , thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 . is detected.

The protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and the button base 354 is lifted by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through it. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. can be made In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging section 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). ). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The part unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 match, and the effect operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (state where the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the elevation drive gear 368 is engaged. The elevation cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a visible from the front in FIG. The button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c while rolling from the 371c to the left portion of the engaging portion 371c of the first cam 371b.

Then, when the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 is lifted with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. Can be protruded into position.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is positioned between the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371d of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) as a whole moves upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button main body 351 is positioned above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. also protrudes upwards.

When the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the effect operation unit 350 moves the lifting spring 365. , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the effect operation section unit 350 (the pressing operation section 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation portion 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is returned to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the operation button elevation drive motor 367 that rotates the elevation cam member 371, thereby reducing damage (failure) of the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the effect operation section unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in the effect operation section elevation mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (the button main body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving from the engaging portion 371c) to the second cam 371d. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moving to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. will move upward along the When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, if the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 can be protruded upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. can be stopped. By projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pushed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can be pushed downward. can function as

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button main body 351 can be reduced.

Thus, depending on the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, it is possible to change the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), depending on the game state (for example, the first start opening 2004 and By varying the amount of projection of the button body 351 according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2005, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. can.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a concave portion is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the concave portion so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 stops the elevation cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, thereby causing the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) to protrude upward ( projection force) can be changed. The protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and from the gear portion 384a An adjusting screw 384, which has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw 384, the pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 are in contact with each other.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the projection force adjusting drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and a front and rear portion of the main body portion 385a. It has spring holding recesses 385c which are provided at both ends and which are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and a flat plate-like detection piece 385d which extends upward from the front end of the body portion 385a. . The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 . The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, thereby vertically moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 through the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 that urges the effect operating unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward by the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lift unsprung member 385 upward, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 moves the lift unsprung member 385 upward. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350, so that when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body. Detecting the contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, a player's finger or the like) to 351, the production operation unit unit 350 is projected by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the object to be detected. Sometimes, the vertical position of the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected to vary the projecting force of the button body 351 . As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so if the button body 351 abuts strongly, something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not possible, and to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, according to the game state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol that is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005) By increasing or decreasing the projecting force of the button body 351, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method for changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation section unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, a force different from the original use is required. A large amount of stress acts on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal structure will deteriorate and break at an early stage. On the other hand, in the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, the projection force ( Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. It can be made to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) that can project upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation part unit 350 is in the state of the effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310 . Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 has a production operation unit peripheral decoration board 320 arranged below a unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350). , an annular button external decoration substrate 355 and an inner button decoration substrate 364 are arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303 . The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is translucent. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The effect operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the effect operation portion peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light by means of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation portion 303 . In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, light is emitted from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit top cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58(a). state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable the contact operation in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participatory effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, so that the player recognizes that the contact operation has been accepted. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operational feeling. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) is given to the player by means of the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. You may suggest it.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. good.

In addition, as an effect in the normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300, or a voice, sound effect, etc. is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). The urging force of the spring 365 protrudes (pops up) upward. More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the button base 354 and the effect operation unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrude upward due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of attention.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is activated. When the button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 , and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 . As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

In addition, during the above effects, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude. may be suggested. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351, so that the player's expectations for the game may be suggested by the strength of the projection force.

In addition, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like is outside the projecting range of the upward projecting button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the player approaches the . As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting force of the button body 351 is strengthened or weakened by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380, and the degree of expectation for the game is suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like. You can do it.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound surprises the player. can be done. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projection of the button body 351. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) is generally operated. It is also possible to execute an effect such that a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button is performed. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation section unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect such as contacting the projecting button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380. This makes it difficult to move the protruding button body 351, thereby preventing the button body 351 (contact operation) from moving. 302) can be easily touched.

In addition, as an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction so that the button base 354 The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. The drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 clockwise in plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam member 371 halfway through the third cam 371e. may be stopped so that the upward projection of the button body 351 is stopped at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

In this way, even when the button body 351 is protruded halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player-participation type production. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), after projecting the effect operation unit 350, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. be minimized. As a result, since the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation section unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is improved. can entertain. In addition, as an effect of pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn. The biasing force may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more diverse effects can be achieved. It is possible to present an effect and make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body is provided so that the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of stages of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance of 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. may be provided to detect in multiple stages and be utilized for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and are not in contact with the button body 351, By dividing the stage into stages in which a player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the performance according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents a variety of performances to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 385 has been moved upward, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, the player can be entertained with various productions, and the player is bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation section unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decoration board 320 . In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) approaches the production operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inside decoration board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the inside button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is moved by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down. , and between the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, a shield connected to a ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 allows the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and to prevent erroneous detection in the main body 358 of the contact detection sensor.

[3-5 f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). and (c) is a representation in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, and the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like; FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same symbols are attached to the same components as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. A left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the top surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor main body 391L becomes detection, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detection. becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body to change. Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detection, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R The capacitance has changed and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's fingers etc. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with more diverse movements, and to present to the player a player-participation-type effect that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. , the player-participation-type performance in which the contact operation unit 302 is operated can be made more enjoyable. It should be noted that more complex motions can be detected by increasing the number of contact detection bodies.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of mutually different locations. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, the A contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the accuracy of detecting contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be used as a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may get injured, or where there is a risk of causing annoyance to other players). A certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent conduct, etc.) may be provided so that when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

Moreover, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switching mechanism that connects only one contact detection body 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection body 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . The switching unit 394 may be "switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor", "switched by other electronic circuits", or "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)." The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are switched along with the movement".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type production is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like touches. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are configured to move forward and backward, the front side of the effect operation unit 300 is the first When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394 when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted. You may make it switch so that it may carry out.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. to As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby avoiding the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, if the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed behind the effect operation unit 300 or the like. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in a non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), a contact detection body 395 for detecting contact of a player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is circular, polygonal, geometrical, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a shape imitating a predetermined item. A shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like may be used. Thereby, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers do not come into direct contact with it. can be smooth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the button interior decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detection body 397 may be provided under the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided therebelow. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. Alternatively, the decoration 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like. good.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, it does not detect the contact of the player's finger or the like or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By causing the player to notice the existence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation part 302) for the first time, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. Figure 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a are mounted vertically and arranged at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are covered. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides forward the light from the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , and upper and lower parts of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 . From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction on the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the inner layer 3a is partly outside. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 15 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 423b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 21 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding tube 424b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 holds the light-guiding shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light-guiding shaft 427a of the left-side upper light-guiding member 427, which will be described later. is. This holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding tube 424b, the second light guide plate of the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a is formed. The light from the LED 422b irradiates the light guide shaft portion 427a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides, thereby avoiding the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding tube 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the holding tube 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, which faces the door frame more, irradiates the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 426. - 特許庁

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429, are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further includes a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant arcuate recessed shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left-side upper light guide member 427 guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left side middle light guide member 428 guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are vertically spaced at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left side lower light guide member 429 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the handle cover 295 . In addition, the color of the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the portion below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end thereof is below the door window 101a and is located on the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. is positioned above the speaker mouth 211b in the . The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is positioned outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door-frame left-side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door-frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative substrate 423 are arranged at positions that are somewhat rearwardly away from the front surface of the door-frame left-side decorative body 426 . is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the door frame The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward. is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429. As a result, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

In addition, the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 , the light guide shaft portion 427 a of the left side upper light guide member 427 , the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a irradiate the light with an even amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly distributed. It can be decorated with light emission in a plane.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, , Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the luminous decoration of the side decorations 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door-frame right side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted vertically on the front surface at regular intervals, and a door frame right side base 431 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame. A door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and a door frame right side lower A right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and a door frame right side attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration 435 is provided.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 includes a right-side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and a right-side lower decorative board 433 of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of ornamental holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The left side decoration 438 is provided between the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A light-transmitting right side left lens 439 having a fitting decorative portion 439a and a plurality of light-transmissive right side left lenses 439 and a door frame right side base 431 are attached so as to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431, and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A translucent right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. Further, the door frame right side base 431 has a rear end side that extends vertically over the entire height, and a front end side that extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to near the center in the vertical direction, and then curves rearward. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end are provided at a portion of the height where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. These reflector portions 431a have rear end sides that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a which are provided rearwardly of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a , penetrates in the left and right direction (they are recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431 reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of a door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c of a door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. and the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 21 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the above 21 systems, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 described later He is trying to control a total of 24 systems|strains of 3 systems for 1 group above the 3rd LED433c divided into 2 groups.

Although not shown, this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 4, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group out of the grouped groups can be caused to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs are mounted: 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in both upper-lower sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, and from the seventh to ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. and the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 27 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 has two sets of third LEDs 433c. Among them, the upper one set of 3 systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front side first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the rear side third LED 433c ) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two LEDs for supplying electric power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock line and a distribution cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of Six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c of the lower set of the two sets, each set It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. Around the sides it is shaped like a dish widening forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a projecting forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing through the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides thereof, The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame irradiates the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side upper light guide member 436 guides the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side lower light guide member 437 guides the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is two-color-molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, in the same manner as the handle cover 295 and the door-frame left-side base 421 described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and protrudes leftward to form the decoration of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 when fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decoration 438. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 . This door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . Further, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b in the same manner as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is located on the right side of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side right side decoration 440. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are the same as those of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial patterns of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. is formed in the same color as that of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height part of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door frame right side unit 430, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 has a substantially half-height portion that protrudes forward greatly from the top, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions that are somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 . is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435 rearward. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433, so that the reflector portion of the door-frame right-side base 431 is illuminated. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 that is attached can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the right and left sides of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 (parts of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be conspicuous and which has a high appeal to the players.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b light-embellish the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. Together with the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 are decorated with light. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are illuminated to be decorated with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front side. luminous decoration or prevent it. As a result, the door frame right side decoration 435 and the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent of each other and decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with a uniform amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 has a door-frame right-side decoration 435 with a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b causes the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to be projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadow is not projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be obscured. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the bottom end of the.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; (see Figure 72).

In addition, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top central speaker and the top side speaker, and the front surface of the door frame top base 451 A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451 above. there is

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decoration 453 extends laterally in a semicircular shape along the front end of the top cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front to the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . It is Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top central speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate left decoration 271 and a plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button main body 351 of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a unit upper cover 312, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration 453 are a left plate decoration board 273, a right plate decoration board 278, an effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, a door frame left side upper decoration board 422, a door frame left side lower decoration board 423, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, these decoration boards are arranged. By properly emitting light from the LEDs, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is positioned in the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button main body 351 as the effect operation section 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere. , the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be made difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated, and the effect operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere allows the player to see other This pachinko machine can be made to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from a pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, can enhance the appeal to the player, and can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation section 301 (the contact operation section 302 , and the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the production operation section 301 can easily see the entire production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation section 301, and to heighten expectations for execution of the player-participation type performance by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加At the same time, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by the operation of the performance operation unit 301 to increase interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows a door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed in two colors using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. Circular and radial patterns are formed by appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration portion 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of resin), light transmittance, etc., it is possible to greatly change the appearance even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island equipment, thereby providing a colorful feeling to the players. It is possible to enhance the appeal to

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward from the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot decoration is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decoration body at the same time. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the substrate in a flat shape.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are light-transmissive. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are formed in the same color with different ratios, since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, the polka-dot circles are difficult to see, and the appearance looks as if the polka-dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle is colored white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is colored pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes The polka-dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka-dots. Thus, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. Cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment is made colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a strong impact on the players who are playing in the game hall and attracting the players.

Further, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorations to improve the appearance. can be done.

In addition, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Thus, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layers 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In order to prevent the inner layer 3a from being seen through from the outside, the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b at the time of a model change. As a result, the way of looking at the decoration of the decoration can be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decoration.

In addition, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the inner layer 3a has a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, attaching a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using such a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decoration can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decoration. , it is possible to suppress the increase in cost for model change.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate that can irradiate the inside of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the door frame 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of polka dots) can be decorated with bright light, and the outer side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light, thereby improving the appearance and allowing the player to see the right side of the door frame. The luminous decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also illuminate the outer layer 3b. The entire side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are displayed neatly and the game is played. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the attention of players.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is illuminated, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the player's interest. In detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is caused to emit light. Without it, only the surface-exposed portions of the inner layer 3a are visible. On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the part exposed to the surface and the part of the hole in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are luminous decoration. The part to be illuminated can be varied, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body informs the player of the arrival of a chance or the change of the hitting operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suggesting and capable of various performances.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can give a different impression (appearance) when viewed from the front left and from the front right, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 is attracted by the fact that the appearance is different from that of the previous excursion. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be made to attract players who are wandering around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in a front view for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

The handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a whose front side is covered with a handle front lens 185. Between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. is provided. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a line on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, two LEDs on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 on the bottom right and . The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that light is emitted to rotate around the handle 195, and light is emitted toward the center of the handle 195. A player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加In addition, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has a substantially square door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center of the front view, as shown in the drawing. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decoration 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, four LEDs 273a are mounted on the front surface of the plate left decorative substrate 273 in a row in the horizontal direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the plate right decorative substrate 278 to be described later to emit light. (illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

The plate right decorative substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically at regular intervals, and two LEDs 422a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for driving a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 422b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 422c. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It has 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a on the front surface. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 432b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two groups, the second LED 432b divided into three groups, the third LED 432c divided into two groups, and the third group divided into two groups in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A set of third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by an LED driver 432d. It can emit light in full color.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a on the front surface. 12 mounted second LEDs 433b, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface with a gap in the vertical direction, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the lower two third LEDs 433c. and an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top. , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups , LED driver 433d, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 423 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are used. The substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are formed in a shape asymmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the door window 101a. In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

The door-frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. While the numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b are the same, the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72 A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effects.

On the door frame top center decorative board 455, there are six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, LEDs 455a, LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each set of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 passes through the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are arranged to form the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426. The light is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the player can see a light emitting effect of emitting bright light in a dot shape, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. A player can be made to feel "hah" by a light emitting effect of flashing spot light.

In the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower Second LED 423b of decorative board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decorative board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decorative board 433, LED 455a of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated to light-embellish the entire outer circumference of the door window 101a, or to make the light move along the outer circumference of the door window 101a. can be shown to or played by the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. In FIG. 72, the system of the LEDs connected by the dashed line allows the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to perform planar light emission (surface light emission). can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Therefore, compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated brightly with high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a viewed from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. within the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc in plan view). Since it is provided on a straight line in the vertical direction, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (the side of the door window 101a). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is emitted behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and by emitting spot light with high brightness, other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the door frame 3, the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer circumference of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is positioned outside the player. Thus, when the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are spot-lighted, even other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the high-intensity spot light. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the players can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be used to select the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal power capable of attracting players who are wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422 a, first LED 423 a, first LED 432 a, first LED 433 a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) preferably belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. A performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 is provided. This performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operating section peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 3 are spaced apart on the circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. , and the remaining nine are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322, four are provided on the circumference near the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided midway between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. They are spaced on the circumference, and the remaining six are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference, three by three near the ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. are divided into three sets of one piece each, and three sets of three pieces each of the nine pieces on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine sets. The 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. There are 3 sets of 3 pieces each, and 2 sets of 3 pieces near each end of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference, totaling 7 sets. That is, on the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 groups are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and the LEDs 320a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

According to this effect operation unit peripheral decoration board 320, by appropriately emitting light from the 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, the effect operation unit 301 emits light such that the light rotates, or emits light such that the light concentrates at the center. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 3 extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other in the left-right direction so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other. A door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and door frame left side lower decorations on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind each of 435 A substrate 423, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forward Light guide shaft portion 427a of left side upper light guide member 427, light guide shaft portion 428a of left side middle light guide member 428, light guide shaft portion 429a of left side lower light guide member 429, right side upper light guide member. 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame emit light, thereby the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame. It is possible to make planar light emitting decoration (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward passes through the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. The guides in the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 The portions corresponding to the ends of the optical axis portion 427a, the light guide axis portion 428a, the light guide axis portion 429a, the light guide axis portion 436a, and the light guide axis portion 437a can be decorated with light emission (spot emission) in a dot shape. .

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are The second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting decorated in a plane, or a part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting, or the left side of the door frame may be decorated. The entire side decoration body 426 and the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner and a part thereof can be decorated in a point manner, so that the player can see various lighting effects. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side A plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decoration board 432 and the lower right side decoration board 433 of the door frame are symmetrical to each other. Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems, the left side of the door frame Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. , for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 may be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the left side of the door frame decoration 426 and the door frame Since it is possible to create data with the same flow on the right side decorative body 435 side, the labor involved in creating lighting pattern data can be simplified (with the same creation time ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects with high effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect for the lighting performance of the door frame left side decorations 426 and the door frame right side decorations 435 on both the left and right sides of 101a.

In addition, since the two second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are the same system. , so as to sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, the light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LEDs 423b, 2nd LEDs 432b, and 2nd LEDs 433b provided in the are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b light guide shaft portion 427a and guide shaft portion 427a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the second The first LED 432a and the first LED 433a illuminate and decorate the front ends of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a. As a result, it is possible to show the player a lighting effect that could not be seen in conventional pachinko machines, such as a planar light and a partial light in a dot shape. The player's interest can be strongly attracted by the light emission effect, etc., and the player can be surprised by the light emission effect of spot light emission in the form of dots, which is not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the left side of the door frame upper decorative substrate 422, the lower left side of the door frame decorative substrate 423, the upper right side of the door frame decorative substrate 432, and the right side of the door frame. Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be identified, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid mistaking the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative substrate 273, the plate right decorative substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The upper side decoration board 432, the lower door frame right side decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. I'm trying As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected forward, so that the decorations and the like in the front can be illuminated brighter, and the front (player side) is reflected. This makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decoration boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decoration board so that each decoration board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification portion 7 includes a character identification portion 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numerals, model numbers, etc., and a color identification portion 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74). and have

More specifically, as the character identification part 7a, the character "bottom left" is displayed on the dish left decorative board 273, the character "bottom right" is displayed on the plate right decorative board 278, and the character "upper left" is displayed on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. , the letters "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letters "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letters "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to interfere with the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a seal, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decoration board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example. The decorative substrate may also be provided with identification portions 7 such as the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b.

In the above-described embodiment, the identifying section 7 includes both the character identifying section 7a and the color identifying section 7b. Alternatively, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decoration board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board The light is reflected forward on the front surface of the decoration board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), thereby improving the appearance. can do better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, the desired color can be obtained by just looking at a part of the decoration board. ) can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of kinds of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found. can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color can be used. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the operator can read the characters of the character identification portion 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decoration provided in front of the decoration board is highly transparent. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decoration board. is possible, the decorative body can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance with high performance effect, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to being visible, and improve the appearance of the decoration (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the back surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the labor of coloring the functional parts.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion to detect the player's approach or contact is detected. and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394, and when the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect a change in capacitance, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with a desired part, Control means such as the main control board 1310 , the peripheral control board 1510 , the peripheral control section 1511 , and the effect display control section 1512 can execute predetermined control according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching portion 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other parts is prevented. is cut, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact detection body 393 is Since the switching unit 394 has disconnected the connection, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired portion can be reliably detected. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection.

As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions. It is possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means of (1), the number of channels involved in detection of the player's approach or contact can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for presentation can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, the increase in production means allows the player to enjoy more diverse productions. It is possible to present the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, sufficiently entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Connects to the contact detection sensor main body 392, detects the player's approach or contact with a desired part, and controls the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by the means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for production can be relatively reduced. The number can be increased, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhancing the appeal to the player. can be enhanced.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . can be connected, compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body can be eliminated. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 for switching the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided. are dispersedly arranged, and when a player-participation type performance is executed in which the plurality of dispersedly arranged contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor body 392 is operated by the switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 connected to the , it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal, the player side of which is covered with the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (the effect operation unit 350).

In this way, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation section unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting and lowering are performed. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can be made to function as a contact operation part. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Since various performance operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine having an operation button that can only be operated by pressing, and can be used for other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by being differentiated from other machines.

In addition, according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined effect is output to the player side. Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple steps, the effect corresponding to each step is output. By doing so, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection device having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player enjoy the player-participation type performance, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes, the player can easily touch the button main body 351 through the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state of approach or non-contact, and to avoid erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 . Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the capacitance. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered with the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing in the player participation type performance can be made difficult to miss, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. A light emission effect from the LEDs 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emission effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be pressed is provided with the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352 can reinforce the effect operation unit 350, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) when performing a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the effect operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the effect operation part unit 350 can be operated by pressing the effect operation part unit 350 without worrying about the player. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner compared to the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, the space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily made into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed is covered by the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button main body 351 and avoid the player from feeling uncomfortable when the player touches the contact detection body 352 formed with a plurality of holes. is used as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the performance.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be obtained. The performance output through (via) the operation section unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is provided, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly put together. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being easily provided with a performance operating unit 350 and performance means etc. having such functions and effects at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 and being differentiated from other pachinko machines. can be made easier.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) which is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the player approaches the effect operation unit 350. Or it can detect contact. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it contacts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation section unit 350 protrudes in , it is possible to present the player with an effect using a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by a performance not found in the past pachinko machines, to strongly attract the player's interest to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to reliably make the user notice the projection of the performance operation unit 350. - 特許庁

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction of the upper end of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lifting spring 365 is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end portion side of the lifting spring 365, the compression of the lifting spring 365 is weakened and the biasing force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, it is possible to change the biasing force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 . In this way, since the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded with various projecting forces, it is possible to increase the variation of effect by physical force, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the effect operation can be performed. It is possible to entertain the performance by the protrusion of the part unit 350, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed in accordance with the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit 350 is moved with a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, and the player can strongly feel that something good is happening (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous), and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. It is possible to make the player participate in the player-participation type performance, and to entertain the pressing operation of the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible to operate the effect operation unit 350 at any time. When the player participatory effect in which the effect operation part unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation part unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, so that the player participatory effect is performed by effect images, sounds, etc. Even without guiding the execution start of the performance, the player can be made to quickly recognize the start of execution of the player participation type performance, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the performance operation part unit 350 can be increased to perform the player participation type performance. can entertain you even more.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor. As a result, the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously, and the effects described above can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity differs according to the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a projecting force, it is possible to present a more diverse performance to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by executing the player participation type effect, so that the player can enter the effect operation unit 350 which is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. approaches or touches, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player of the effect operation unit 350 touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player is detected. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, by detecting the contact detection sensor main body 358 or moving forward or backward (pressing) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the production operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inside button decoration board 364, the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 and other effect means execute a predetermined effect. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the effect operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. can function as On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, since it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, the player can enjoy various performance operations by executing a player participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (under the upper surface portion 351a). , the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player. It is possible to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present more diverse performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation (non-contact operation, A sense of operation can be given to the contact operation), and the player can enjoy the performance operation more.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player-participation type production, the player has an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350, an operation to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type performance and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type performance. can be done. When the player participates in the player-participation type production, various operations using the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operating unit 350 to the locking part 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operating unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevation cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swinging of the performance operating unit 350, thereby making the performance by the performance operating unit 350 more enjoyable. can be made available.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is hard to be seen by a player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, etc. are separated, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be matched with the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. , and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the decoration 398. When a finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is emitted to the player side by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. Therefore, the player side The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light emitted to the button, and the executed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is detected by the button body 351 or the contact detection body 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is a part of the decoration portion. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be compared with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be bothered by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in a good state, so that the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button outside covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decorative body 398 is designed to irradiate the player with light, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 can be attached to the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and the player can be provided with a feeling of light operation. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 approaches or contacts the finger or the like. Upon detection of contact, an effect is executed by the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398, thereby allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect, and allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like are detected. Since it is possible to change the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration 398 according to the distance from the button outer decoration board 355, the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the performance by the decorative board 364 inside the button or the decorative body 398, so that the player can see a more colorful performance, and the colorful performance makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In addition, it is designed to detect a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the external decoration board 355, the button interior decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is not affected by the game. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be thickened to have a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of the decoration. can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 look like a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detectors 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacity is increased by the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (surface side). Depending on the change, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect presentation means such as the effect display device 1600 produce a predetermined effect. Contact detection body 395 etc. (including contact detection body 352, left contact detection body 390L, right contact detection body 390R, contact detection body 393, and contact detection body 397, etc.) for presenting the , the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. As a result, the button main body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation section 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like it has a design property, and a performance not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 having the operation part 301 can give a strong impact to a player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button main body 351) can strongly arouse interest in the player. It is possible to heighten expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participatory performance for operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, the effect presentation It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (the button main body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player-participation-type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is activated by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detection body 395 or the like is stopped. Since the performance is presented by the performance presenting means by changing the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can amuse the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is presented. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since an effect is presented in accordance with a change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like approaches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like and touches the button body 351 . Since it is possible to detect the interval (distance) by dividing it into multiple stages, by presenting an effect according to each stage, it is possible to present a more colorful effect to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detection body 395 or the like, Designability can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 and the like, deterioration in appearance due to the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a device having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing cost of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust, food and drink, etc., and cleaning is easy. can be More specifically, since the contact detection member 395 or the like is made of a material having unevenness such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a punching metal having unevenness, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering, and to reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as it is easy to clean.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351 so that the player does not touch the contact detection bodies 395 and the like, the contact detection bodies 395 and the like are made of a metal vapor deposition film or the like. When a material such as foil stamping that enhances the design is used, it is possible to prevent early wear due to touch by the player, and to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection body 395 and the like. Since it is possible to use an object that does not feel good to the touch or an object that gives discomfort to the player as the sensing element 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the material used for the contact sensing element 395 or the like, and to meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from suitable materials.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the player brings his/her finger or the like closer to or touches the button body 351. can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the actions of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player through the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. , the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like are executed, the effect presented to the player is executed. can be provided, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like, and touches the contact detection body 352. When the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area is detected by (contact detection sensor main body 358), a plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and a plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 emit light to play through the button main body 351. A light emission effect in which light is emitted to the player, a effect in which the player's finger or the like that is in contact with the button body 351 is vibrated by the vibration motor 356, and a projection upward of the button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. , the button body 351 can be made to function as the contact operation unit 302, and the player can enjoy the game. can let Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised and amused by the effects. , and the willingness to operate the button body 351 can be enhanced. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and moves the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation portion 303, so that the contact detection body The player can be entertained with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, and the player is less likely to get bored and is interesting. can be suppressed.

Also, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 351. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, and the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 are provided, so that the player can receive light and light through the button body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. can be easily imparted, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. there is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at the end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a back perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 195 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. A ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of is provided (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 89).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down faster.

In this way, in a state in which the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, ``Please remove the ball! stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 96) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the horizontal direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is overflowed. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is a flat plate extending backward from a low position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It extends in a shape. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the tank rails and the like of the second embodiment, viewed from behind and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rails. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 107 as seen from the front, and (c). 2 is a rear perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a). FIG. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the front, and Fig. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. The tank rail 553A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above, has a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A in addition to the tank rail 553A. , the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward. The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A in front view, and a A ball straightening member 556A provided is attached, and a ball stop member 557 capable of blocking the circulation of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A; and an opening 555c penetrating through the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A at the portion where the meandering portion 553c is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A extends back and forth at its upstream end side and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has flat plate-like rectifying pieces 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking down the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a row. The game ball B is restrained from moving rapidly to the downstream side, thereby preventing the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is positioned below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached is It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the wire causes the game ball B to contact the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A may not be sufficiently exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to prevent ball biting and ball bite in the tank rail 553A. The occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves first to the downstream side, ball jamming is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, thereby preventing the upper game ball B from moving downstream first. can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball jamming can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Arranging the terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected or near the control board, or arranging the terminal board or the control board to which many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). Fig. 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of (a) from the lower right back. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail and the like of the third embodiment are similar to the tank rail and the like of the first embodiment (the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stop member 557), a protective cover 559 for covering the ball rectifying member 556 from above is added, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same structures as those described above.

The tank rails and the like of this embodiment are attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extend left and right in a box-shaped tank 552 that is open upward. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 above the portion where it is located, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 has an opening on the bottom surface of a portion that extends straight to the left (a portion that decreases in height toward the downstream side) so that dirt and dust in the tank rail 553 can drop. A plurality of portions 553d are formed. These openings 553d are provided at portions below a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Also, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, ball clogging occurring at that portion can be eliminated through the opening 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be confirmed.

Further, the tank rail or the like is located to the left of the ball tank 552 and closes a predetermined range above the right end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends leftward with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction. A second rail cover 555 that closes the upper part from the part spaced between the first rail cover 554 and the first rail cover 554 of the tank rail 553 to the left end, and the first rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 A ball straightening member 556 provided between the rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. and a protective cover 559 covering the second rail cover 555 from the middle in the left-right direction to the middle in the left-right direction across the ball rectifying member 556 .

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. .

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B stacked up and down are arranged in one row. When trying to overtake the game balls B in the lower stage, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is circulated in the tank rail 553 in two stages, the game ball B on the upper stage comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a, By slowing down the flow of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the player from overtaking the game ball B on the lower side. As a result, the game balls B on the lower side first move to the downstream side, and the game balls B on the upper side move after that, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper side presses the straightening piece 556a from below, the ball straightening member 556 moves so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and the game ball on the upper side due to its own weight The ball B can be pushed downward, and the vertical swing of the ball straightening member 556 (straightening piece 556a) can promote the movement of the game ball B on the upper side to the lower side, as well as the tank rail. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the relevant portion of 553 (the portion whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

The protective cover 559 includes a strip-like top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat plate-like rear plate portion 559b extending downward from a part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, and a top plate portion 559a. It has a flat plate-like front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front side and the left side thereof, and a flat plate-like guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper portion from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction when assembled to the main body frame 4. A space is formed between the spherical straightening member 556 and the spherical straightening member 556 so that the spherical straightening member 556 can swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG.

The front plate portion 559 c extends rightward from the top plate portion 559 a at its right end, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553 . The guiding plate portion 559d projects forward from the front plate portion 559c at a portion on the front side of the top plate portion 559a with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to be able to guide the game ball B leftward. It is The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553 is inclined. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B, which cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be checked by inserting a thin stick into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by inserting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 through the opening 553d. It can be confirmed by pushing it upward by lifting the game ball B, for example.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left by the guide plate portion 559 d so that it can be discharged to the outside from the left side surface of the body frame 4 . .

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are made of a transparent material. The game ball B can be visually recognized from the outside.

In addition, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above. be able to.

In addition, since the top of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball straightening member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, when dirt or dust adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, etc., but in this embodiment, the tank rail 553 It is significant that a plurality of openings 553d are provided at the bottom of the . More specifically, when the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553 is covered with dirt, dust, etc., the game ball B inside is touched through the opening 553d, and the game ball B or the game ball B is touched through the opening 553d. Since the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken by pressing, the dirt, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B or the like can be dropped. Garbage, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the body frame 4 , the portion where the tank rail 553 extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided behind the external terminal plate 558 , so that the wire connection terminal 558 a of the external terminal plate 558 is provided. When the electric wire connected to the ball contacts the ball straightening member 556 from above, the ball straightening member 556 rotates upward due to the weight of the wire even if the game ball B contacts the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the sphere rectifying member 556 cannot be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to a wire whose tip is stripped of the coating, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the wire connection terminal If the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to 558a is insufficient, there is a possibility that the remaining game ball B may cause a short circuit.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559 prevents the electric wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball straightening member 556. can do. As a result, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to allow the ball to move within the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

By the way, if for some reason an electric wire is pulled out of the external terminal plate 558 and the tip of the wire comes into contact with the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, a short circuit will occur and necessary information will be sent to the game hall computer. It becomes impossible to receive it, and an error occurs in the counting at the game hall. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason is guided to the left and It can be discharged outside from the left side of the frame 4 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, thereby preventing the occurrence of a short due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, by avoiding short-circuiting of electric wires, it is possible to ensure that the computer (hall computer) in the game hall receives the necessary information, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the game ball B is discharged to the left side of the body frame 4 by the guide plate portion 559 d of the protective cover 559 , the game ball B can be discharged behind the body frame 4 . It is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles such as disconnection or short-circuit due to contact with various electric wires and wiring provided on the side.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the rear. FIG. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squiggly line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661 attached to the rear side. A rear base 662, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game through which the out ball passage 663 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide part 627 that receives and guides the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the right in front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 is circulated, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665 are closed. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 as shown.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right direction. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. A ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like. there is

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open to the front. The front end is closed by front base 661 .

The out-ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a extending left and right, and a game ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. Out-ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while making it meander in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides downward the game balls B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. - 特許庁An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a so that the left end side is lower. In addition, the out-ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. It has depth. In addition, the portion of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball straightening portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall and the rear wall (partition wall portion) are on the same plane in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backward in a small crank shape so that it becomes like this. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guide portion 663c is bent in a crank shape and is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, it passes through the out sensor 664 and bends in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and the out sensor 664 can prevent one game ball B from being detected twice.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap corresponding to one game ball B or more is formed.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is inclined more than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) has a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

The ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665d alternately protruding inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, a game ball B flowing through a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts with a plurality of projections 665d alternately, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner and flow. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B ejected downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

Since this ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b, when the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is discharged by operating the ball removing lever 593, , a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that has been struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharge lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide part 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. can be counted. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, the number of game balls B can be accurately counted. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B counted by the out-sensor 664 (the number of out-balls) is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first The number of game balls B accepted by the winning openings such as the big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007 and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of the winning openings after being hit into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been accepted by the out port 1008 without being discharged and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). It's about.

In addition, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is defined as "payout within a predetermined period. number/number of out-balls in a predetermined period=payout rate in a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, so the "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit, the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, between the rear end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided. , the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are used by many game balls B The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the static electricity, the induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game balls B, and the malfunction caused by the circulation of the game balls B is reduced. can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, Since the impact applied to the out-sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out-sensor 664 is quickly worn out and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different than the normal value, it is possible to change the displayed payout rate inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Boards, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so it is possible to deal with problems early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, To reduce the cost of a game board 5 without providing an out-ball detection unit, and to secure a space in the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the discharged game balls B.例文帳に追加By installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guiding portion 665b having a plurality of projecting projections 665d. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B that circulates in the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine, walls, etc. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side Collection of discharged game balls B can be facilitated.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be Only by discharging the game ball B hit into the area 5a downward, it becomes possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, so the configuration for discharging the game ball B on the game board 5 is , the configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the part for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side ( An out receiving part, a bucket, etc.) need not be advanced to a position superimposed on the outer frame 2, and labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 . More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that joins the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The confluence portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (a ball discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, by moving the out-ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., a large number of game balls B circulate through the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out-ball sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d in the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opens downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664 .

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 has a body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at the base end side, and detects the out sensor 664 that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body portion 668a. have.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating the locking claw portion 668c to lock and close the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a contacts the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out-sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-sensor 664, the through-hole 668b is detected. discharged downwards. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated around the base end side of the main body 668a to open so that the locking claw 668c moves downward. , and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-hazardous object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) , the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B circulate. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that pose a risk of contact. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below. There is a possibility that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668 may open. When the sensor cover 668 opens and the out-sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the out-sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in order for the staff of the game hall to confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the contact risky substance, the body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risky substance, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside portion opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor attachment recess 663f. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 . Therefore, when the game balls B are jammed in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are jammed can be specified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned over to stand upright in an upside-down state, and the out-sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out-ball passage 663 can be accessed from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform the confirmation work of the inside and the inside of the ball removal discharge passage 665, and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Thus, it is possible to alleviate the player's frustration due to the interruption of the game, suppress the decline in interest, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out-sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 will not be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, loss of the sensor cover 668 can be avoided.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 circulate, around the longitudinal (horizontal) axis Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). ), and relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 by many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, it is Since the sensor cover 668 is opened and the sensor cover 668 is opened, the out sensor 664 can be prevented from falling off. .

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a board unit 700 of a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is the board unit of (a) 1 is a perspective view seen from . 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is cut along the Sacer line in (a). FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 and viewed from the rear. 133(a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 133(b) is a back perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing elimination of clogged balls in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the board unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Components similar to those of the board unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The substrate unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

This board unit 700 includes a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, and a first ball path 701 provided behind the first ball path 701 and released downward from the game board 5. A second ball path 702 through which the game ball B can circulate, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting the game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701, and a game ball circulating in the second ball path 702. A second ball sensor 704 for detecting B and a ball extraction passage 705 through which the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 flows. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, respectively. Eject downwards.

In this embodiment, on the game board 5, the game ball B received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 circulates through the first ball path 701, and on the game board 5, the general winning The game ball B received in the opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 is configured to flow through the second ball path 702. ing. In other words, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703. At the same time, the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704 . As a result, for the winning openings (winning opening sensor) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 of the game board 5 When a fraudulent act is committed, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and thus fraudulent action with respect to the winning opening can be detected. .

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the front base 711. A rear base 712 having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and having a ball extraction passage 705, and a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712. and a front base 711 and a rear base 712 to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and prevent unauthorized tools from entering. a crime prevention cover 714 provided openable and closable on the rear base 712; and a frame relay board 716 . In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is elongated in the left and right direction and is open rearwardly and upwardly. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from behind. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that is open in the lower peripheral wall at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. ing. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the crime prevention cover 714 rotatably about an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination opening 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and then guides it downward to discharge the ball extraction passage 705. have. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open rearward. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715 . A portion of the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711. , the rear side of which is closed by a passage wall member 715 .

In addition, the rear base 712 receives the game ball B that has passed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. It has a second discharge guiding part 712b that receives the game ball B that has circulated through the ball path 702, guides it backward, and then discharges it downward. The entrance sides of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, and the entrance of the first ejection guide portion 712a opens forward. , the inlet of the second discharge guide portion 712b is open upward. The outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are open rearward from the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715. As shown in FIG.

In the rear base 712, the exits of the ball extraction passage 705, the first ejection guide portion 712a, and the second ejection guide portion 712b are located to the left of the dissolving port 711b of the front base 711 in front view. are arranged in order from the right to the left. The exit of the ball removal passage 705 widens greatly forward at the front end and slightly widens rearward at the rear end with respect to the exits of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b (Fig. 128(b) )). That is, the exit of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (broader) in the front-rear direction than the exits of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from behind and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 . The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, and an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right. , a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d inclined downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, The straightening wall portion 713e extends obliquely downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the upper right shelf portion rises rightward from a position separated rightward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. A lower shelf portion 713f that extends to the right from the portion 713d, a right wall portion 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a, and a right wall portion 713g. An upper wall portion 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a U-shaped opening that is connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and opens upward. and a groove wall portion 713i. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is positioned on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 includes a lower wall portion upper portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, and an upper portion extending vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion upper portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b. The protruding middle wall portion 713k, the eaves portion 713l extending downward from the middle of the left side surface of the middle wall portion 713k, and the lower shelf portion 713f near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f extend vertically and vertically. It has an extending hanging wall portion 713m and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the lower wall portion upper portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion lower 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically to a size through which the game ball B can pass.

Further, the ball path member 713 extends downward from the lower surface of each of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, and has a plurality of obstacles spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a rib 713o. The ball path member 713 includes a left wall portion 713a, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a step wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a rectifying wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, It has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space surrounded by the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n into front and rear.

In addition, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of cutouts that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f toward the partition wall portion 713p. has a notch 713q. Each of the cutouts 713q is provided so that a gap smaller in the front-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled on the board unit 700. Dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of laterally extending guide ribs 713r. ing.

Further, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p. It is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the rear side of the front portion 713s and the partition wall portion 713p. 713t and.

In the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion, the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are positioned below the portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. In other words, the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 are accommodated with the detection hole on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. .

Further, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion forward of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n. have. When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half is the entrance side of the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. is coming. In front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guiding portion 713u guides the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear, It can be delivered to the first ejection guiding portion 712 a of the rear base 712 .

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, a portion that is open downward from the bottom wall portion 713n (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 that is housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t) ) is located below the second discharge guide portion 712 b of the rear base 712 . As a result, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be transferred to the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713 d is positioned to the right of the right end of the dissolution opening 711 b of the front base 711 . The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is positioned to the left of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the portion of the front base 711 immediately above the clearance opening 711b is covered with the straightening wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and the left end side is curved downward vertically. The distance (height) between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is slanted so as to become narrower toward the left so that the left end side has a height through which one game ball B can pass. . The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f rectify a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

Between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, as described above, the vertical dimension is formed to narrow toward the left (downstream direction in which the game ball B circulates). Depending on the amount of balls B distributed, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, when ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to clear the clearing port 711b. In the open state, a bar-shaped tool is inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the dissolution port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f, and the game ball B is bitten by the tool. You can clear the clogged ball by hitting the .

By the way, since the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for eliminating ball clogging and for dropping dirt and dust downward, a wire-shaped unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter may be used. from below through the notch 713q and into the upper part of the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). There is a risk of cheating on the game board 5 provided above by extending upward from the ball path 702). Insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o extending downward and separated in the left-right direction are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h. is provided, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the hindrance rib 713o and the tip ends. Movement can be blocked and further unauthorized tool insertion can be blocked (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

In addition, in the portion of the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b on the right side of the middle wall portion 713k, the lower part and the left and right sides thereof are the rectifying wall portion 713e in which the notch portion 713q is not provided, and the lower wall. Since it is closed by the upper part 713j and the middle wall part 713k, an unauthorized tool cannot be inserted from below through the corresponding cutout part 713q of the upper right shelf part 713d and the upper left shelf part 713b. No fraudulent act is performed through the notch 713q.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of notches 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f. (see Figure 136). Dust discharged downward through the notch 713q located above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is discharged through the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall upper 713j, and the middle wall 713j. It is housed in the space surrounded by the wall portion 713k. As a result, dust or the like does not adhere to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, wiring cables are connected by connectors to the left end sides of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. It protrudes leftward from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from the left side above the sensor housing portion front 713s and the sensor housing portion rear 713t, it is formed on the upper left shelf portion 713b. Dirt and dust that have fallen downward through the cutout portion 713q are guided leftward by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l. It is possible to prevent the product from falling on the wiring cable and the connector, thereby avoiding the occurrence of problems caused by dust or the like.

The base unit 710 includes a left wall portion 713a on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, The right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712 form the first ball path 701, and the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 rear left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, and rear base 712 A second ball path 702 is formed by the second discharge guide portion 712b.

The crime prevention cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the crime prevention cover 714 closes the release port 711b when the elastic locking portion 714a is locked to the rear base 712 and placed horizontally. is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward to be vertical, the disengagement port 711b is open. That is, the security cover 714 can open and close the dissolution opening 711b.

By closing the crime prevention cover 714, the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be closed. It can be prevented from being inserted into the two ball path 702). In addition, the security cover 714 opens the clearing port 711b of the front base 711 by opening the clogged ball between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713. Therefore, a bar-shaped tool can be inserted between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f from below to clear the clogging of the game balls B. can be done. This ball clogging elimination work is carried out in a state where the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The security cover 714 has a lower end (an end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) in a state in which the release port 711b is opened (in a vertical state). It is positioned below the height of the connection tube portion 43a) of the member 43 (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130). Therefore, in order to eliminate the clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713, after opening the body frame 4 forward with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 is opened with the security cover 714 open. is to be closed against the outer frame 2, the open security cover 714 abuts on the contact-threatening object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), and the body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and to securely close the security cover 714 so that the security cover 714 exhibits its crime prevention function.

Further, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason while the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as it is. , the open crime prevention cover 714 comes into contact with the object that may come into contact with from the front. Since the crime prevention cover 714 rotates in the direction to close when it contacts, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the crime prevention cover 714 being caught by the contact-threatening object, and damage to the crime-prevention cover 714 and the contact-threatening object can be avoided. .

It should be noted that the security cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game balls B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically kept closed. The locking by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be hard so as to make it difficult.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705 that is open rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the outlet side of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b, and closes the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b. The game ball B that has flowed through the secondary ejection guide portion 712b can be ejected downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716 .

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715 . The frame relay board 716 is for relaying the connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3, the single button operation sensor 194, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704 and the main control board 1310. .

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has an upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of an upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 extending from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711. It faces upward and can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5.例文帳に追加The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls leftward on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are piled up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are collapsed by the upper rectifying wall 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B rolling to the left on the lower shelf portion 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and if it is in front of the partition wall portion 713p, it is stored in the sensor housing portion front 713s. After being detected by the first ball sensor 703 and passing through the first ball guiding portion 713u, the ball passes through the first discharge guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward. On the other hand, in the case behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, the ball is discharged downward through the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. be done.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. A first spherical path 701 is located on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a second spherical path 702 is located on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p. Therefore, the game ball B dropped forward from the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 from the game board 5 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and is discharged downward. be able to. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and is discharged downward. be able to.

In addition, the base unit 710 moves the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to extract the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like into the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712. can be discharged downward through the The game ball B ejected downward from the first ejection guide portion 712a (first ball path 701), the second ejection guide portion 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 is It is delivered to the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the side.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q, dust can be collected through the cutouts 713q. Since dust can be dropped and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to avoid obstruction of the circulation of the game balls B by dust etc., and suppress the occurrence of clogging etc. can be made

In addition, since the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are formed transparently, the door frame 3 can be opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board can be opened from the main body frame 4. 5 is removed, from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700), presence or absence of clogging of game balls B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). can be easily verified. In addition, since the notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f at the portion where the game balls B are aligned in a line by the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713, the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the crime prevention cover 714 is opened to remove a bar-shaped tool from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch 713q. It can be inserted between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Further, a dissolution opening 711b opened downward is provided at a portion below the rectifying wall portion 713e in the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the dissolution opening 711b. In addition to being able to eliminate ball clogging as described above, in a normal state, by closing the elimination opening 711b with the crime prevention cover 714, a linear illegal tool can pass through the elimination opening 711b to the first ball path 701 or the like. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and has a high deterrent effect against fraud.

In addition, since the security cover 714 for opening and closing the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating it about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, the body frame 4 can be opened in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed. If you try to close the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the potentially dangerous object (connection tube 43a of the rear panel member 43) and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed. The security cover 714 can be made to notice that it has been forgotten to be closed, and the security cover 714 can be reliably closed to exhibit the security function of the security cover 714.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, since a plurality of flat plate-like obstruction ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, linear Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the inhibition rib 713o to prevent the tip from moving. Further insertion of unauthorized tools can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Further, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 meander or crank due to the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713 as described above. Therefore, even if an illegal linear tool is inserted from the exit side of the first ejection guide part 712a or the second ejection guide part 712b, the entry can be prevented by the complicated path. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 .

Further, since all the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 can be detected (counted). There is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game ball B, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. A space corresponding to the structure can be secured, and by installing a performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, respectively. By comparing with the count number of , it is possible to determine whether or not cheating is being performed on the game board 5, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position that is invisible to the player, the staff at the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is possible to change the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to deal with the problem early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball extraction path 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 The game ball B without a ball is not counted. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 .

In the above embodiment, the first ball path 701 is the out ball, and the second ball path 702 is the safe ball. Alternatively, the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may pass through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 701 regardless of the safe ball or the out ball. Any one of the sphere paths 702 may be flowed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the dissolution opening 711b, but it is not limited to this, and the dissolution opening 711b is opened and closed by sliding back and forth or left and right. It is good as a thing.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by partitioning with one partition wall portion 713p, the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 is divided into the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 before and after the two paths. Although it is shown that the ball is discharged through one of the three ball paths, it is not limited to this. The game ball B released from the game board 5 passing through may be ejected downward.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the center accessories and the like are made opaque. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. . FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent. Fig. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are struck by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As shown in FIG. In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a gate 2002, a variable prize winning port 2003, a gate 2002, a variable prize winning port 2003, a gate 2002, a variable prize winning port 2003, A first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a second big winning opening 2007 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, a first big winning opening 2006, and a third opening. It is for performing a game that entertains the driving operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed through the second prize winning opening 2007 or the like.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. It has a plate-like game panel 1100 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and are always open. A gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and a variable prize winning opening 2003 for accepting the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. And, the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 A first big prize winning port 2006 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first big prize. Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the opening 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 2007, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 167) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 further comprises a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022 which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and which are always open to receive the game ball B. .

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2004 and a front opening of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has four general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and a lower right unit 2400 having a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022, which is provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in the front view and is located in the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view. It is provided above the starter unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center role 2500 having a big winning slot 2007 and a first sub-out slot 2021, and a gate 2002 provided to the left of the center role 2500 and near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. and a gate member 2600 having a .

The front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, and has a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N. As shown in FIG.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. A back box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the back box unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. there is

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the front end in the back box 3010 a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, a back front front effect unit 3300 provided at an upper part in the back box 3010 at a position substantially the same as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction, and the inside of the back box 3010 A back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided at the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010 and a back top back effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 162 etc.), and a back bottom post effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010 .

[5-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1010 is aligned with the notch portion 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated and the lower full ball path unit 610 is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 145, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction to form a thin plate. and a plurality of engagement shoulders 1114 (see FIG. 152). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion and penetrates the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins projecting forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins extending outward from the holding stepped portion. Three engaging claws elastically engaged with the engaging stepped portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110 and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion, the panel A pair of engaging pieces that engage with the two engaging stepped portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from the front obliquely upward, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward, so that the upper and lower left slopes are inclined. By elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion 1114 of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharged ball receiving part 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 167) for controlling game content and the payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2601, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a first big winning opening sensor 2525, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch and confirm setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b that can select and switch setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted is provided. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). ). This connector connection (connection between boards) electrically connects the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b to the main control board 1310. FIG. The right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have substantially the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. match.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is on the center line. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a pressing operation part is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A switching button 1311b is arranged, and a setting change permission lamp that can emit a single color (for example, red) is located on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED indicators with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a depressing operation part is arranged in the .

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion opening and can be pulled out from the insertion opening. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, other players arranged in a line opposite the island facilities of the game hall can be used. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and turned on for the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON for the decision key. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (ie, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the original position. (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 1311a. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. An operation for turning on the setting key and an operation for turning on the determination key can be collectively performed only by the single setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, the "gap" formed between the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering and altering the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for these openings. . The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. , the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern to which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are routed so that they do not come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (apart from each other). At the same time, connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. is transmitted (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a. ) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns to which the signals from are transmitted are also formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the settings of the set values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current set values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined setting value change permitting condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on must be established. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the key switch 1311a. As the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it is also possible to set a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is activated. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a on. The setting value may be changed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting values must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7). As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). (set value) is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Every time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the initial set value of 1, increases again by 1, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When the setting value is to be determined, the person who changes the setting value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, turns the setting key switch 1311a ON. The cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. A second ON operation is performed by rotating the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a to ON. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the original position, that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to turn it off, a decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. and workability is improved.

A person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting values to not displaying them, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. to complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the set values that are currently set must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that the power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to open the first key. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure), and then confirm that the power is restored. Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). of which, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1311c is extinguished is maintained. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set set values completes the confirmation of the currently set set values, the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set value currently set pulls out the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and displays the current setting. Complete the task of confirming the setting value displayed.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power supply when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When power is restored during recovery, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key must be turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. , the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability of lottery determination when transitioning to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of transition determination from probability variation to normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with set values Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls B shot into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B that have been played is displayed. Out of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 167, etc.), and this detection signal is sent to the main unit via the panel relay board. It is input to the control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be rotatable only within a range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose key is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' is turned counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on. (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. A wire penetration prevention part is attached to the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, there are stickers printed with the names of each button at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b so as not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b. is affixed (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should not be brought close to each other ( spaced apart from each other). Further, when the setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The form of the Enter key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification (2) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and a detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. good.) may be described as "determination key modification (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these firing reference pulses, the determination key is selected. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, while determining that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The form of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player sitting opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. When a distance measuring sensor that can be used is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. The light emitted by the light emitting part of the distance measuring sensor passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light-receiving section, thereby detecting the action of the player. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor through the relay board, and determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no movement, it is possible to determine that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "determination key modification (5)"). .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is transmitted to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the enter key ON, and the It is possible to determine which of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to have a pulse width of 1 ms in the case of information indicating that the setting key is ON, and set to a pulse width of 3 ms in the case of information indicating that the enter key is ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the set key, the decision key, and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "determination key modification (7)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The voltage level of the signal is changed between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V in the range of 0V to 5V), By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. ON/OFF may be determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential is sometimes described as "determination key modification (8)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

It should be noted that the position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation section which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so as not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for depressing the depressing operation part) ) may be adopted, the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error canceling switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part A different type of switch may be employed, or another type of switch that does not have a depressing operation section may be employed as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error cancellation switch, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. In the control board 633, they are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance, Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch should not come close to each other (separately from each other). ) is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The form of the enter key button (which may include the form of the set key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variation (9) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part A signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON. good too. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error canceling switch is operated based on the signal from the error canceling switch, while the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON based on the signal from the error canceling switch. Therefore, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON when the depression operation portion of the error canceling switch is not operated. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the decision key is ON (the mode of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "the modification (10) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error cancellation switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command, and the payout control unit power-on processing described later. A command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch, and notifies that effect. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives the command to notify that effect. When the button is pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (mode 2 of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "variation (11) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to pay out. Input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and determination may be made based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as to whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the determination key ON On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be pressed. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the payout control board 633, the wire penetration prevention portion is provided with the cover body for the opening. It becomes a structure that is molded into

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover.). Also, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error cancel switch (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the external shape or pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be employed, and a switch of a different type that does not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Various switches can be mentioned. Also, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error canceling switch is transmitted should not be drawn close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only within the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring in the process, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the decision key is ON. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of , and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thus, it is possible to improve the security against whether or not the Enter key is ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included). ”).

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 574 or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and a command is created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the payout unit). The aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. is maintained, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again by pressing the button, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the body frame 4. is maintained, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (door frame opening). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. Then, it is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotating the key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees to return it to the rotational position ) to turn it OFF, and rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turning it on again (turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise). can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "determination key modification (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of ) to turn it OFF, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it ON. can be set to turn ON the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the initial position and turning off the setting key switch 1311a. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (19)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the main control board 1310. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so as not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f. is affixed (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover must be opened when the cover is open.), the color of the press operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the press operation A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the main control board 1310 (separated from each other). Further, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A setting key switch 1311a' can be used (the mode 2 of the Enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "Modified example (20) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input is provided. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (RAM clear switch). mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is applied to the payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, the payout control board 633 does not need an error canceling switch when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error canceling switch, which will be described later.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Gate sensor 2601, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002, second starting opening sensor 2401, variable winning opening sensor 2526, first large winning opening sensor 2525, second large The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are inputted may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (various sensors, etc.). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to turn the decision key ON, sends the game ball B into the gate 2002, or opens various winning ports. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 or send the game ball B to the out port 1008 .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It controls the operation of the movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of the electrical drive source such as the solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.) When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (optical function). The aspect of the object sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the optical sensor detects the original position of the movable body (accessory) in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position, etc.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is inputted may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. FIG. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the magnetic sensor's The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, thereby causing various winning openings and gates (gates 2002) provided on the game board 5 to move. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor that detects a fraudulent act of entering a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. It is also possible to determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the vibration sensor may The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, radio waves are emitted to the pachinko machine 1 to play A game board 5 and a payout device 580 are provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a game ball B by causing malfunction of various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580.例文帳に追加In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the enter key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. It may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (effect operation button The form of the unit (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320 . In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding opening. In order to prevent this, a structure is adopted in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. It should be noted that unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body open/close switch, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions (setting change board box is sometimes referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting switching button 1311b. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control The connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the substrate 1310 is also formed at a distance. , a wiring pattern to which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern to which a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b. was formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). 1311a through which the decision key ON signal is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is connected via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected (inter-board connection) to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the substrate 1310 via a harness (the manner of routing the wiring pattern may be referred to as “determination key modification (29)”).

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the selected combination mode of the modification example is referred to as "the modification example (30) of the decision key"). ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the operation of confirming the real machine after clearing the RAM and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the movable object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 with the content (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. It is possible to perform the operation of (accessory) and lighting of the light emitter. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "", a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the change setting mode of the time from the end of the pattern variation to the player waiting state is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the demonstration can be varied.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) to be performed after the completion of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, action effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern specifying "serial effect, action effect of movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting that specifies "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the details of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the details of the demonstration effect performed after the pattern variation is completed.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that designates ", a volume setting pattern 4 that designates "volume 4" as a setting value 4 is allocated, a volume setting pattern 5 that designates "volume 5" is allocated as a setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction of decreasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by maximizing the volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice it, it may be offensive to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes described as "modification (5) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitters by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default luminance, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, so that an error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and adjust the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, the light emitters can be turned on, blinked, gradation points, and the like. By changing and setting the brightness of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the brightness of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Also, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the above-described common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification (30) of the enter key.

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area out of all the areas of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. is cleared except for , and then the game proceeds by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. Further, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing to be described later, and stores the main control built-in RAM. The game proceeds by clearing the entire area except for the specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. It will happen. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (this may be described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition"). be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in the setting value confirmation display processing which is performed as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later. displayed on vessel 1310g. Moreover, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (in the case described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). there is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display processing as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing described later when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is satisfied, and In the processing at the time of entry, the game proceeds by performing the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. A detection signal from the body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning clockwise 60 degrees from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a controls the main body frame opening for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the modification of the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs) When the power is restored after the momentary power failure that occurs), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs interrupt permission setting etc. While the game is progressing, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then, The game progresses by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a recovers by the out-ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main-control-side power-on processing to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 is counted on the base monitor 1310h. to display. Therefore, the current set values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above (sometimes referred to as a "modification of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set values that have been set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which contributes to cost reduction.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor is selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in the modified example (30) of the enter key described above.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor is selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of game balls B to the gate 2002 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the port 2004, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying (number of rounds) is provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 167).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 that attaches the performance display device 1600 to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650 . The effect display device 1600, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front surface of a set plate 1650 detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 (see FIGS. 157 to 159). ). The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted vertically. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, with a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and are always open. A gate 2002 for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and a variable prize winning opening 2003 for accepting the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. And, the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005, which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to receive the game ball B, and the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 A first big prize winning port 2006 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first big prize Depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, which is provided at a position different from the opening 2006 and is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 and a second big prize winning port 2007 that allows the reception of game balls B.

The front unit 2000 further comprises a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022 which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and which are always open to receive the game ball B. .

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged near the left end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. The variable prize winning opening 2003 is arranged on the upper right side of the gate 2002 . The first starting port 2004 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged above the first starting port 2004 on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a. The second big prize winning opening 2007 is arranged close to the right end of the game area 5a slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a.

The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged between the second big winning port 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged to the right of the second starting port 2005 .

The front unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2004, and the front view left of the start opening unit 2100 On the other hand, a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has four general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , a lower right unit 2400 provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and having a second start port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022. ing.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center role 2500 having a big prize winning port 2006, a second big prize winning port 2007, and a first sub-out port 2021, and to the left of the center role 2500 and near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. A gate member 2600 having a gate 2002 is provided, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided in the right part of the game area 5a and is composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

Although details will be described later, the lower right unit 2400 can accept the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007, and has a pseudo large winning opening 2402 having a larger opening than the second large winning opening 2007, and a pseudo A pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B not received in the big winning port 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100 is provided.

[5-8a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 148 and the like. FIG. 148(a) is a front perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit, and FIG. 148(b) is a rear perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 2101, a gutter portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front plate portion 2101 except for the upper side, and the front plate portion 2101 extending from the middle of the gutter portion 2102 in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). and a guide piece portion 2104 . The starting port unit 2100 is formed of a transparent member except for the decorative seal 2110. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the starting port unit 2100 includes a peeling hole 2105 penetrating the front plate portion 2101, mounting holes 2106 penetrating back and forth in each of the left and right flange portions 2103, and rear surfaces of the left and right flange portions 2103. and a positioning pin 2107 projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape. Furthermore, the starting port unit 2100 has a decorative sticker 2110 attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101 .

A front plate portion 2101 of the starting port unit 2100 is formed in a U shape having a rectangular outer shape in front view with a semicircular lower side. The front plate portion 2101 is recessed rearward on the inner side leaving a substantially constant width from the outer peripheral edge, and a decorative seal 2110 is attached to the recessed portion. A peeling hole 2105 is provided in a recessed portion of the front plate portion 2101 , and the peeling hole 2105 is closed from the front by a decorative seal 2110 .

The gutter portion 2102 extends rearward from the front plate portion 2101 and has an upper end opened upward and a rear end opened rearward. A portion of the gutter portion 2102 on the front side of the flange portion 2103 and the front plate portion 2101 constitute a first starting port 2004 that opens upward. Therefore, the entrance direction of the first starting port 2004 is vertically downward. The pair of flange portions 2103 are formed symmetrically with each other, and the width in the vertical direction becomes narrower toward the outer side in the left-right direction.

The guiding piece portion 2104 is arranged in the center of the front plate portion 2101 and the gutter portion 2102 in the left-right direction, and has a constant width in the left-right direction. They stand vertically in opposite directions (parallel directions). The guiding piece portion 2104 is formed such that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the guide piece portion 2104 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102 . Therefore, the game ball B guided by the guide piece portion 2104 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the gutter portion 2102 .

The guide piece portion 2104 has a sharp piece portion 2104a with a steep slope and a loose piece portion 2104b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2104a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece portion 2104a. More specifically, the sharp edge portion 2104a of the guiding edge portion 2104 is linearly inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal from a portion near the upper end of the rear surface of the front plate portion 2101 so as to become lower as it goes rearward. The shape of the side surface is formed in a triangle (approximately an isosceles right triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2104b is linearly inclined at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal from the rear end of the sharp piece portion 2104a so as to become lower toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first start opening 2004 from above, it first contacts the steep piece portion 2104a of the guide piece portion 2104, and the game ball B is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2104a. After the direction is changed from downward to rearward, it is guided rearward by the loose piece portion 2104b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the first starting port 2004 and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

With the decorative seal 2110 attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, the peeling hole 2105 is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side, and pushing the decorative seal 2110 forward from behind with the rod-shaped member. By doing so, a part of the decorative seal 2110 can be rolled up forward from the front plate portion 2101 . The decorative seal 2110 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the front plate portion 2101 by pulling the turned-up portion of the decorative seal 2110 by the operator. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the decorative seal 2110 at the time of manufacturing and sorting at the time of disposal.

In addition, since the peeling hole 2105 is hidden from the front by attaching the decorative seal 2110 to the front surface of the front plate portion 2101, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2105, and the player can It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2105, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2105. - 特許庁

The mounting hole 2106 is a countersunk hole, and a mounting screw (countersunk screw) is inserted from the front to mount the starting port unit 2100 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The positioning pin 2107 is provided at a portion closer to the periphery of the flange portion 2103 than the mounting hole 2106, and is provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150(c)) from the adjacent mounting hole 2106. there is The positioning pin 2107 is inserted into a positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance.

In the starting port unit 2100, two sets of one mounting hole 2106 and one positioning pin 2107 are arranged on the left and right sides of a vertical line passing through the center of the front plate portion 2101 (trough portion 2102) in the left-right direction. They are provided in symmetrical positions. By inserting a pair of positioning pins 2107 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the starter unit 2100 is positioned at a specific position (the center position to be described later) within the game area 5a. position directly below the central discharge portion 2513a on the stage 2513 of the object 2500). Thereby, the acceptance probability of the game ball B from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 to the first starting port 2004 can be within a desired range.

Further, in the starting port unit 2100, since the positioning pins 2107 and the mounting holes 2106 are provided at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2004 in between, the starting port unit 2100 and the starting port unit 2100 may not change due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. Even if there is a difference in shrinkage between the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and the center position of the first starting port 2004, it is possible to avoid biasing the center position of the first starting port 2004 to one side in the left or right direction. center position can be maintained.

In addition, since the starter unit 2100 has a pair of positioning pins 2107, when the starter unit 2100 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2107 are inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel 1100. 1117, the starting port unit 2100 can be positioned. The opening unit 2100 does not move delicately, and the starting opening unit 2100 can be reliably attached to the specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and is opened upward, so that the center accessory 2500 can move in the horizontal direction. Located just below the center. More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located directly below the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is received in the first start port 2004 with a high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state attached to the game panel 1100, and delivers it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. can be done. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 and discharged downward.

In the starting port unit 2100 described above, the rear end side of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2104 is shown as having a pin angle. A chamfered portion such as a chamfer may be provided.

[5-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 149 and the like. FIG. 149(a) is a front view of a side unit in the front unit, and FIG. 149(b) is a perspective view of the side unit in the front unit as seen from behind. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with four general winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . Each of the four general prize winning openings 2001 opens upward.

The side unit 2200 includes a front plate portion 2201 having a flat plate shape, a rear extension portion 2202 extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 , and a front plate portion 2201 extending from the rear ends of the left and right ends of the rear extension portion 2202 . and a flange portion 2203 extending outward in parallel with the . The front plate portion 2201 is recessed rearward at a portion below a certain width from the upper edge on the front surface. A side unit seal 2220 is attached to a recessed portion of the front surface of the front plate portion 2201 . In addition, the front plate portion 2201 is inclined such that a portion having a constant width from the upper edge on the rear surface becomes thinner upward (inclining so as to move rearward as it goes downward).

The rear extending portion 2202 has a first gutter portion 2202a, a second gutter portion 2202b, a third gutter portion 2202c, and a fourth gutter portion 2202d from the left. curved in an arc. The first gutter portion 2202a, the second gutter portion 2202b, the third gutter portion 2202c, and the fourth gutter portion 2202d cooperate with the front plate portion 2201 to form the general winning opening 2001. In addition, the first gutter portion 2202a, the second gutter portion 2202b, the third gutter portion 2202c, and the fourth gutter portion 2202d are located behind the left and right ends of the rear extension portion 2202 to a certain height from the respective lower ends. It extends rearward from the end (flange portion 2203).

The first gutter portion 2202a has a height slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side is opened obliquely in the upper right direction when viewed from the front. The second gutter portion 2202b has a height approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side opens upward in a front view. The third gutter portion 2202c has a height approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side opens obliquely in the upper right direction in front view. The fourth gutter portion 2202d has a height of about twice the diameter of the game ball B from the lower end to the upper end, and the upper end side is opened obliquely to the upper right when viewed from the front.

The four general prize winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200, when assembled on the game board 5, are arranged in a positional relationship with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a. ), the direction of entry is as indicated by the arrow. More specifically, the ball entering direction of the general winning hole 2001 (the leftmost general winning hole 2001) configured by the first gutter portion 2202a is slanted to the lower left as shown in the drawing. An upper end surface of a sharp piece portion 2210a of a first guide piece portion 2211, which will be described later, is positioned on the axis. The ball entering direction of the general winning hole 2001 (the second general winning hole 2001 from the left) configured by the second gutter portion 2202b is directed obliquely to the lower right as shown in the figure, and the axis of the ball entering direction is It passes above a second guide piece portion 2212 which will be described later. The ball entering direction of the general winning hole 2001 (the third general winning hole 2001 from the left) configured by the third gutter portion 2202c is directed diagonally to the lower left as shown in the drawing, and the axis of the ball entering direction will be described later. It passes above the third guide piece portion 2213 . The ball entering direction of the general winning hole 2001 (fourth (rightmost) general winning hole 2001 from the left) formed by the fourth gutter portion 2202d is slanted to the lower left as shown in the drawing. The directional axis passes above a fourth guide piece portion 2214, which will be described later.

Further, the rear extending portion 2202 is provided on the right side of the fourth gutter portion 2202d, and has a shelf portion 2202e gently inclined so as to become lower toward the right side.

The rear surface of the flange portion 2203 contacts the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2203 is provided at two locations, a portion to the left of the left end of the first gutter portion 2202a and a portion at the lower right corner of the shelf portion 2202e.

In addition, the side unit 2200 further has a guiding piece portion 2210 for guiding the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 . The guide piece portion 2210 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to the rear end of the rear extension portion 2202 . The guiding piece portion 2210 has a sharp piece portion 2210a with a steep slope, and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and has a gentler slope toward the rear than the steep piece portion 2210a.

The guide piece portion 2210 of the side unit 2200 includes a first guide piece portion 2211 provided on the first gutter portion 2202a, a second guide piece portion 2212 provided on the second gutter portion 2202b, and a third gutter portion. It is composed of a third guide piece portion 2213 provided on 2202c and a fourth guide piece portion 2214 provided on the fourth gutter portion 2202d.

The first guide piece portion 2211 of the side unit 2200 is different in configuration from the second guide piece portion 2212, the third guide piece portion 2213, and the fourth guide piece portion 2214, and has the sharp piece portion 2210a and the loose piece described above. In addition to the configuration of the section 2210b, it has the following configuration. The first guide piece portion 2211 is erected in a direction (parallel direction) facing the ball entry direction of the general winning hole 2001, and a change piece portion 2211a for changing the circulation direction of the game ball B backward, and an entry ball. and a rear piece 2211b erected in a direction different from the direction (including the opposing direction) to guide the game ball B backward. The changing piece portion 2211a and the rear piece portion 2211b of the first guide piece portion 2211 have a sharp piece portion 2210a and a loose piece portion 2210b, respectively.

In this embodiment, the change piece 2211a is erected diagonally to the upper right from the lower left portion of the arc-curved bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. is erected vertically upward from the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. Therefore, the change piece portion 2211a has a portion behind the branched portion of the rear piece portion 2211b positioned to the left and above the rear piece portion 2211b in a front view.

More specifically, the first guide piece portion 2211 is formed such that the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2211a is perpendicular to the ball entering direction, and the front and left sides of the horizontal plane are higher. is formed as The upper end surface of the changeable piece 2211a is linear so as to become lower at a steep angle (45 degrees with respect to the base of the changeable piece 2211a) toward the rear from a portion near the upper end of the rear surface of the front plate 2201. , and then bends at a gentle angle (at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the base of the change piece 2211a) so as to become lower toward the rear and is linearly inclined. The sharply angled portion of the change piece portion 2211a is a sharp piece portion 2210a, and the loosely angled portion is a loose piece portion 2210b. A sharp piece portion 2210a of the change piece portion 2211a has a triangular side surface (approximately an isosceles right triangle).

The rear piece portion 2211b is linearly inclined so as to branch off from the middle of the sharp piece portion 2210a in the change piece portion 2211a so as to become lower toward the rear at a steeper angle, and then gradually become lower toward the rear. It bends at an angle (5 degrees to the horizontal) and slopes linearly. The sharply angled portion of the rear piece portion 2211b is the sharply angled portion 2210a, and the loosely angled portion is the loosely angled piece portion 2210b. The rear piece portion 2211b of this embodiment is formed so that the upper surface of the sharp piece portion 2210a is on the same plane as the upper surface of the sharp piece portion 2210a of the change piece portion 2211a so that the front and left sides are higher. The upper surface of the portion 2210b is formed so that only the front side is higher than the horizontal plane. Therefore, the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2211b is twisted between the sharp piece portion 2210a and the loose piece portion 2210b.

In the general winning opening 2001 in which this first guide piece portion 2211 is provided, when the game ball B enters from the diagonally upper right direction along the diagonally lower left entering ball direction, the upper end surface of the sharp piece portion 2210a in the change piece portion 2211a Abutting, the flow direction is changed from the oblique lower left direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rearward and downward direction, toward the rear of the rear piece 2211b branching from the middle of the change piece 2211a. It rolls backward on the lowered upper end surface. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the general winning hole 2001 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

According to the first guide piece portion 2211 of the side unit 2200, in the general winning opening 2001 where the ball entering direction is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, it extends in a direction opposite (parallel to) the ball entering direction. Since the change piece portion 2211a is provided, the game ball B entering the general winning hole 2001 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the change piece portion 2211a. As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the first guide piece portion 2211, the side surface of the first guide piece portion 2211, etc., and the game ball B Since it is possible to prevent the first guide piece portion 2211 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to contact with the side surface of the first guide piece portion 2211, the pieces of the damaged first guide piece portion 2211 can prevent ball clogging from occurring. Instead, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the ball jam, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

By the way, in the case of providing only the change piece portion 2211a erected in the direction (parallel direction) opposite to the entering ball direction of the game ball B, as described above, the change piece portion 2211a is the first gutter portion Since it is provided at the upper left position than the lowest portion of the bottom surface of 2202a, the game ball B comes into contact with the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a. Since the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a extends horizontally and is not inclined, when the game ball B comes into contact with the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a, the distribution of the game ball B may be stopped. . In contrast, in the present embodiment, the rear piece 2211b is projected upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the first gutter portion 2202a, and the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b is lowered rearward. Since the game ball B is inclined, the game ball B does not contact the bottom surface of the horizontal first gutter portion 2202a, and can be reliably guided (circulated) backward by the inclined upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2211b. can.

The entry speed of the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001 varies. When the entry speed of the game ball B is high, the entry direction of the game ball B is diagonally to the lower left. Since the game ball B that has entered the opening 2001 is strongly (largely) exerted a force to move leftward, the game ball B will move leftward from the upper end surface of the rear piece 2211b by the force. and At this time, as described above, part of the sharp piece portion 2210a and the loose piece portion 2210b of the change piece portion 2211a are located on the upper left of the rear piece portion 2211b. It is possible to prevent excessive movement of the game ball B in the first gutter portion 2202a to the left, and in a state of leaning against the change piece portion 2211a (or the change piece portion 2211a and the rear piece portion 2211b The game ball B can be guided backward in a state where it straddles the ball. Thereby, contact of the game ball B to the inner surface of the first gutter portion 2202a can be avoided. For this reason, according to the first guide piece portion 2211, since the rear piece portion 221b is bifurcated from the change piece portion 2211a, it is possible to deal with game balls B (winning balls) flowing in at various speeds. is.

Next, the second guide piece portion 2212 of the side unit 2200 vertically stands upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b that is curved in a semicircular arc shape. The second guiding piece portion 2212 is formed such that the upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the second guide piece portion 2212 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the second guide piece portion 2212 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b.

The second guiding piece portion 2212 also has a sharp piece portion 2210a with a steep slope and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece portion 2210a. . The steep piece portion 2210a of the second guide piece portion 2212 extends horizontally from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the second gutter portion 2202b on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to a height approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B. , and the side surface is formed in a triangular shape (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the sharp piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the second gutter portion 2202b so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

In the general winning opening 2001 configured by the second gutter portion 2202b, the axis in the direction of entry of the game ball B passes above the second guide piece portion 2212, so the general winning opening 2001 (front plate portion 2201) to the upper end surface of the second guide piece portion 2212 has a certain amount of height. Therefore, in the general winning opening 2001, when the game ball B enters along the entering ball direction facing diagonally to the lower right, the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail planted just before N), since it flows down on a parabola, the direction of circulation will be downward before the game ball B reaches the second guide piece portion 2212, so the game ball B will move to the second guide piece The upper end surface of the portion 2212 abuts on the portion of the sharp piece portion 2210a. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the second guide piece portion 2212, the side surface of the second guide piece portion 2212, and the like.

Then, the game ball B coming into contact with the sharp piece portion 2210a of the second guide piece portion 2212 is reflected by the inclination of the sharp piece portion 2210a, so that its circulation direction is changed from below to the rear, and then the loose piece It is guided backward by the portion 2210b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the general winning hole 2001 and transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

The third guide piece portion 2213 of the side unit 2200 vertically stands upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c that is curved in a semicircular arc. The third guiding piece portion 2213 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the third guide piece portion 2213 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the third guide piece portion 2213 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c.

The third guiding piece portion 2213 also has a sharp piece portion 2210a with a steep slope and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and has a looser slope than the steep piece portion 2210a. . The sharp piece portion 2210a of the third guide piece portion 2213 extends horizontally from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the third gutter portion 2202c on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to approximately the same height as the diameter of the game ball B. , and the side surface is formed in a triangular shape (generally a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the sharp piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the third gutter portion 2202c so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

In the general winning opening 2001 configured by the third gutter portion 2202c, the axis in the ball entry direction of the game ball B passes above the third guide piece portion 2213, so the general winning opening 2001 (front plate portion 2201) to the upper end surface of the third guide piece portion 2213 has a certain amount of height. Therefore, in the general winning opening 2001, when the game ball B enters along the entering ball direction facing diagonally to the lower left, the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted just before ), the game ball B flows down on a parabola, so that the direction of circulation turns downward before the game ball B reaches the third guide piece portion 2213, so the game ball B reaches the third guide piece portion 2213 abuts on the sharp edge portion 2210a on the upper end face. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner portion between the upper end surface and the side surface of the third guide piece portion 2213, the side surface of the third guide piece portion 2213, or the like.

Then, the game ball B coming into contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the third guide piece portion 2213 is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, and after the direction of circulation is changed from below to the rear, the loose piece It is guided backward by the portion 2210b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the general winning hole 2001 and transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

The fourth guide piece portion 2214 of the side unit 2200 vertically stands upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d that is curved in a semicircular arc. The fourth guiding piece portion 2214 is formed so that the upper end surface becomes lower toward the rear, and the game ball B can be guided rearward. The height of the rear end of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d. Therefore, the game ball B guided to the fourth guide piece portion 2214 does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d.

The fourth guiding piece portion 2214 also has a sharp piece portion 2210a with a steep slope and a loose piece portion 2210b that continues from the rear end of the steep piece portion 2210a and is more gentle to the rear than the steep piece portion 2210a. . The abrupt piece portion 2210a of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 extends horizontally from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the fourth gutter portion 2202d on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2201 to a height approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B. It is linearly inclined so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the rear, and the side surface is formed in a triangular shape (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle). On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2210b is linearly inclined from the rear end of the sharp piece portion 2210a to the rear end of the fourth gutter portion 2202d so as to become lower toward the rear at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal.

In the general winning opening 2001 configured by the fourth gutter portion 2202d, since the axis in the ball entry direction of the game ball B passes above the fourth guide piece portion 2214, the general winning opening 2001 (front plate portion 2201) to the upper end surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 has a certain amount of height. Therefore, in the general winning opening 2001, when the game ball B enters along the entering ball direction facing diagonally to the lower left, the upper edge of the front plate portion 2201 (actually, the obstacle nail N planted just before ), the game ball B flows down on a parabola, so that the direction of circulation turns downward before the game ball B reaches the fourth guide piece portion 2214, so the game ball B reaches the fourth guide piece portion 2214 abuts on the sharp edge portion 2210a on the upper end face. As a result, the game ball B does not come into contact with the corner portion between the upper end surface and the side surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214, the side surface of the fourth guide piece portion 2214, and the like.

Then, the game ball B coming into contact with the steep piece portion 2210a of the fourth guide piece portion 2214 is reflected by the inclination of the steep piece portion 2210a, so that its circulation direction is changed from below to the rear, and then the loose piece It is guided backward by the portion 2210b. As a result, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the general winning hole 2001 and transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 side.

In addition, the side unit 2200 has a peeling hole 2204 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the portion where the front surface of the front plate portion 2201 is recessed rearward, and mounting holes 2205 penetrating in the front-rear direction in each of the two flange portions 2203 . , and a positioning pin 2206 projecting rearward from the rear surface of each of the two flange portions 2203 in a cylindrical shape. The front side of the peeling hole 2204 is closed by a side unit seal 2220 attached to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201 .

Peeling hole 2204 is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side in a state where side unit seal 2220 is attached to the front surface of front plate portion 2201, and the rod-shaped member pushes side unit seal 2220 forward from the rear. A portion of the side unit seal 2220 can be rolled up forward from the front plate portion 2201 by pressing the side unit seal 2220 forward. By pulling the curled portion of the side unit seal 2220 by the operator, the side unit seal 2220 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the front plate portion 2201 . As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the side unit seal 2220 at the time of manufacturing and sorting at the time of disposal.

In addition, since the peeling hole 2204 is hidden from the front by attaching the side unit seal 2220 to the front surface of the front plate portion 2201, deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2204 can be suppressed, and the player can Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2204 , and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2204 .

The attachment hole 2205 is a countersunk hole, and is used to attach the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by inserting an attachment screw (counter head screw) from the front. The positioning pin 2206 is provided within a predetermined range (see FIG. 150(c)) from the adjacent mounting hole 2205 . The positioning pin 2206 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance.

In the side unit 2200, two sets of one mounting hole 2205 and one positioning pin 2206 are provided such that four general winning holes 2001 are positioned between them. By inserting a pair of positioning pins 2206 into corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the side unit 2200 can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the game area 5a. can. As a result, the acceptance probability of the game ball B which is accepted into the general prize winning opening 2001 through the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in the game panel 1100 can be set within a desired range.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a pair of positioning pins 2206, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2206 are inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Since the side unit 2200 can be positioned by inserting it, the side unit 2200 moves when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 (see FIG. 190(b)) of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2205. It is possible to prevent the game panel 1100 from slipping off or floating from the game panel 1100, and the mounting work can be facilitated. The side unit 2200 does not move subtly, and the side unit 2200 can be reliably attached to the specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the four general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, side upper left unit 2300 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2005, a second sub-out port 2022, and a second starting port sensor 2401 (see FIG. 153, etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2005. , is equipped with

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning hole 2402 extending left and right over the full width in the horizontal direction, a pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and a pseudo out port 2404 provided below near the left end of the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 . The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open forward. The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is larger (wider) in the left and right than the second big winning opening 2007 . Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width in the left-right direction of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the usually used big winning opening.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning door 2405 that openably closes the pseudo big winning door 2402, and a pseudo big winning door solenoid 2406 that opens and closes the pseudo big winning door 2405 (see FIG. 153, etc.). ), and The pseudo big prize winning door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and its lower side is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is arranged to the right of the pseudo out port 2404 and directly above the pseudo big prize winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is to the right of the second starting port 2005. placed adjacent to each other.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the left and right direction is almost the same as the lower right rail 1004. It is formed to have a length that covers the top.

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2407 that can abut on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and projects forward from the base plate 2407 to form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. and a possible delimiter 2410 . The base plate 2407 and partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, the pseudo big prize winning port 2402, and the pseudo big prize winning port 2404 are provided so as to penetrate the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big prize winning port sensor 2403 is located on the base plate 2407. located on the rear side. A pseudo big prize winning slot 2402 and a pseudo out slot 2404 are provided inside the delimiter 2410 .

The dividing portion 2410 includes a bottom wall portion 2411 that extends laterally over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, and a first standing wall portion 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall portion 2411 . , a right slanted wall portion 2413 extending obliquely to the lower left from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412, a right lateral wall portion 2414 horizontally extending from the lower end of the right slanting wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412, A second vertical wall portion 2415 that is spaced leftward from the right horizontal wall portion 2414 and extends upward from the first vertical wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right horizontal wall portion 2414; A left slanted wall portion 2416 extending obliquely to the lower right from a portion at the same height as the upper end of the single standing wall portion 2412 to the same height as the lower end of the second standing wall portion 2415, and A left lateral wall portion 2417 extending horizontally to the left from the standing wall portion 2415, and an inclined wall portion 2418 extending obliquely downward to the left from the left end of the left lateral wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411. , and a third standing wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411 .

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction by about one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The horizontal distance between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is slightly shorter than the length of the second big prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction. The distance between the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left slanted wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length of the second big prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion between the second standing wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418 in the left lateral wall portion 2417 . The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is arranged directly below the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and the portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is obliquely cut away from the oblong rectangle. The shape is open towards the front. Pseudo-out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where bottom wall portion 2411 and third standing wall portion 2419 intersect.

The lower right unit 2400 also includes a flat lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the first standing wall portion 2412, the right oblique wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414. , which closes the front end side of the triangular frame formed by the second vertical wall portion 2415, the left oblique wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417, and forwards the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022. It is provided in the center between the extending plate-like right lower left decorative portion 2432 and the lower right right decorative portion 2431 and the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and extends forward from the base plate 2407 in a downward arrow shape. It has a protruding lower right central decorative portion 2433 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

Furthermore, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402, the lower right right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 are independent of each other. It further has a lower right decorative substrate 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light and decoration are mounted on the front surface.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 has transparent decorative stickers on the front surfaces of the pseudo grand prize winning door 2405, the lower right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433. is pasted.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a state where the game ball B cannot flow to the right side and the lower side in a state assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward around the upper portion of each of the right slanted wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left slanted wall portion 2416, and a plurality of obstacles are present at these portions. A nail N is planted. A portion between the first vertical wall portion 2412 and the second vertical wall portion 2415 is located below the second prize winning opening 2007 of the center accessory 2500 . The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inner side of the partition portion 2410, is the game It is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the area 5a.

In addition, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled on the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is located slightly rightward with respect to directly below the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the inclined wall portion 2418 The lower end (left end) of is located below the first starting port 2004 . Above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in this portion. is set.

Further, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled on the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. In addition, the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 or the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second start opening 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it with the second start opening sensor 2401, and then discharge it downward. Also, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo big prize winning port 2402 and a pseudo out port 2404 inside the delimiter 2410 (pseudo game area 2010). Inside the partition 2410, only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is formed to circulate.

In the normal state, the lower right unit 2400 is in a state in which the pseudo big winning door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo big winning door 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning door 2405 so that the game ball B cannot be received. ing. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inner side (pseudo game area 2010) of the partitioning portion 2410 passes through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the bottom wall portion 2411 After flowing down and rolling leftward along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, the third vertical wall portion 2419 prevents further rolling to the left, and opens forward at that portion. is received in the pseudo-out port 2404 . The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a, but is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the pseudo out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008. The game ball B rolled in the direction and received in the pseudo out port 2404 can give the player the illusion that it rolls on the lower right rail 1004 and is received in the out port 1008.例文帳に追加

The pseudo big prize winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005, and the second opening. According to the lottery result of the second special symbol, when the pseudo big prize opening solenoid 2406 is energized, the upper end rotates so that the upper end moves forward around the lower side, and the upper end is positioned slightly above the lower end. It is in a state of protruding forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the rear becomes lower. In this state, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. Then, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is in a state where the game ball B can be received, when the game ball B flows down in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it hits the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 protruding forward. Then, it is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo big prize winning door 2405 and is received in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 .

The pseudo grand prize winning port 2402 is not accepted by the second grand prize winning port 2007 and extends leftward even to the lower part of the right discharge passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B is released downward from the right release passage 2565 while the big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, the game ball B is also received by the pseudo big winning opening 2402. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is

In addition, since it also extends to the left at the part immediately below the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022, it is accepted by the second big winning port 2007 when the pseudo big winning port 2402 is opening and closing. It is as if the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 and received in the second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 is received in the pseudo grand prize winning port 2402. can be an illusion.

The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and discharged downward. The pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the player side even through the open pseudo big winning opening 2402 . Since the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 can be visually recognized, the player can be tricked into thinking that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole.

The pseudo big winning gate sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and for opening and closing the pseudo big winning gate door 2405 by counting the number of the game balls B. . By opening and closing the quasi-big prize door 2405 according to the number of game balls B received in the quasi-big prize mouth 2402, the illusion that the quasi-big prize mouth 2402 is a real big prize hole can be made easier. can.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has a pseudo big winning opening 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the big winning opening that is normally used and extends long to the left and right, The pachinko machine is equipped with a large prize-winning opening that has never been seen before, and can make a player feel an illusion and give a strong impact to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to be actively selected, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 are placed above the pseudo grand prize winning port 2402 whose lateral direction is larger than that of the second grand prize winning port 2007. And an inclined wall portion 2418 is provided, and between the right horizontal wall portion 2414 and the left horizontal wall portion 2417 (the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416) to allow the game ball B to be received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402.例文帳に追加As a result, a plurality of game balls B received in the second large prize winning port 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo large prize winning port 2402, so that the game received in the second large prize winning port 2007 The player can be given the illusion that more game balls B than the balls B are received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role item 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147 and 150 to 1534. FIG. FIG. 150(a) is a front view of the center accessory in the front unit, (b) is an enlarged view of the arrow A portion in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of (b). FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the left rear bottom. Figure 152(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstructing nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 152, and FIG. 153(b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back. FIG. 154 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 152, viewed from the front, with only the center right front plate viewed from behind.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 includes a variable prize winning opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002, and the first starter. A first big prize that opens and closes so that the game ball B can be received according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005. An opening 2006 and a second prize winning opening 2007 are provided.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion (part of the peripheral wall portion 2501) projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and is driven into the game area 5a. A game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thereby exerting a reinforcing effect while allowing the player to It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The center accessory 2500 further has a plurality of mounting holes 2504 for mounting on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and a plurality of positioning pins 2505 for positioning on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. . The mounting hole 2504 is provided in the flange portion 2502 so as to pass through in the front-rear direction. The mounting hole 2504 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 150(c)), and preferably has a bearing surface with a diameter of 7 mm or more.

Moreover, it is desirable that the mounting hole 2504 be provided at a position that is at least a predetermined distance (eg, 4.5 mm) from the standing wall (eg, the peripheral wall portion 2501). Thereby, when the game board 5 is assembled, it is possible to prevent the screw tightening holder for tightening the mounting screw from interfering with the vertical wall. It should be noted that, at the time of assembly, at a portion where the mounting screws are screwed together through the plurality of mounting holes 2504, the respective mounting holes 2504 are provided apart from each other by a predetermined distance (for example, 29 mm) or more. As a result, interference between the screwed holders can be avoided.

The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 . The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward with a length substantially equal to the thickness of the protruding flange portion 2502 (in this embodiment, the effective length is 2 mm). The positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 (see FIG. 190(b)) formed in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) with a predetermined fitting tolerance. The positioning pin 2505 has a conical tip, which facilitates insertion into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 .

A plurality of positioning pins 2505 are arranged in the flange portion 2502 at the lower right portion of the stage 2513, the lower portion of the warp entrance 2511, the left guide passage group 2530 portion, the lower portion of the first sub-out port 2021, and the upper left corner. The parts are provided in five places, and are arranged so that the parts that affect the game are sandwiched between them. Specifically, a positioning pin 2505 on the lower right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 below the warp entrance 2511 are provided with the stage 2513 related to the reception of the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 in between. It is A positioning pin 2505 below the warp entrance 2511 and a positioning pin 2505 for the left guide path group 2530 are provided with the variable winning opening 2003 and the first big winning opening 2006 interposed therebetween. Furthermore, the positioning pin 2505 of the left guide path group 2530 and the positioning pin 2505 at the upper left corner are provided with the first big prize winning opening 2006 in between. In addition, a positioning pin 2505 on the lower right of the stage 2513 and a positioning pin 2505 on the lower side of the first sub-out port 2021 are provided with the second prize winning port 2007 therebetween.

In this embodiment, some mounting portions 2504, such as the mounting portion 2504 in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, are not paired with the positioning pin 2505. However, this is not limitative. Instead, all mounting holes 2504 may be paired (set) with positioning pins 2505 . In this case, the center accessory 2500 can be more firmly fixed to the game board 5 (game panel 1100). In addition, since the desired position of the game panel 1100, that is, the positional relationship between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the obstacle nail N can be accurately positioned over the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500, Variation in the flow of game balls B for each game board 5 (product) in the outer area (for example, the area above and below the left guide path group 2530, the space forming part 2550 below the right guide path group 2540, etc.) can be reduced as much as possible.

The positioning pin 2505 is provided adjacent to the mounting hole 2504, and the distance L1 between the centers of the adjacent mounting holes 2504 is provided within a predetermined range. The above distance L1 is set within the range of 1 to 6 times the length of the positioning pin 2505, preferably within the range of 5 mm to 8 mm. The reason why the distance L1 is set within the above range is that if it is smaller (closer) than within the above range, the mounting screw is screwed through the positioning hole 1117 into which the positioning pin 2505 is inserted and the mounting hole 2504 in the game panel 1100. This is because if the screw holes 1116 are too close, the positioning holes 1117 and the screw holes 1116 may be misaligned or distorted when drilling the positioning holes 1117 and the screw holes 1116 in the game panel 1100 . Further, if it is larger (farther) than the above range, when the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, the portion between the positioning pin 2505 and the mounting hole 2504 in the flange portion 2502 will be distorted. This is because there is a risk that cracks (cracks) may easily occur.

It should be noted that the positional relationship between the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 is not limited to the center accessory 2500. , etc., can also be applied.

In addition, the positioning pin 2505 is provided on the rear surface side of a portion of the front surface of the flange portion 2502 that can be contacted by the operator from the front. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided at the rear portion of the member (for example, the front plate portion) away from the flange portion 2502 forward. As a result, when assembling the game board 5, the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided can be pressed to reliably push the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100. can.

Since the center role 2500 has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, by inserting the positioning pins 2505 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 in the game panel 1100, the center role 2500 can be played. It can be accurately positioned at a specific position within the area 5a. As a result, the acceptance probability of the game ball B to the stage 2513, the variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. provided in the center accessory 2500 is within a desired range. can be

Further, since the center accessory 2500 has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 are inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel 1100. 1117, it is possible to position the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504, the center accessory 2500 may move or the game panel may move. It is possible to prevent it from floating from the 1100, and it is possible to facilitate the mounting work. The center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to the specific position of the game panel 1100 (the game area 5a) without delicately moving.

This center accessory 2500 has a peeling hole 2508 penetrating back and forth at a portion of the flange portion 2502 to which the decorative seal is attached on the front surface (see FIG. 151). The peeling hole 2508 is closed on the front side by a decorative seal. The peeling hole 2508 is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side in a state where the decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and pressing the decorative seal forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member. , a portion of the decorative seal can be rolled up forward from the flange portion 2502 . Then, the decorative seal can be easily removed (peeled off) from the flange portion 2502 by pulling the turned-up portion of the decorative seal by the operator. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the decorative seals during manufacture and sorting during disposal.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter in a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 on the left side in front view and on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). A warp exit 2512, which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 are moved left and right. It has a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in a direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2004 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is positioned on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is positioned directly above the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2004 with a very high probability.

At this time, since the center role object 2500 of this embodiment is provided with positioning pins 2505 on both left and right sides with the stage 2513 (central discharge part 2513a) interposed therebetween, the center role object 2500 can be moved by the positioning pins 2505. The stage 2513 can be accurately positioned at a specific position in the game area 5a (the position directly above the first start port 2004 in the start port unit 2100). As a result, the acceptance probability that the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted by the lower first start port 2004 can be within a desired range, and the temperature and Even if the environment such as humidity changes, the relative position between the stage 2513 and the first starting port 2004 can be maintained, and the acceptance probability can be prevented from changing.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the positioning pin 2505 is provided so as to be adjacent to some of the mounting holes 2504, but it is not limited to this, and all the mounting holes 2504 Alternatively, the positioning pin 2505 may be provided adjacently. That is, the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 may be used as a set of mounting portions, and only a plurality of mounting portions may be provided to mount the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). As a result, in addition to the same effect as described above, the entire center accessory 2500 can follow the expansion and contraction of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes. can be done.

Further, in the above embodiment, the positioning pins 2505 (positioning pins 2107 and 2206) have a cylindrical shape, but are not limited to this, and may have a polygonal columnar shape, a star-shaped columnar shape, or a hemispherical shape. , etc. may be used.

[5-8e-1. 1st Attacker Division]
The center accessory 2500 has a first attacker part 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 . The first attacker part 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a variable winning opening door 2521 that can open and close the variable winning opening 2003, and according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2002. A variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 167 etc.) that is energized to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521 (see FIG. 167 etc.), a variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003,

In addition, the first attacker unit 2520 includes a first large winning opening door 2523 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2006, and a game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. 1st large winning opening solenoid 2524 (see FIG. 167 etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by lottery and the lottery result of the second special symbol and opens and closes the first large winning opening door 2523 , and a first big winning hole sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 .

Furthermore, the first attacker section 2520 is provided with a transparent plate-shaped center left front plate 2527 provided in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, and the left second guide passage 2532 (Fig. 137, etc.).

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a first attacker part 2520 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 . The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 .

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, in front of the outwardly extending flange portion 2502 on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, near the center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500. It is open to the left. In addition, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B directly above the variable winning hole 2003 .

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported on the lower end side around an axis extending back and forth, and can receive a game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 by setting it in an upright state (normal state). can be closed to When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves to the left, and the variable winning opening 2003 is in a state (open state) in which the game ball B can be received. ). When the variable winning entrance door 2521 is open, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side, and since it is inclined to be lower rightward, the game ball B flowing down from above and in contact with the upper surface is pushed to the right. It is possible to guide to the variable winning opening 2003 on the other side.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward. be done.

The first big prize winning opening door 2523 is in the form of a flat plate that is inclined downward to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502 . In a normal state, the first big winning opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加In this state, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper side of the first large winning opening door 2523 is guided leftward by the inclination of the first large winning opening door 2523, and flows through the left second guide passage 2532. .

When the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first big winning opening door 2523 retreats rearward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502 to push the game ball B to the first big winning opening 2006. Acceptable. In this state, the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 flows down in front of the flange part 2502, and is provided at a height between the first big winning hole 2006 and the variable winning hole 2003. After being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 , it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 right above the variable winning hole 2003 . After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and ejected downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guidance passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can flow. there is In other words, between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can flow is provided. Therefore, when hitting the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B circulates, the game ball B always passes through the left guide path group 2530 .

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the game board 5, and is provided at a portion at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom of the game area 5a. ing. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game balls B in circulation can be visually recognized in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531 . The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are partitioned by a passage wall 2533 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502 .

A first big winning opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532 . Therefore, when it is desired to receive the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 , it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 .

[5-8e-3. Right guidance passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 has a right guide passage group 2540 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game ball B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide path group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is aligned with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 in the vicinity of the stopping portion 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the right guide path group 2540 .

The right guide passage group 2540 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 allows the game balls B in circulation to be visually recognized in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right first guide passage 2541. and a right second guide passage 2542. The entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated left and right.

The first right guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion directly below the entrance, then extends downward, and then extends downward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position on the left side directly below the entrance. After extending forward, the exit opens diagonally to the lower right. In addition, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the right, and the exit opens obliquely to the lower right while being aligned on the right side of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541. are doing. That is, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right sides intersect each other.

The right guide path group 2540 is located above the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As shown in FIG. In addition, the right first guide passage 2541 has the right end of its entrance located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that hit the impinging portion 1006 It is formed to enter one guide passage 2541 .

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side near the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released near the right rail 1005 and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. Although the details will be described later, the game ball B that has entered the second guide area 2712 is more likely to be received by the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, so the right second guide passage 2542 When the game ball B is entered, it is more likely to be accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than when it is entered into the right first guide passage 2541 .

This right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting the game ball B that is circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of game balls B detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 is less than a predetermined number per hour in a game situation in which the player is forced to hit to the right, the game situation can be enjoyed more. In order to make it so, it is possible to prompt "right hitting" or to instruct the hitting strength for avoiding acceptance to the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542. becomes.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). ). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height approximately half of the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker section 2560 has a second big winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021 and is provided at the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500 .

In the space forming portion 2550 , the flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when the game board 5 is assembled. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502, and a portion below the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502. It has a guide wall portion 2552 extending to the lower right, and an opening 2553 penetrating the flange portion 2502 back and forth at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. ing.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a notch portion 2551a penetrating left and right in the vicinity of the upper portion thereof. The guiding wall portion 2552 is provided so that a space of about three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the horizontal direction between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 .

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550 . The opening 2553 has a side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 at a constant distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and a side closer to the right wall 2551 moves away from the right wall 2551 downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550 , the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically with a constant width to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 . The side close to the right wall portion 2551 of , extends vertically so as to widen leftward as it goes downward.

When the game board 5 is assembled, some of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the front surface of the game panel 1100 are inserted through the opening 2553 from behind. The plurality of obstructing nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific obstructing nail group 2700 implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described later in detail. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

The space forming portion 2550 bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and extends left and right, and has a plurality of rear projections 2554 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The rear projections 2554 are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so that the front-rear direction is staggered. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flowed down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

Furthermore, the space forming portion 2550 includes a transparent plate-like center right front plate 2555 that covers the area from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a translucent plate attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. and a center right front plate seal 2556 (see FIG. 153, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540 .

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first accommodation portions 2555a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and each accommodates the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N (comb nail portion 2701), and a plurality of first accommodation portions 2555a that penetrate in the front-and-rear direction to accommodate one obstacle nail. A second accommodating portion 2555b for accommodating the head of the nail N, a peeling hole 2555c penetrating back and forth at a portion where the center right front plate seal 2556 is affixed, and bulging rearward from the rear surface and extending left and right. and a plurality of front ridges 2555d spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center role 2500 unless the center role 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100 .

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that forms a certain gap with respect to the peripheral line surrounding and in contact with the heads of the plurality of obstructing nails N (interlocking nail portion 2701) that are accommodated. It is In this embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed to have a size to accommodate the heads of two obstructing nails N, and the centers of the first accommodating portions 2555a are different from the centers of the obstructing nails N. It is eccentric. The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. As shown in FIG. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at portions corresponding to respective obstructing nails N of a specific obstructing nail group 2700 described later.

The gap between the front end (head) of the obstructing nail N in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b is in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, preferably 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. It is desirable to be within the range of If the gap is smaller than this range, when the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment, the obstacle nail N may be affected and the obstacle nail N may be bent. This is because it becomes difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstructing nail N in the portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b, which is troublesome and may increase the cost. Further, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending of the obstructing nail N when it is bent due to the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B, etc., exceeds the allowable range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in the intended flow. This is because there is a risk that

As a result, since it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstructing nail N housed in the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b, the impact caused by the distribution (abutment) of the game ball B is reduced. It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. The game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the obstacle nail group 2700, the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be exhibited continuously, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. The labor required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N can be reduced.

Also, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the front sides of the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. The obstructing nail N whose head is stored in the first storage portion 2555a or the second storage portion 2555b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b through the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, It is possible to make it easier to notice the failure of the obstructing nail N.

With the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the stripping hole 2555c is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side, and using the rod-shaped member, removes the center right front plate seal 2556 from the rear. is pushed forward, a part of the center right front plate seal 2556 can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2555 . Then, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555 by pulling the curled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556 by an operator. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting work at the time of disposal.

This peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when the game board 5 is assembled. Through 2555c, it is possible to prevent a linear fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from being inserted into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the part where the game ball B circulates, thereby preventing fraudulent acts. .

In addition, since the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c can be suppressed, and the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and it is possible to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front projections 2555 d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear projections 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502 . The front ridges 2555d are provided so as to alternate in the vertical direction with respect to the rear ridges 2554. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flowed down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Section]
The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is composed of a second large winning opening 2007 that is elongated in the left-right direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out opening 2021 that is provided on the right side of the second large winning opening 2007. and have The second big prize winning opening 2007 has a right end located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B to the right from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552, and the left end has a full width in the game area 5a. It is located about 1/3 from the right of . The second big prize winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515 . The right wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550 .

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 can open and close the second big winning hole 2007 by moving forward and backward with the second big winning hole sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007. A flat plate-like second large winning opening door 2562 that is closed to the left and inclined to be lower to the left, and the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005. It has a second large winning opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second large winning opening door 2562. - 特許庁

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 is provided above the second big winning opening door 2562 in front of the flange part 2502, and the game ball B can flow to the left. A right release passage 2565 extending downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side and capable of releasing the game ball B downward, and a wall of the ceiling of the attacker passage 2564 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502 and a closing wall portion 2566 forming a part of the guide wall portion 2552 and extending leftward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

The attacker path 2564 extends to the left with a height slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and the ceiling wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the closing wall portion 2566. In addition, the wall of the floor is composed of the second big winning entrance door 2562 . In this attacker passage 2564, a plurality of rear projections 2564a bulging forward and extending in the vertical direction are provided in the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the attacker passage 2564 is, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. , in the part of the attacker passage 2564 in the center lower right front plate 2572 to be described later, it bulges rearward and extends in the vertical direction, and is spaced in the left and right direction so as to alternate with the rear ridges 2564a. A plurality of ridges (not shown) are provided. Due to the plurality of front and rear ridges 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated leftward while meandering in the front-rear direction in the attacker passage 2564, and the circulation speed can be suppressed.

The right release passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a lateral width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. Right discharge passage 2565 has an exit at a height between stage 2513 and the upper end of stage cover 2515 . The right discharge passage 2565 has a right wall formed by the attacker left wall portion 2568 and a left wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

Furthermore, the second attacker part 2560 protrudes forward from the flange part 2502 on the right side of the second large prize winning opening door 2562, and is higher than the right end of the second large winning opening door 2562 and slightly higher than the right end of the closing wall part 2566. An attacker right wall portion 2567 extending downward from a lower position, and a position lower than the left end of the second large prize winning port door 2562 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502 on the left side of the second large prize winning port door 2562 and a right shelf portion 2569 extending downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the right shelf portion 2569. A left shelf portion 2570 extending downward to the right from near the upper end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 so as to form a gap, and a left shelf portion 2570 provided in the center between the left shelf portion 2570 and the right shelf portion 2569 . and a middle wall portion 2571 that

The second big prize winning opening 2007 is defined in the lateral direction by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 . That is, the lateral width between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the lateral width of the second prize winning opening 2007 . Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width in the left-right direction of the second big prize opening 2007 is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, making it impossible for the game ball B to come and go between the left and right sides. there is The lower ends of the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 are positioned above the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 . Between the lower end portion of the right shelf portion 2569 and the middle wall portion 2571 and between the lower end portion of the left shelf portion 2570 and the middle wall portion 2571, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 is provided. The middle wall portion 2571 is positioned directly above the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled to the game board 5 .

The second attacker part 2560 moves in front of the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the space formed by the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570. It further has a closed transparent plate-like central lower right front plate 2572 (see FIG. 137 and the like).

In the normal state, the second attacker part 2560 projects forward from the front end of the second large winning opening door 2562 from the front surface of the flange part 2502, and cannot receive the game ball B to the second large winning opening 2007. is closed to The second big prize winning opening door 2562 which openably closes the second big winning opening 2007 is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and rear, so that it is difficult to see when viewed from the front. , it is difficult to determine the open/closed state.

In this normal state, the game ball B struck to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flowed down the right guide path group 2540 and the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) is guided by the guide wall part 2552 and the right wall. 2551 to the second attacker portion 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 and flowed down onto the second big prize winning port door 2562, moves in the attacker passage 2564 while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the plurality of front and rear protrusions 2564a. After rolling to the left, it enters into the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second big prize door 2562, and is returned from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565 into the game area 5a.

The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is positioned directly above the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5, and is the attacker left wall constituting the right wall of the right release passage 2565. The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the portion 2568 . As a result, between the right release passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, the movement of the game ball B is blocked. In other words, an area (pseudo-game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right release passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo-game area partitioned by the front face of the game panel 1100, the delimiter 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the attacker left wall 2568, right shelf 2569 and left shelf 2570 in the second attacker part 2560. 2010 is formed. This pseudo-game area 2010 allows only the game balls B received in the second big winning opening 2007 to circulate.

Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the second big winning port solenoid 2563 When the power is turned on, the second large prize winning opening door 2562 retreats, and the second large winning prize opening 2007 becomes ready to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B flowing through the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming part 2550 to the second big winning hole 2007 are accepted by the second big winning hole 2007 .

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 rolls on the right shelf 2569 or the left shelf 2570, is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561, and is released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. It will be done. In this second attacker part 2560, since two second large winning hole sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if many game balls B are received in the second large winning hole 2007 in a short time, they will not be delayed. can be detected without

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the first storage portion 2555a for storing the heads of the plurality of obstacle nails N of each nail group 2701 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700. is provided, it is possible to limit the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N, and the obstacle nail N is deformed by the impact caused by the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or the impact from the outside. (bending) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unintended flow down of the game ball B, and the game ball B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the effects of the specific obstacle nail group 2700. can be exhibited continuously, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the center accessory 2500, the second large prize winning port door 2562 that openably closes the second large prize winning port 2007 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. Since the second large prize winning port 2007 is opened and closed by moving the winning prize port door 2562 back and forth, the second large prize winning port door 2562 can be made difficult to see when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the big prize winning opening 2007 . As a result, it is possible to make the pseudo big winning gate 2402 (pseudo big winning gate door 2405) which is provided below the second big winning gate 2007 relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest in the virtual big winning gate 2402 can be increased. can be strongly attracted to, and a strong illusion can be made as if the pseudo big prize mouth 2402 is a real big prize mouth. Therefore, if the pachinko machine is provided with a large prize winning opening that has never been seen before, it is possible to make the player feel an illusion, to give a strong impact to the player, and to make the player enjoy the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to be positively selected as the pachinko machine to be played, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500, since the supporting portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) has a portion where the flange portion 2502 projecting outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501 . As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. FIG. More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position below the variable prize winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500 slightly lower than the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. Also, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens toward the left.

The gate member 2600 includes a gate 2002 for performing a lottery of normal symbols for opening and closing the variable winning opening 2003 by passing the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting that the game ball B has passed through the gate 2002. have. In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002 .

[5-8g. Specified obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The specific obstacle peg group 2700 is provided upstream of the second big winning opening 2007 in the right part of the game area 5a. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 .

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a plurality of interlocking nail parts 2701 in which a plurality of interfering nails N arranged adjacent to each other form one group, and the plurality of interlocking nail parts 2701 are one game ball each other. They are arranged at intervals that allow them to pass through B. In this embodiment, the interlocking nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstructing nails N. As shown in FIG.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided so that portions (gap portions) between a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B can be guided by the part 2701 . Thus, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guiding area 2710 capable of guiding the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guide area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guiding area 2710 is composed of a first guiding area 2711 and a second guiding area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guiding area 2711 . The first guide area 2711 is capable of guiding the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 . The second guide area 2712 can guide the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide path 2542 in the right guide path group 2540 to the position of the right part from the center of the guide wall 2552 .

A first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges rightward. More specifically, in the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in a plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the outer side of the arc, a straight line connecting the pegs 2701 near the upper end and near the lower end. , the arc formed by the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the inner side of the arc is provided so as to be in contact therewith. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. As shown in FIG. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the portion extending vertically is reduced, making it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

In addition, the plurality of nail pegs 2701 that form the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are located below the two pegs 2701 that are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. 2701 is provided to the right of the center between the upper two nail sets 2701 (the side farther from the center of the arc). This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 .

Furthermore, in the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the gaps between the pegs 2701 arranged in a circular arc are separated from each other. They are provided so as to be positioned higher toward the right column. In other words, in the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the two pegs 2701 paired in the left-right direction have the right The peg part 2701 is arranged to be higher. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

A guidance area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward with a sense of meandering in the left-right direction by means of a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and made slower than in the area where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general arrangement, and the falling time of the game ball B to the predetermined position ( time of arrival) can be delayed. In addition, by forming a set of two obstacle nails N in the nail assembly part 2701, it is possible to increase the number of collisions between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B as compared with the case where the obstacle nail N is configured with one obstacle nail N. The effect of delaying the fall of ball B is enhanced.

In the guiding area 2710, since the plurality of nail parts 2701 are arranged with intervals in the vertical direction, the game ball B being guided moves to the left outer side or the right outer side through the part of the interval. Sometimes I put it away. That is, the game ball B moves from the first guide area 2711 to the second guide area 2712, moves from the second guide area 2712 to the first guide area 2711, or moves left outside from the first guide area 2711. or move to the right outside from the second guidance area 2712 .

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guiding region 2711 and the second guiding region 2712 comes into contact with the guiding wall portion 2552, and is located between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (the second big prize On the entrance door 2562, or inside the second prize winning entrance 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 passes through a plurality of protrusions 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. And, due to a plurality of front projections 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. Then, it comes into contact with the guiding wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker's right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or inside the second big winning opening 2007). .

The game ball B, which has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, passes between the specific obstruction nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551, after a plurality of ridges 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the center right front plate. Due to a plurality of front ridges 2555d provided on 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. Then, it flows down to the first sub-out port 2021 or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker's right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning gate door 2562 or inside the second big winning gate 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it flows through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves from the second guide area 2712 to the right outside, the There is a possibility that it will be accepted by one sub-out port 2021 . That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide path group 2540, the right second guide path 2542 has a higher probability of receiving the game ball B into the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide path 2541. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541 . In other words, when striking to the right, hitting hard makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the impinging portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with fine adjustment. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation.

By the way, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, if the interfering nail N alone constitutes the interlocking nail portion, the obstacle nail N is paired to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass. Other obstructing nails N become obstructing nails N in all directions forming a gap with the obstructing nail N as the center. In other words, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming gaps in all directions. As a result, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the guiding probability of the game ball B by the guiding area 2710.例文帳に追加As a result, it becomes difficult to circulate the game balls B in a stable state. In addition, when the obstacle nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstacle nail N provided in all directions so that the gap is a desired distance, which requires a great deal of time and effort for maintenance. becomes.

On the other hand, if the interfering nail portion 2701 is composed of a plurality of obstructing nails N as in this embodiment, the direction of the interfering nail N adjacent to a certain interfering nail N in the interfering nail portion 2701 is as follows. Since adjacent obstructing nails N are in charge of forming the gap, the directions in which a certain (single) obstructing nail N is in charge of forming the gap can be limited to only a part of the directions. can reduce the number of obstructing nails N that form pairs. As a result, even if one obstructing nail N of the nail group 2701 is bent, the area of the gap affected is small, so that the change in the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 can be suppressed. In addition, when a certain obstructing nail N is bent, it is sufficient to adjust the gap to the obstructing nail N in some directions so as to have a desired distance, which is easier to maintain than when adjusting the gaps in all directions. Such time and effort can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted into the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and accommodated. The interlocking nail portion 2701 composed of a plurality of obstructing nails N is housed in the first housing portion 2555a so as to surround the heads thereof.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby restricting the movement of the head portion of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to an impact due to the circulation (abutment) of the game ball B or an impact from the outside. It is possible to reduce the unintended flow of B, and it is possible to circulate the game ball B in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is sustained. The movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby preventing the deformation of the obstacle nail N. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b that accommodate the heads of the obstacle nails N are attached to the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555. , the obstacle nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. Further, when the obstructing nail N of the specific obstructing nail group 2700 is bent from the front, its trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the failure of the obstructing nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second prize winning port 2007 . This function is an important function that influences the payout rate. No nail adjustment is allowed in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment, as described above, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, and the center right front plate 2555 and the center Since the right front plate seal 2556 covers the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, it is impossible to perform any nail adjustment.

In the above-described embodiment, the plural interfering nail portions 2701 forming the specific interfering nail group 2700 are configured by two interfering nails N; The obstacle nail N described above may be used. When the interlocking nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstacle nails N, the plurality of obstacle nails N may be arranged in a line, or may be arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, quadrangle, pentagon, or hexagon. Also good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guidance region 2710 by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of two regions, the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712, but is not limited to this. , one, or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstruction nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, since it is possible to suppress and delay the flow speed of the game ball B, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, According to the lottery result or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"), the second big winning opening 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted. Even if the player tries to hit the game ball B so that it reaches the second big winning hole 2007 at the timing when it can be accepted, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 causes the game ball B to reach the second big winning hole 2007 at the desired timing. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the ball, and it is possible to make the timing of hitting the game ball B difficult. As a result, the degree of difficulty can be given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained with a rewarding game, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, so that an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific obstruction nail group 2700, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstruction nails N, the configuration of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be compared with the case of being composed of a synthetic resin member. cost can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[5-8h. Pseudo-game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo-game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a, and is an area where only specific game balls B can circulate. More specifically, the pseudo game area 2010 is an area in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 (a so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) can circulate. This pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a.

The pseudo-game area 2010 consists of a portion where the front surface of a flat-plate-shaped game panel 1100 having a game area 5a provided in front thereof is exposed, and a plurality of obstacles planted in the exposed portions of the game panel 1100. Pseudo big winning that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special pattern and the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the nail N and the game ball B to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005. It has an opening 2402 and a pseudo-out opening 2404 for discharging the game ball B not received in the pseudo-big winning opening 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo big prize winning port 2402 as a receiving port capable of receiving the game ball B, and a pseudo out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B, It has a structure similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the delimiter 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the upper end by the right shelf 2569 , the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571 of the second attacker part 2560 . The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first vertical wall 2412 of the partition 2410 . The left end of the pseudo game area 2010 is divided by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the dividing portion 2410, the left horizontal wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third vertical wall portion 2419. ing. The lower end of the pseudo-game area 2010 is separated by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410 .

In the simulated game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker part 2560 and the simulated big winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this part.

The second big winning opening 2007 as a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big winning opening door 2562 . Since the second large prize winning opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the second large winning prize opening door 2562 is difficult to see from the player side. The pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a, and the parts (partitioning part 2410, the attacker left wall part 2568 of the center accessory 2500, etc.) partitioned from the game area 5a are made transparent. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, the player can feel the simulated game area 2010 as if it is part of the game area 5a. can be an illusion.

The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is formed longer in the horizontal direction than the second big winning prize opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the horizontal size of the second big winning opening 2007 is 131 mm, and the horizontal size of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is 170 mm. Since the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open forward, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 that opens and closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402 (normally ), the surface faces forward, and the pseudo big winning door 2405 stands out from the player.

For this reason, when the player looks at the pachinko machine 1, the pseudo-big prize hole 2402 is more conspicuous than the second big prize hole 2007. It is possible to make the player think that the game is provided with an unusually large prize winning opening, and to strongly attract the player's interest.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the pseudo big winning door 2405 is upright, and the pseudo big winning door 2402 makes the game ball B unacceptable. Closed. In addition, in a normal state, the second big winning opening 2007 is closed by the second big winning opening door 2562, so the game that is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second big winning opening door 2562 The ball B rolls to the left on the second big prize gate door 2562, passes through the right release passage 2565, and is released into the game area 5a. Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B does not circulate within the pseudo-game area 2010 .

From the normal state, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., the second When the large winning prize opening door 2562 retreats, it becomes possible to receive the game ball B into the second large winning prize opening 2007 . In this state, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007 , the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 .

Then, the game ball B supplied to the simulated game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the front exposed portion of the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes through the front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 and reaches the bottom. After flowing down on the wall portion 2411 and rolling leftward along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, the third vertical wall portion 2419 prevents further leftward rolling and rolls forward at that portion. A pseudo-out port 2404 that is open to the outside is discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 . In other words, it is discharged from the pseudo-game area 2010 .

Since the pseudo-out port 2404 of the pseudo-game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out-port 1008, the game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 will appear to the player as if it were the out port 1008. can give the illusion of being accepted by Thereby, it is possible to give the illusion that the pseudo-game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 in the pseudo game area 2010 is the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the big winning hole in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to disappoint the player by not accepting the game ball B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402.例文帳に追加On the other hand, since the game ball B accepted in the second large prize winning port 2007 circulates in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo large prize winning port 2402, the second large prize winning port 2007 A predetermined number of game balls B are paid out by acceptance. As a result, the game ball B is paid out even though the game ball B has not been received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, so that the player can be made to feel that he/she has won the game, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

By the way, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo big prize winning port door 2405 conspicuous from the front opens and closes, so the player instantly notices that the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 can be received. can let As a result, the game ball B can be hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called “right hitting”) so that the game ball B can be received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . Further, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of advance notice, or the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to hit to the right. Since this pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 can be entered only when the player hits to the right, it is intuitively easy for the player to understand.

For this reason, for example, before the second big winning hole 2007 becomes ready for acceptance, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed, and the player may be made to "right-handed". . As a result, at the timing when the second large prize winning port 2007 becomes acceptable, the "right-handed" game ball B can easily reach the second large prize winning port 2007, so that the player can be more entertained. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern during the "jackpot" game, if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is also opened and closed, many game balls B are thrown through the second big winning hole 2007 in a short time. It can be supplied into the pseudo-game area 2010, and by circulating many game balls B in the pseudo-game area 2010, the player can enjoy the movement and the game of the game ball B in the pseudo-game area 2010. can let At this time, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is received in the large pseudo big prize winning port 2402, so that the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in the player's interest is suppressed. can be made

In this embodiment, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is formed to be larger in the horizontal direction than the second big winning prize opening 2007. A slanted wall portion 2418 is provided, and a game ball B passing between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the left slanted wall portion 2416) enters the pseudo big winning opening. 2402 is accepted. The distance between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is approximately half the distance of the second prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, a plurality of game balls B accepted in the second large prize-winning port 2007 are collected in a narrow range and headed toward the pseudo-big prize-winning port 2402, so that the game balls B received in the second large prize-winning port 2007 The player can be given the illusion that a larger number of game balls B are accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

The pseudo big winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game balls B by accepting the game balls B or give a privilege to the player. Therefore, the pseudo big prize opening 2402 can be opened and closed in patterns not found in conventional pachinko machine big prize openings (for example, 337 time signature, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beat, 16 beat, BGM, and predetermined patterns). The tempo of the music, etc.) can be opened and closed to entertain the player.

In addition, in the pseudo-game area 2010, a windmill W may be provided in addition to the obstacle nail N. By making the windmill W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

First, on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002, and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged with a gap from above, and between them and above the left guide passage group 2530 , a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted. A plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532 . Thereby, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. - 特許庁The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 circulates downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and flows down the left side of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize winning port 2006 which is normally closed by the first large prize winning port door 2523 so that it cannot be received. The game ball B that has entered into rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down. Then, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the first big winning port door 2523 is opened. When the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while retreating, it is accepted in the first big winning hole 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and the back ball of the back unit 3000 is guided. It is discharged downward through the unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be collected directly above the gate 2002 at a portion below the variable prize winning opening 2003 . As a result, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B circulates downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable prize winning opening 2003 is in a state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable winning opening 2003 is in an acceptable state, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B circulating in the left second guide passage 2532 has a high probability of variable winning. It is received in mouth 2003 . The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

Between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300, a warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens leftward in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . The windmill W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 and closer to the center accessory 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are such that the game ball B flowing through the gate 2002 and the right outer side of the gate 2002 mainly flows down the portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. are arranged to Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain degree of probability. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated outside the left side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511 .

The game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 passes through the warp passage and is provided in the vicinity of the lower end of the central part in the left-right direction of the center role 2500 from the warp exit 2512 that opens in the frame of the center role 2500. Provided to stage 2513 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls in the horizontal direction on the stage 2513 and is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b.

Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2004 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2004 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2004 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting hole 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002. is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 at . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special symbol is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide section 1003 .

A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W has a high probability of being positioned on the upper side of a plurality of obstructing nails N that are diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 in two tiers. It flows down onto a plurality of obstructing nails N. A game ball B that does not flow down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper side through the right side of the windmill W flows down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower side. On the other hand, the game ball B, which has circulated on the left side of the center of the windmill W, flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls on the shelf 2301 to the right, and then rolls onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower side. flow down to

The game ball B, which has flowed to the right of the center of the windmill W and flowed down to the upper side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction ( There is a possibility that it will be guided to the first starting port 2004 ) side and accepted by the first starting port 2004 . In addition, on the upper side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are obliquely arranged, there is a gap through which one game ball B can pass, so it may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the gap. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 or the first starting hole 2004 is discharged from the out hole 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally is moved in the left-right direction of the game area 5a by the plurality of obstacle nails N. It is guided to the center side, is received by the out port 1008 without being received by the first starting port 2004, and is discharged from the game area 5a. On the lower side, since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the way, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be received in the general prize winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001. On top, it is discharged downwards. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming section 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker section 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. A specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N is provided in a space forming portion 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 .

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When struck, the game ball B circulates through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 .

A game ball B hit relatively strongly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 contacts the impinging portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540 . On the other hand, the game ball B, which is hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, rolls rightward on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and passes through the right guide passage group 2540. Enter the right second guide passage 2542 .

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543, and then moves downward from the side near the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. released. After passing through the right first guide passage 2541, the game ball B enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming section 2550, and moves leftward and rightward in the first guide area 2711. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has circulated through the first guide area 2711 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right.

A plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming walls on both the left and right sides of the first guide region 2711 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction, through which one game ball B can pass. Through, the game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side of the first guide area 2711 (second guide area 2712). The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 flows down to the guide wall section 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall section 2501 . At this time, due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 circulates obliquely to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552 . The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the first guide area 2711 flows through the second guide area 2712 .

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side near the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 . After passing through the right second guide passage 2542, the game ball B enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming section 2550, and moves in the left-right direction within the second guide area 2712. It flows down while meandering. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide area 2712 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right.

A plurality of pegs 2701 forming the walls on both the left and right sides of the second guide region 2712 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction, through which one game ball B can pass. The game ball B may move to the left outside (the first guiding area 2711) or the right outside of the second guiding area 2712 through. The game ball B that has moved leftward from the second guide area 2712 circulates through the first guide area 2711 . The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551, and passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551. flow down to the part. At this time, due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided backward of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 .

The game ball B guided by this specific obstacle nail group 2700 is reduced in circulation speed compared to the part where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general gauge arrangement, and even if it is at the same height. It will flow down with a delay.

A game ball B that has passed through the specific obstruction nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes through the second attacker portion from between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567. 2560 enters the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second big winning opening 2007 . In a normal state, the second large winning opening door 2562 advances and closes the second large winning opening 2007 so that it cannot be received. After rolling left on the upper surface of the , it is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565 . In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B rolls to the left while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the rear ridge 2564a of the flange 2502 and the front of the ridge of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 of the second attacker portion 2560 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left lateral wall portion 2417). do. Then, with a certain degree of probability, it is accepted by the second starting port 2005 that is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565 . Also, although the probability of acceptance to the second starting port 2005 is lower than that of the second starting port 2005, it is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received by the second starting hole 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401, and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 .

The game ball B released from the right release passage 2565 and not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 rolls obliquely downward to the left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400. After moving, it is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B circulating through the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 or the second When the second large prize winning port door 2562 retreats according to the lottery result of two special symbols, it is accepted in the second large prize winning port 2007 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by either of the two second big winning hole sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B supplied from the second big winning opening 2007 into the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010 . Then, when the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning prize opening door 2405, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning prize opening door 2405 and flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411, along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411. After rolling to the left, it is received in the pseudo-out port 2404 . The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged downward.

When the game ball B is circulating in the pseudo-game area 2010, the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the second special pattern If the pseudo big prize winning door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the result of the lottery, there is a high probability that it abuts on the pseudo big prize winning door 2405 and is accepted by the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 behind. be done. The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

As an effect using the pseudo big winning opening 2402, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, according to "big hit", "small hit", etc.) When the second big winning opening 2007 is open, the peripheral control board 1510 opens the pseudo big winning opening 2402 for the effect. At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second big winning hole 2007, the degree to which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Using this property, it can be suggested that when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, a high probability state (so-called variable probability state) is set after the "jackpot". Conversely, when there are many omissions in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low probability state (so-called normal non-variable probability state) will occur after the "jackpot". Furthermore, it is also possible to suggest a probability setting (generally, 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) based on such a state of failure.

Thus, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the normal state, there is only a possibility that it will be accepted in the second start port 2005 where the privilege is given, and the gate 2002 is closed. Since there is no possibility of passing through or being accepted into the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2004, it is possible to perform a driving operation such that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

In detail, the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004, and the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2005. As for the lottery result, the special variation time for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern to the player is set longer for the lottery result of the second special pattern than the lottery result of the first special pattern. Therefore, since the lottery result of the second special symbol takes more time to consume the number of reservations, even if the number of received game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 is the same , the number of lottery results of the second special symbol executed by the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Also, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of the game balls B to be paid out is one. For this reason, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that it will only be accepted at the second start port 2005, and even if it is accepted at the second start port 2005, it will be a privilege. Since the number of game balls B to be paid out is one, the player can easily hit the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 .

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007, the privilege that many game balls B are paid out is provided. In order to enable the reception of the game ball B to these first big prize opening 2006 and second big prize opening 2007, the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005 are made to accept the game ball B, and they It is necessary to draw lots for the first special design and the second special design that can be accepted.

For this reason, in a normal state, the player is instructed to allow the game ball B to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be accepted by the first starting port 2004. The ball B can be driven in, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the first start port 2004. It is possible to raise expectations for acceptance of the game ball B to the.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2004, "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as a lottery result of the first special symbol. Then, the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes. The operation can be enjoyed, and the expectation for receiving the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 can be heightened.

Specifically, when the first big winning hole 2006 becomes receivable, it is possible to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500 . On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 becomes acceptable, a hitting operation (“right hitting”) can be performed so that the game ball B circulates to the right side of the center accessory 2500 .

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500, on the right side of the center role 2500, a right guide path group 2540 consisting of a right first guide path 2541 and a right second guide path 2542 and a specific obstacle A guide region 2710 consisting of a first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 by the nail group 2700 is provided, and the guide passage for circulating makes it easier to be received in the second sub-out port 2022. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates through the passage (here, the right first guide passage 2541), and the player is instructed to hit the game ball B. can entertain.

In addition, since the second big winning hole 2007 has a larger opening in the horizontal direction than the first big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007 can be opened in a short time to the player just by looking at it. It can be recognized that many game balls B can be accepted. As a result, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the player can immediately change the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to heighten the expectation for receiving the game ball B into the big prize winning opening 2007 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball B is supplied in the pseudo game area 2010 provided with the pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B into the pseudo big prize opening 2402, and it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143, 144, 155, and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the back unit on the game board. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received by the general winning hole 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a first starting hole 2004 to receive the game ball B behind the game panel 1100. A first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the guided game ball B is provided. The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball induction unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. A back box rear unit 3030 detachably attached by a lock slider 3020, and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the back box unit 3030 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. there is

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the front end in the back box 3010 a back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 provided in the back box 3010, a back front front effect unit 3300 provided at an upper part in the back box 3010 at a position substantially the same as the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction, and the inside of the back box 3010 A back bottom front effect unit 3400 provided at the lower part behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back box 3010 and a back top back effect unit 3500 provided behind the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010 (Fig. 162 etc.), and a back bottom post effect unit 3600 provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010 .

Further, the back unit 3000 has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface part 3011 is provided on the back box 3010, and the front side of the back unit 3000 is directed downward to attach other members such as the production unit (here, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200) to the back box 3010. It can be used for laying face down with the rear unit 3000 facing upward, placing it on its back with the rear side of the back unit 3000 directed upward, and the like.

[5-9a. Back box relation]
Next, the configuration related to the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160 and the like. FIG. 156 is a front view of the rear box-related configuration of the rear unit. FIG. 157(a) is a front perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit, and FIG. 157(b) is a rear perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. FIG. 158(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 157 with respect to the back case separated into main members and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. 159(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 158 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. FIG. 160(a) is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is placed face down using the functional surface portion, and FIG. 160(b) is a side view showing a state in which the back unit is placed face up using the functional surface portion.

The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 opened forward, a back box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back box rear unit 3030 provided behind the back box unit 3030. and a back board unit 3040 attached to the rear side of 3010 . The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by a lock slider 3020 .

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) provided on the lower side of the opening 3010a. two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a; and a lock mechanism portion 3010d to which the lock slider 3020 is slidably attached to the left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing pieces 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the rear box unit 3030 are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back case 3010 from behind while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. With the lower fixed piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d, when the lock slider 3020 is slid rightward in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixed piece 1652 from moving rearward. be able to.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back ball guide unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from behind. The back box rear unit 3030 includes an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a set plate 1650 having the effect display device 1600 attached to the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650. and a peripheral control unit 1500 in which a peripheral control board 1510 is housed.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate having the same size as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 . The set plate 1650 has two upper fixing pieces 1651 protruding upward from the upper side in the left-right direction, and one lower fixing piece 1652 protruding downward from near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction. there is The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG.

The set plate 1650 also has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that opens forward on the front side. The liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In this embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 match when viewed from the front. The set plate 1650 is transparent. As a result, the inside of the back case 3010 can be viewed from behind through the set plate 1650 .

The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 167 etc.) having a peripheral control section 1511 and an effect display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. It is Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of set plate 1650 so that the upper side of peripheral control board box 1520 is positioned slightly below the upper side of set plate 1650 . As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, there is a region of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650. formed.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and back, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

The back board unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box unit 3030). When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 extending to the left and right is positioned between the lower end of the rear side of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

The back board unit 3040 is rotated so that the locking claw 3041b moves rearward about the shaft 3041a by releasing the locking between the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b. The rear of the rear unit 3030 can be opened, and the rear box unit 3030 can be attached and detached from the rear box 3010 without removing it from the rear box 3010.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to mount a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided in the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a set plate 1650 is attached to the opening 3010a. A 15-inch production display device 1600 is attached to the front side of 1650. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 has a size of 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the effect display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, the effect display device 1600 can be attached directly to the opening 3010a. The display device 1600 can be attached to the opening 3010a of the back case 3010 via a set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the display device 1600. FIG. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 having a different size can be attached only by changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is changed according to the model change, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even if the model is changed. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when the position of the effect display device 1600 is desired to be changed due to a design change or the like, it can be easily handled by changing only the set plate 1650.例文帳に追加It is possible to reduce the cost for design change and the like.

In the above embodiment, the set plate 1650 is transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be colored, such as colored transparent, colored opaque, or the like. If the set board 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, it is desirable to use an opaque color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from being degraded due to the inside of the island equipment being seen from the player side or the light coming from behind. In this case, especially by making the set board 1650 black, even if the set board 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, the set board 1650 can be made inconspicuous. 1600 and other decorations can be made more conspicuous, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the effect of their presentation.

In addition, the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment has a functional surface portion 3011 that can be used when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The functional surface portion 3011 is provided inside the outer peripheral edge of the back box 3010 and behind the fixing piece portion 3010e for attaching the back box 3010 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The functional surface portion 3011 is formed so that the front side and the rear side are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100 . The functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 when viewed from the front. The functional surface portion 3011 has a plurality of functional hole portions 3012 each having a set of two through holes arranged vertically or horizontally. The two through holes of functional hole 3012 have the same diameter.

A predetermined member can be brought into contact with the front surface side or the rear surface side of the functional surface portion 3011 . For example, as shown in FIG. 155, in this embodiment, part of the rear surface of the back front edge decoration unit 3200 is brought into contact with the functional surface portion 3011 . At this time, a positioning pin (not shown) of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 is inserted into one of the through holes of the functional hole portion 3012 which is a part of the part where the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 abuts. In addition, a mounting screw for mounting the back front edge decorative unit 3200 is screwed into the other through hole. For this reason, the functional surface portion 3011 and the functional hole portion 3012 can be used to attach other members such as a performance unit to the back box 3010. At this time, since a plurality of function hole portions 3012 are provided, any function hole portion 3012 can be used for mounting when the mounting position of another member is changed due to design change, model change, or the like. can be done. Therefore, the back box 3010 can be used, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so that the rear surface side faces the rear (visible when viewed from the rear). Since the back front edge decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the functional surface part 3011, the head of the mounting screw for attaching the back front edge decoration unit 3200 to the back box 3010 is exposed to the front side of the back unit 3000. The appearance from the front can be improved, and the decorative effect of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be further exhibited.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 can be contacted with a predetermined member on the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, as shown in FIG. The upper end of the intermediate member 3016 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 may be brought into contact. At this time, the intermediate member 3016 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the front surface of the back unit 3000 (here, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200). As a result, when the back unit 3000 is to be placed (face down) on the predetermined member 3015 with the front side facing downward when assembling the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is placed with the front side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member 3016 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 into contact with the front surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the rear unit 3000 can be moved to a predetermined position while the front surface of the rear unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member 3015. It can rest on member 3015 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the back unit 3000 from being damaged due to the contact of the predetermined member 3015, thereby maintaining the back unit 3000 (the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201) in good condition and keeping the back front peripheral edge. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to the damage of the decorative body 3201, and suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Note that the intermediate member 3016 may be a member separate from the predetermined member 3015 .

Further, as described above, the functional surface portion 3011 can prevent the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 of the back unit 3000 from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015. While the unit 3000 (back box 3010) is placed face down, it is possible to perform installation work and wiring work of other members such as the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 on the rear side of the back box 3010. - 特許庁

Furthermore, since the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface part 3011, compared with the case where the functional surface part 3011 is provided in the production unit such as the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the production unit The back box 3010 can be placed face down even when the box is not held. Therefore, the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be placed face down even during assembly, and various work conditions (work modes) can be handled.

Further, since the functional surface portion 3011 can be brought into contact with a predetermined member on the front surface side or the rear surface side, for example, as shown in FIG. The upper end of intermediate member 3017 protruding from predetermined member 3015 may be brought into contact. At this time, the intermediate member 3017 protrudes longer (higher) than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 . As a result, when the back unit 3000 is to be placed on the predetermined member 3015 with the back side facing downward (placed face up) when assembling the game board 5, the back unit 3000 is placed with the back side facing downward. By bringing the upper end of the intermediate member 3017 protruding from the predetermined member 3015 into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the rear unit 3000 can be moved to a predetermined position while the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 is separated upward from the predetermined member 3015. It can rest on member 3015 .

Therefore, by bringing the upper surface of the intermediate member 3017 into contact with the rear surface of the functional surface portion 3011, the rear unit 3000 is placed on the predetermined member 3015 while the predetermined member 3015 is prevented from contacting the rear surface of the rear unit 3000. Since it can be placed, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) can be stabilized in a supine state during assembly, etc., and the assembly work, etc., can be easily performed from the front end side of the back box 3010. can do.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided in a portion that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the back box 3010, at least a part of the peripheral edge of the functional surface portion 3011 is provided with a portion that protrudes forward or backward (for example, the back box 3010), relative movement of the functional surface portion 3011 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 3016 or 3017 in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted by this portion. can. This makes it difficult for the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) to move when placed face down or on one's back via the functional surface portion 3011, making assembly work easier.

Furthermore, since a plurality of functional holes 3012 are provided in the functional surface portion 3011, positioning pins that can be inserted into the through holes of the functional holes 3012 are provided on the upper surfaces of the intermediate members 3016 and 3017. The positioning pins can restrict the movement of the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) placed face down or face up via the functional surface portion 3011 in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015, which is similar to the above. Operation and effects can be achieved.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000 in a front view, the back unit 3000 can be attached to a predetermined member 3015 such as a workbench or a mounting table through an intermediate member 3016 or 307 . The back unit 3000 can be kept in a stable state when placed face down or face up, and the tilting of the back unit 3000 and the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 or the like coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015 can be avoided. be able to.

Furthermore, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3011 hits the game panel 1100 when the back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). Without contact, the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any problem.

In the above-described embodiment, the functional surface portion 3011 has a planar shape parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100, but is not limited to this. Curved surface portion recessed in a truncated cone shape”, “polyhedral portion recessed in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated polygonal pyramid”, “curved surface portion protruding forward in the shape of a cone or a truncated cone”, “forward Polyhedral portions that protrude in the shape of a polygonal pyramid or a truncated polygonal pyramid. When the functional surface portion is a curved surface portion or a multi-surface portion as described above, it is desirable that the upper end surface of the intermediate member has a shape that follows the functional surface portion. Thereby, the relative movement of the functional surface portion (back box 3010) and the intermediate member in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3011, but the present invention is not limited to this. etc. may be provided. For example, the drive motor of the effect unit, the end surface of the solenoid, the tip surface of the ball guiding member, and the like may be used as the functional surface portion.

[5-9b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 . The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2004. , and a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 167, etc.).

The back ball guidance unit 3100 includes a general winning hole 2001, a variable winning hole 2003, a first starting hole 2004, a second starting hole 2005, a first big winning hole 2006, a second big winning hole 2007, a first sub-out hole 2021, and It has a discharge passage for receiving the game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2022 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, guiding it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower end part, and then discharging it downward. there is

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral edge decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front edge decoration unit 3200 is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end. The back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 has a back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 which is formed in an annular shape along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and a back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 for decorating the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 with light. and a back front peripheral decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo wrestling ring. The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed so as to have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate. The back front peripheral decoration 3201 projects forward from the front end of the back box 3010 at its front surface.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be annularly decorated with the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, by luminous decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be annularly illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

In addition, since the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can independently emit light from a plurality of parts divided in the circumferential direction by the plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate, it is possible to rotate the light in the circumferential direction. The light emitting performance can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 protrudes further forward than the front end of the back box 3010, and the front end side thereof extends through the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the panel holder 1120 in the state assembled to the game board 5. It is positioned within a space partitioned by the mouth 1121 . As a result, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the back front peripheral edge ornament 3201 in the front-rear direction is as close as possible to the position in the front-rear direction of the game area 5a, so that the focus is placed on the game area 5a. The focus is also on the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201, so that the decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be clearly seen while viewing the inside of the game area 5a, and the decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be seen in the game. You can definitely show people. Therefore, the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be made conspicuous, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the decorative effect of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be sufficiently and surely exhibited, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decline of interest.

[5-9d. Back upper front production unit]
Next, the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back top front effect unit 3300 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. The back top front effect unit 3300 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a back top front decoration body 3310 that is provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. An upper front decoration substrate (not shown) and a back upper front lifting unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back upper front decoration body 3310 are provided.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that sumo ranking rankings such as "yokozuna", "ozeki", and "sekiwake" are arranged from the left, and each ranking is displayed by the LED of the back upper front decoration substrate. can be independently illuminated and decorated. The back upper front decoration 3310 is formed to have a length that crosses the front of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is attached so as to be movable up and down, and can be lifted and lowered by the back upper front lifting unit. The front upper back decoration 3310 can move up and down within a range of substantially the same height as the front upper back decoration 3310 . In a normal state, the back upper front decoration 3310 is in a raised position where it is moved to the highest position. In this state, when the game board 5 is assembled, the center in the vertical direction is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in front view, and is positioned above the game area 5a. Most of the back upper front decoration 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the remaining part can be seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. can.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position state to the lowered position state by the back upper front lifting unit. When the back upper front decoration 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 166). The back upper front decoration 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the state of the lowered position.

According to the back front front effect unit 3300, the numbering of the back front front decoration body 3310 can be independently decorated with light emission. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect such that the variation is stopped by light-emitting decoration. As a result, when the ranking with a high rank is decorated with light, the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, and the expectation for the game can be heightened, thereby suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, according to the back upper front decoration 3310, the order of the ranking with the luminous decoration suggests to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur in which the player is advantageous. can do. As a result, when the variable light-emitting decorations of the plurality of rankings of the back upper front decoration body 3310 are started, the player can feel nervous and excited depending on whether or not the variation is stopped at the desired ranking, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back upper front lifting unit, the back upper front decoration body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a, and the front of the effect display device 1600 Since the upper part is blocked, the attention of the player can be strongly attracted to the upper back decoration body 3310, and the player's attention can be drawn to the upper back decoration body 3310. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to reliably show the player the light emission effect using the back upper front decoration body 3310 as described above, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. In addition, if the above-described light emitting effect is executed at the lowered position rather than at the raised position, it is possible to enhance the sense of premium for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-9e. Back lower front production unit]
Next, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front effect unit 3400 is provided in the lower part in the back box 3010 behind the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 . The back-bottom front effect unit 3400 includes a back-bottom front decoration body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, and a back-bottom front decoration board (illustrated are omitted), and a lower front lifting unit (not shown) that lifts and lowers the front lower front decorative body 3410 .

The back bottom front decoration body 3410 can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back bottom front decoration substrate. In addition, the underside front decorative body 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back front elevating unit. The back lower front decoration 3410 is formed to have a length that crosses the front of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction.

The back lower front decoration body 3410 includes a base decoration body 3411 that is long in the left and right direction, a center decoration body 3412 that is provided in the center of the base decoration body 3411 in the left-right direction, and a base decoration body 3411 that can cover the center decoration body 3412 from the front. A front left decorative body 3413 and a front right decorative body 3414 are provided in front of the center in the left-right direction (see FIG. 163, etc.).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape resembling a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with the characters of "gohan" in relief. The center decorative body 3412 is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to move away from each other in the horizontal direction. Each of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 has translucency. The front left decorative body 3413 is formed with the character "heaven" in relief. The front right decorative body 3414 is formed with the character "rise" in relief.

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are normally positioned in a closed position in close contact with each other, and hide the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear invisibly from the front. ing. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can move from the normal state to the open position separated from each other in the horizontal direction. In this open position state, the central decorative body 3412 provided in the rear can be visually recognized from the front through the space between the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 .

In the normal state, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 has the back bottom front decoration body 3410 positioned at the lowered position. In addition, in a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned at the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is invisible from the front. When the back lower front decoration body 3410 in the normal state is assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at a height slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, and the lower end is the lower end of the center accessory 2500. , and the upper end is positioned slightly lower than the warp entrance 2511 . A portion of the back lower front decoration 3410 in the normal state is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500. It is visible through

The front lower back decoration 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the front lower back lifting unit. When the front lower back decoration body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is positioned slightly lower than the front upper back decoration body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 161). In other words, the center in the vertical direction of the back lower front decoration body 3410 at the raised position is positioned at substantially the same height as the first big prize winning opening 2006 . In addition, the back lower front decoration 3410 can move the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position. can be moved.

According to this back bottom front effect unit 3400, when the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks part of the effect display device 1600. , and can draw attention to the back lower front decoration body 3410 .

In addition, when the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the central decorative body 3412 provided at the back becomes visible (appears). ), the appearance of the central decorative body 3412 can make the player think that something good will happen, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the game and suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, in the back lower front decoration 3410, since the center decoration 3412 can be rotated about the axis in the front-rear direction, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 are moved to the open position to open the center decoration. By rotating the central decorative body 3412 with the body 3412 appearing, it is possible to make the player strongly believe that something good must happen, thereby further increasing the player's expectation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making it possible. In addition, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears to be visible, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the central decorative body 3412 rotates. can entertain.

In addition, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 raises and lowers the back bottom front decoration body 3410 as described above, moves the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414 to appear the center decoration body 3412, and rotates the center decoration body 3412. By appropriately combining , it is possible to show a variety of movable performances to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable effect of the lower back front decoration body 3410 as described above, the back lower front effect unit 3400 enables light emission effect by a plurality of LEDs of the back lower front decoration substrate, so that more diverse effects can be achieved. The game can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

[5-9f. Back side post production unit]
Next, the back up post effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back top rear effect unit 3500 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 behind the back top front effect unit 3300 . The back top rear effect unit 3500 includes a back top rear decoration body 3510 (see FIG. 162, etc.) that is long in the horizontal direction, and a back top rear decoration body 3510 provided behind the back top rear decoration body 3510, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a rear top decoration substrate (not shown) and a rear top lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the rear top decoration body 3510 .

The back upper decoration body 3510 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper decoration substrate. In addition, the rear upper back decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the highest raised position and the lowest lowered position by the rear upper back lifting unit. Furthermore, the back upper back decoration 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decoration 3410 .

The back upper rear decoration 3510 is formed in a shape that imitates the upper half of a winning cup, and the letter "Yu" is formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The rear upper back decoration 3510 can form one large winning cup by abutting the rear lower back decoration 3610 on the lower end (see FIG. 164, etc.). The upper back decoration 3510 has substantially the same height as the front upper back decoration 3310 .

In the normal state, the upper back rear effect unit 3500 has the upper back rear decorative body 3510 positioned at the raised position. In this state, the rear upper back decoration 3510 is positioned behind the front upper back decoration 3310 in the raised position, and is invisible from the front.

When the back top rear decoration body 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back top rear lifting unit 3500, the bottom end of the back top rear decoration body 3510 is at the height of the substantially central center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. is located. In a state in which the back upper rear decoration body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 . In this state, if the front top back decoration 3310 or front bottom back decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back top rear decoration 3510, the back top rear decoration 3510 is visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the back top rear effect unit 3500, the top back decoration body 3510 can be moved up and down so that it can be visually recognized from the front, so that the appearance of the top back decoration body 3510 can surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest. In addition, the upper back decoration body 3510 can form one large decoration by bringing it into contact with the rear lower back decoration body 3610, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the person think that a chance has arrived.

[5-9g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back lower post-effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back bottom post effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the lower part inside the back box 3010 . The back bottom rear effect unit 3600 includes a bottom back decoration body 3610 (see FIG. 162, etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, and a back bottom back decoration body 3610 provided behind the back bottom back decoration body 3610, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with a back-bottom decoration substrate (not shown) and a back-bottom lift unit (not illustrated) for raising and lowering the back-bottom decoration body 3610 .

The back underside decoration 3610 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back underside decoration substrate. In addition, the underside rear decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back elevation unit.

The rear lower back decoration body 3610 is formed in a shape that imitates the lower half of a winning cup, and the letter "prize" is formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The rear lower back decorative body 3610 can form one large winning cup by abutting the upper rear decorative body 3510 on the upper end (see FIG. 164, etc.). The lower back decoration body 3610 has substantially the same height as the lower back front decoration body 3410 .

In the normal state, the underside post effect unit 3600 has the underside afterside decoration 3610 positioned at the lowered position. In this state, the rear lower back decoration body 3610 is located behind the front lower back decoration body 3410 in the lowered position, and is invisible from the front.

In a state in which the rear bottom rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the rear bottom rear lifting unit 3600, the upper end of the rear rear rear decoration body 3610 is the lower end of the rear upper rear decoration body 3510 at the raised position. It is positioned at a height where it almost abuts. In the state in which the rear lower back decoration body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 . In this state, if the front top back decoration 3310 or front bottom back decoration 3410 has not moved in front of the back bottom rear decoration 3610, the back bottom rear decoration 3610 is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can do.

According to the behind-the-back effect unit 3600, the behind-the-back decoration body 3610 can be raised and lowered so that it can be visually recognized from the front. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the loss of interest. In addition, since the rear lower back decoration body 3610 can form one large decoration by bringing it into contact with the rear upper back decoration body 3510, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the person think that a chance has arrived.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back-bottom front decoration body of the back-bottom front effect unit and the back-bottom rear decoration body of the back-bottom post-effect unit in the back unit are respectively moved to the raised positions. . In FIG. 162, the back-bottom front decoration of the back-bottom front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, and the back-up rear decoration of the back-up rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back-bottom front decoration. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-bottom decoration of the rear-bottom effect unit is moved to the lower side of the front-bottom-front decoration. FIG. 163 shows a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position to reveal the center decoration in the state of FIG. 162. FIG. It is a front view of a game board.

Also, in FIG. 164, the back top rear decorative body of the back top rear effect unit in the back unit moves to the lowered position, and the back bottom back decoration body of the back bottom rear effect unit rises to the back top rear decoration body. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in contact with. 165 shows a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position to reveal the center decoration in the state of FIG. 164. FIG. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 166 shows that the front upper back decoration of the front upper back effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the upper rear decoration of the upper rear effect unit of the back upper rear effect unit is moved to the rear of the front upper back decoration. The back bottom front decoration body of the back bottom front effect unit rises and moves to the lower side of the back top front decoration body, and the back bottom rear decoration body of the back bottom rear effect unit rises to the back bottom front decoration. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back of the body is in contact with the rear upper back decoration.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. Back front peripheral decoration 3201 of back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in back unit 3000 arranged behind 1100, back top front decoration 3310 of back top front effect unit 3300, and back bottom of back bottom front effect unit 3400. The front decorative body 3410 and the like can be visually recognized well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

More specifically, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is annularly provided along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the like. can be done. The back upper front decoration body 3310 of the back upper front effect unit 3300 is positioned above the upper end of the effect display device 1600 and in a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is approximately the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, Most of them can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500 and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500 .

In addition, the back bottom front decoration body 3410 of the back bottom front effect unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the lower end of the effect display device 1600, where the center in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300. A part can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500 and the rest can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500 . The front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back lower front decoration 3410 are positioned directly above the center accessory 2500 near the stage 2513 . The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the rectangular area between the front upper back decoration 3310 and the front lower back decoration 3410 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

The back top rear decorative body 3510 of the back top rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is positioned behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back bottom rear decorative body 3610 of the back bottom rear effect unit 3600 is positioned behind the back bottom front decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The game board 5 is a back unit 3000 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. A back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, a back top rear effect unit 3500, and a back bottom back effect unit 3600 perform predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects. In addition, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 .

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable effects as shown in FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 161, the back-bottom front decoration 3410 of the back-bottom front effect unit 3400 and the back-bottom rear decoration 3610 of the back-bottom post effect unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the back-bottom front decoration 3410 crossing the performance display device 1600 moves upward so as to traverse the performance display device 1600, so that the player's interest is attracted to the back-bottom front decoration 3410. It can make you wonder if something good is going to happen.

By the way, in FIG. 161, when only the front lower back decoration 3410 is moved upward, the rear lower back decoration 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front. Since it is formed so as to be paired with the rear decoration body 3510, if only the backside rear decoration body 3610 is visible, it looks halfway unnatural, and the appearance of the game area 5a deteriorates. There is fear. In addition, when the lower back decoration body 3610 is seen, its imperfect shape causes some players to perceive that it is combined with another decoration body, and the combination with the upper back decoration body 3510 to be described later. When the movable effect is executed, the impact given to the player is reduced, and there is a risk that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear lower back decoration 3610 is moved upward together with the front lower back decoration 3410, the rear lower back decoration 3610 can remain hidden. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the lower back decoration body 3610, and it is possible to move jointly with the upper back decoration body 3510 described later. It is possible to sufficiently exhibit the performance effect of the performance.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 161, as shown in FIG. 162, the front back decoration 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the rear lower back decoration 3610 is moved together with the front lower back decoration 3410 so that the front lower back decoration 3410 is positioned forward. In addition, the upper back decoration 3510 is moved to a portion between the front upper back decoration 3310 and the front lower back decoration 3410, and the lower rear decoration 3610 is moved to the lower side of the lower front decoration 3410. Let

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered with the upper back decoration body 3510, the front lower back decoration body 3410, and the back lower decoration body 3610, so that a strong impact is given to the player. You can give and you can convince yourself that something good is going to happen. In this state, the upper back decoration body 3510 and the lower back decoration body 3610 forming one decoration (here, the winning cup) are vertically separated from each other. Since the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is positioned, the player can have an illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the back bottom front decoration body 3410, resulting in poor appearance. can be avoided.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 162, as shown in FIG. 163, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 are moved from the closed position where they are close to each other to the open position where they are separated from each other. Then, between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414, the center decoration 3412 appears to be visible. As a result, when the center decoration body 3412 newly appears in the back lower front decoration body 3410, an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous to the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think strongly, heighten expectations for an advantageous game state, and suppress a decline in interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be gradually moved or repeatedly opened and closed. Thus, depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are opened and the central decorative body 3412 appears, the player can be thrilled and entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 163, the central decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

Subsequently, from the state shown in FIG. 163, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back lower front decoration 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 162, and then, as shown in FIG. , the back lower front decoration 3410 is moved to the lowered position, and the back upper rear decoration 3510 and the back lower rear decoration 3610 are respectively moved to the center in the vertical direction to abut (merge) with each other. As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player has an advantage will occur. , the sense of anticipation for the advantageous game state can be heightened, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Thereafter, from the state shown in FIG. 164, as shown in FIG. 165, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back bottom front decoration 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the player's expectation for the advantageous game state is heightened and interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, the center decoration 3412 of the back lower front decoration 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous has been confirmed, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened. can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, the first operation is to move the front lower back decoration 3410 (the rear lower back decoration 3610) to the raised position, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as shown in FIG. The back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the lower side of the back upper front decoration body 3310, and the back lower back decoration body 3610 together with the back lower front decoration body 3410 is moved to the rear of the back lower front decoration body 3410. It is also possible to move to . Alternatively, the front bottom decoration 3410 may be moved together with the rear bottom decoration 3610 to the center of the game area 5a. These can also produce the same effect as the above.

Thus, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above is the lottery of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. It is executed according to the result and the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the series of productions is designed to progress to the end or end in the middle depending on the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn, and can be performed in multiple stages. By showing it, it is difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect can be appropriately combined with the light emitting effect, and can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above is the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and the second Although what is executed according to the lottery result of the two special symbols is shown, it is not limited to this, and it may be executed according to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo large winning opening sensor 2403. As a result, even during the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a ``jackpot'' game state) in which the player is advantageous, the movable performance can be enjoyed, and the player is less likely to get bored, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. be able to.

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 and the like. FIG. 167 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). A peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195 .

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and a game board 5. A base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a is provided. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2004, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005. Opening sensor 2401, general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting game ball B received in general winning opening 2001, gate sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B passing through gate 2002, game received in first big winning opening 2006 A first big winning hole sensor 2525 for detecting the ball B, a second big winning hole sensor 2561 for detecting the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007, and a game ball B discharged from the game board 5 are detected. Detection signals from the out sensor 664, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibration acting on the game board 5 are sent to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port.

Detection signals from setting key switches 1311a and setting switching buttons 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., through the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, each detection signal from the out sensor 664, the first start sensor 3002, and the second start sensor 2401 is input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and the main control It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, detection signals from the general winning gate sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning gate sensor 2525, the second big winning gate sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are transmitted through the panel relay board. It is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. Each drive signal to the big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 is output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the function display unit 1400. State indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special pending number indicator, round indicator, to Each drive signal is directly output without going through another board. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the variable winning sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning sensor 2525, the second big winning sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664. , a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, whereas the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the variable winning hole 2003, and the gate 2002, so the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2401 and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2601 also occur frequently. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

Also, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so that the first big winning hole sensor Detection of game ball B by 2525 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize winning opening sensor 2525 . In addition, since a large amount of game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the game balls B are frequently detected by the out sensor 664. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball A ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extracting operation. , is equipped with

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and an error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. is electrically connected to the game ball B. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. Integrated peripheral control ICs, peripheral control ROMs for storing various processing programs and various commands, sound source ICs for high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source ICs. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. It is transmitted from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 are sent to the display control unit serial In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 to inform that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
The contents of games played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195. The more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, It will flow through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 . In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, there is provided a first large prize winning port 2006 which is normally closed by the first large prize winning port door 2523 so that it cannot be received. The game ball B that has entered into rolls on the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows down.

The game ball B that has circulated through the left guide passage group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, and in the normal state, the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002, and then pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the lottery normal symbol is "normal win", the variable winning opening. The variable winning opening 2003 closed by the door 2521 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the receiving of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 becomes possible.

In this embodiment, since the variable prize winning port 2003 is provided at a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the flow rate of the left second guide passage 2532 is higher than that of the left first guide passage 2531. It is accepted in the variable winning port 2003 with probability. Then, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the upper tray 201 is paid out to

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The variable winning opening 2003 is opened after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 to when the normal symbol lottery result is suggested, the normal symbol lottery result cannot be suggested. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

At the site of this gate 2002 , the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002 , the left outside of the gate 2002 , or the right outside of the gate 2002 . Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability. .

The game ball B entering the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2004, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2004 .

When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", A lottery for "time saving (time reduction) hit", "probable variable time saving hit", "probable variable time saving hit", "second big hit", etc.) will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2004 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the first start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2004, respectively, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2004. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 Through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the guide passage group 2540, it is discharged to the space forming portion 2550 in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

The right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance spaced leftward from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. and a right second guide passage 2542 that is open. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the right first guide passage 2541 and does not contact the impingement portion 1006 (right When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than hitting, it enters the right second guide passage 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has circulated through the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the first guidance area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has circulated through the right second guide passage 2542 is released into the specific obstacle It is discharged into second guide region 2712 of nail group 2700 .

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the horizontal direction along the guidance area 2710 . As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed compared to the normal area.

In the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide area 2710, and if it deviates to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, the first sub-out port 2021 provided below accepted with high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without a chance of being received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the first sub-out port 2021 has a higher probability of receiving the fluid through the right second guide passage 2542 than through the right first guide passage 2541 . As a result, it is possible for the player to perform a hitting operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates through the right first guide passage 2541 when "right hitting". there is In other words, when hitting to the right, the game ball B is hit with such a force that the game ball B abuts against the impingement portion 1006, so that the hitting operation of rotating the handle 195 by a large amount is encouraged. The pachinko machine 1's original game can be easily enjoyed by a relatively easy driving operation.

A game ball B that has flowed through the specific obstruction nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and passes through the second attacker portion. Enter 2560. In a normal state, the second large winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker portion 2560 is closed by the second large winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be accepted. The game ball B that has passed between the right wall portion 2567 flows down onto the second large winning opening door 2562, rolls leftward on the second large winning opening door 2562 (attacker passage 2564), and then rolls to the right. It is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the discharge passage 2565 .

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and a lower right unit 2400 is located on the left side of the second starting port 2005. Sloped walls 2418 are provided respectively. A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second starting port 2005 with a certain degree of probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 with a probability lower than that of the second starting port 2005 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged out of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B that is released downward from the right release passage 2565 and has not been received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418 and follows the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418. It rolls obliquely downward to the left along the line, is discharged leftward at a portion below the first starting port 2004 and is received in the out port 1008 .

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("right hit"), the second starting port 2005 is the only opportunity for receiving the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can actively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500, and the right side of the center role 2500 (" A feeling of premium can be imparted to a right-handed player.

When the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received in the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) is sent from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, and at the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win") , “Probability change (probability change) hit”, “Time saving (time reduction) hit”, “Probability change time saving hit”, “Probability change time saving no hit”, “Second big hit”, etc.) lottery is done. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2005 until the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the second start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2005, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbol to be retained is up to 4 for each of the second start ports 2005, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the second start ports 2005. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2005 is the time of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the second special symbol lottery result takes more time to consume the number of reservations, so the number of accepted game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed in the second starting port 2005 is smaller. Therefore, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2005 will be accepted, and the frequency with which the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed is low. , the player can be made to positively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the first big winning port 2006 and the second big prize winning opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and the game ball B can be received.

When the first big winning hole 2006 can be accepted, the first big winning hole 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A driving operation can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second guide passage 2532 . Then, when the game ball B entering the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2006 is open to accept the game ball B, the main control board 1310 and A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 .

On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the second big winning hole 2007 is provided below the right side of the center role 2500. can be driven so that the game ball B circulates. Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, the game ball B entered the attacker passage 2564 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. is accepted in the second big winning hole 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

In this way, when the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B, the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 are made to accept the game ball B. Since a large number of game balls B can be paid out, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, a "small hit", the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B for a short time. It opens and closes between (for example, a small hit rush). At this time, at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and the game ball B can be received, even if the game ball B is aimed at the second big winning hole 2007, the second big winning hole 2007 is opened. Since the specific obstruction peg group 2700 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream, it is difficult to get the timing to hit the game ball B. As a result, a degree of difficulty is given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed. . Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, so that an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn and the lottery result of the second special symbol are "big hit", after the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are received into the second big winning hole 2007, the game balls B are satisfied. (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special pattern ("time saving hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is the "second big hit", the first big winning port 2006 or the second big winning port 2007 After making it possible to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, below the second big winning hole 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 can circulate. The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561 and then enters the pseudo game area 2010 . The game ball B that has entered the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can accept the game ball B. , a game ball B is received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo out hole 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo big winning hole 2402, for example, when the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "jackpot", etc. become acceptable. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided so as to be larger and conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 are accepted into the pseudo big winning hole 2402. As a result, it is possible to keep the player from getting bored during the "jackpot" game, and to keep the player from losing interest.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs and blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁, an advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation part 301 in 300 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, and the back front of the back unit 3000 are displayed. Peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, back front front effect unit 3300, back bottom front effect unit 3400, back top back effect unit 3500, back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. can be appropriately used to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. Thus, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type performance of operating the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. to notify the player to that effect.

[8. Second Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173 and the like. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate. FIG. 169(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 169(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. be. Figure 170(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and the ball guide unit in the right half of the center accessory shown in Figure 169 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 171(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 169, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 172(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Seuss line in FIG. 171, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sese line in FIG. 171, and (c) is a saw in FIG. 171 is a cross-sectional view taken along line s, and (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line tarter in FIG. 171. FIG. 173(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guide unit in FIG. 171 and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 173(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guide unit in FIG. 171 and viewed from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and part of the front unit 2000. FIG. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration are omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general prize winning openings 2001 are provided. In addition, in the game board 5A, instead of the gate 2002, the second start opening 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008. A second starting port 2005 is opened and closed according to the lottery result of the normal symbol lottered by receiving the ball B. Furthermore, in the game board 5A, instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided.

Due to the above differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting opening sensor, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 of the game board 5 It has been replaced with a normal winning mouth sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming part 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker part 2560, and is a ball that can guide the game ball B that has flowed through the right guide path group 2540. It has a guide unit 2580 and a flat center right front plate 2590 extending vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker part 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guide unit 2580. .

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating a vertically elongated rectangular flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and an opening portion 2553 below the opening portion 2553. It has a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b through which the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 flows.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape that extends downward from the entrance, extends rightward, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open in front and closed by the center right front plate 2590. As shown in FIG. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are located substantially in the vertical center of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5A.

Between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, a space is formed in which the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the .

Right above the first sub-out port 2021, the lower right second passage 2550b opens downward. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the lower right second passage 2550b has a higher probability of being received by the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. Since the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 flows through this lower right second passage 2550b, In order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B, the player can be made to positively perform the hitting operation of entering the game ball B into the right first guide passage 2541 . Therefore, when striking to the right, hitting hard makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the impinging portion 1006, so it is necessary to hit the game ball B with fine adjustment. It is possible to easily perform the driving operation.

[8-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in such a manner that they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guide unit 2580 has a first guide path 2580a that guides the game ball B from the right first guide path 2541 and a second guide path 2580b that guides the game ball B from the right second guide path 2542. are doing. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while rocking it in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an inlet opening forward near the upper end, and an outlet opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance opening forward at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and an exit opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end.

The sphere guide unit 2580 includes a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a that opens to the right, and a second guide that is attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and opens to the right. It is composed of a right passage member 2582 provided with a passage 2580b and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582 . The sphere guiding unit 2580 is made transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2581a that extends in the front-rear direction and up-and-down direction. , and has a plurality of inclined portions 2581b spaced apart in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals that allow the game ball B to flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides in the upper and lower directions are alternately different. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b with a gap that allows the game ball B to flow. is provided.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 includes standing wall portions 2581c extending upward from the upper end portions of the inclined portions 2581b, and extending upward from the upper end of the standing wall portions 2581c to the upper inclined portion 2581b. and a protruding top wall portion 2581d.
The ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2581b above the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c rises. In addition, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b of the upper inclined portion 2581b, and forms a gap between the upper inclined portion 2581b and the upper inclined portion 2581b. .

Further, the left passage member 2581 includes a plurality of first projecting portions 2581e projecting rightward from portions between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a, and the inclined portion 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a. and a plurality of first protruding pieces 2581f protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first protruding portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2581b and having a triangular shape with a tapered tip. It is The first protrusion 2581f extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and has an upper end inclined downward to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the upper end extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. . In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is located rearward from the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 includes a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that opens to the right, and a plurality of second guide passages 2582a that protrude leftward from the leftward surface of the side wall portion 2582a. It has one protrusion 2582b. When the ball guide unit 2580 is assembled, the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided two by two in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e interposed therebetween. The upstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e of the first projecting portion 2582b projects to the left in a triangular shape, and the downstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e has an inclined edge on the upstream side and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2581c. It protrudes to the left in a protruding trapezoidal shape.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 protrudes rightward from the rightward facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, and is provided with a gap in the vertical direction. It has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c that are aligned. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals that allow the game balls B to flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides in the upper and lower directions are alternately different. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2582c are arranged such that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c with a gap that allows the game ball B to flow. is provided.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 includes standing wall portions 2582d extending upward from the upper end portions of the inclined portions 2582c and extending upward from the upper end of the standing wall portions 2582d to the upper inclined portion 2582c. and a protruding top wall portion 2582e.
The ceiling wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2582c above the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d rises. In addition, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the further upper inclined portion 2582c of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2582c. .

Further, the right passage member 2582 includes a plurality of second projecting portions 2582f projecting rightward from portions between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c of the side wall portion 2582a, and the inclined portion 2582c of the side wall portion 2581a. and a plurality of second protruding pieces 2582g protruding rightward from a portion between the lower end and the standing wall portion 2582d. The second protruding piece 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2582c in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c, and has a triangular shape with a tapered tip. formed. The second protruding piece 2582g extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and has an upper end inclined downward to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined such that the rear end is lowered, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is positioned rearward from the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. are doing. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper ends of the standing wall portions 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 includes a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that opens to the right, and a plurality of second guide passages 2583a that protrude leftward from the leftward surface of the side wall portion 2583a. It has two protrusions 2583b. When the ball guide unit 2580 is assembled, the plurality of second projections 2583b are provided two by two in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second projections 2582f therebetween. The second protruding portion 2583b protrudes leftward in a triangular shape on the upstream side of the second protruding portion 2582f, and the downstream side of the second protruding portion 2582f has an inclined upstream edge and extends downstream to the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 2582d. It protrudes to the left in a protruding trapezoidal shape.

In the ball guide unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2580a through the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540, it moves backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581. roll towards. A first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left above the inclined portion 2581b, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the first projecting portion 2581e. there is As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the first projecting portion 2582b, then guided rightward by the next first projecting portion 2581e, and further guided leftward again by the next first projecting portion 2582b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the horizontal direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2581b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b onto the lower inclined portion 2581b along the standing wall portion 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the first projecting portion 2582b is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f projecting to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. do. As a result, the game ball B does not fall vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Also above this inclined portion 2581b, a first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the first projecting portion 2581e. there is As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the first projecting portion 2581f on the rear side is guided to the left by the first projecting portion 2582b, and then guided to the right by the next first projecting portion 2581e. Then, it is again guided to the left by the next first projecting portion 2582b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, it is guided to the right by the first projecting piece portion 2581f on the front side and further flows down on the inclined portion 2581b on the lower side, and the outlet of the first guide passage 2580a. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

Further, in the ball guide unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2580b through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540, it is pushed backward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582. Roll. Also in this second guide path 2580b, similarly to the first guide path 2580a, the game ball B flows down while rocking in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. More specifically, above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, a second projecting portion 2582f projects from the left, and the second projecting portion 2582f of the passage closing plate 2583 protrudes from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the second projecting portion 2582f. Two protrusions 2583b protrude. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b, then guided rightward by the next second projecting portion 2582f, and further guided leftward again by the next second projecting portion 2583b. Then, it rolls while meandering (swinging) in the horizontal direction to the rear end (lower end) of the inclined portion 2582c.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c along the standing wall portion 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided to the left by the previous second projecting portion 2583b is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g projecting to the right and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. do. As a result, the game ball B does not fall vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Above the inclined portion 2582c, a second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the second protrusion 2582f. there is As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second projecting portion 2582g on the rear side is guided to the left by the second projecting portion 2583b, and then guided to the right by the next second projecting portion 2582f. Then, it is again guided to the left by the next second projecting portion 2583b and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the left-right direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided to the right by the second projecting piece portion 2582g on the front side and further flows down on the inclined portion 2582c on the lower side, and the outlet of the second guide passage 2580b. Until then, the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated.

As described above, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide passage group 2540 is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, and then released downward. Therefore, compared with the case where the game ball B is made to flow down vertically or through a spiral passage, the staying time (flowing time) of the game ball B at the same height is lengthened. can be done. As a result, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is relatively slowed down, the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. can.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is caused to flow down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, compared to the case where the game ball B flows down through a spiral passage, moves in a complicated manner, the player can be entertained by the motion of the game ball B which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guide unit 2580, since the left side faces the frame of the center role 2500, by looking through the frame of the center role 2500, the game ball B moves forward and backward in the ball guide unit 2580. The circulation of meandering balls can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the movement of the game balls B can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described above. In detail, for example, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, " Lottery for "small hit"), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker part 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be received (for example, , Small Win Rush), the player drives the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big winning hole 2007 at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted. It will be done. At this time, even if the player attempts to hit the game ball B at that timing, since the ball guiding unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second big winning hole 2007, It is possible to make the timing of hitting the game ball B difficult. As a result, a degree of difficulty can be imparted to the hitting operation of the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guide unit 2580, gaps are formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the ceiling wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the ceiling wall portion 2582e. When ball clogging occurs inside the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

Further, according to the ball guide unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. , compared to the case of forming a passage using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the passage of the game ball B is not deformed (deformation of the obstacle nail N), and the game ball B is guided in a stable state. can do.

[8-2. Center right front panel]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape, and the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to cover the front from near the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker part 2560. is attached to the front end of the right outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 in . The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower portion, a plurality of first storage portions 2590a penetrating in the front-rear direction and each accommodating the head portion of a plurality of obstructing nails N, and a plurality of first accommodating portions 2590a penetrating in the front-rear direction to accommodate the heads of one obstructing nail N. It has a second accommodation portion 2590b in which the head is accommodated, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating back and forth.

In the first accommodation portion 2590a and the second accommodation portion 2590b, between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed The heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in 1110 are accommodated.

The first accommodating portion 2590a is arranged to have a constant angle with respect to a peripheral line surrounding and in contact with the heads of a plurality of (not shown, but two or three in this embodiment) obstacle nails N that are accommodated. provided in the shape of an elongated hole forming a gap between the As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstructing nail N. The second accommodation portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. As shown in FIG. The first receiving portion 2590a and the second receiving portion 2590b match the obstructing nails N implanted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, respectively. provided in the part.

As a result, since it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N housed in the first housing portion 2590a and the second housing portion 2590b, the impact due to the circulation (abutment) of the game ball B is reduced. It is possible to suppress deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to external impact or the like, and it is possible to reduce the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. The ball B can be distributed in a stable state, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, as described above, deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodation portion 2590a and the second accommodation portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the game hall side. The labor required for maintenance of the obstacle nail N can be reduced.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in a mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, a rod-shaped member such as a wire is inserted into the peeling hole 2590c from the rear side while the sticker is attached. A part of the seal can be rolled up forward from the center right front plate 2590 by pressing the seal forward from the rear side with the rod-shaped member. The seal can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by an operator pulling the curled portion of the seal. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the seal during manufacturing and sorting during disposal.

Since this peeling hole 2590c is provided at the portion of the mounting boss, if a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the peeling hole 2590c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the portion through which the game balls B circulate, Also, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw, it is possible to avoid the insertion of an illegal tool, and to prevent the fraudulent act.

If a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the sticker can make it difficult to see the peeling hole 2590c from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and to make it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

In addition, if a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, when assembled on the game board 5, the seal attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 allows the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion 2590a to be attached. Since the front side of the portion 2590b can be closed, the obstructing nail N whose head is stored in the first storage portion 2590a or the second storage portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. In addition, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 2590a and the second accommodating portion 2590b is bent through the sticker, the trace remains on the sticker. It is possible to make it easier to notice the failure of the obstructing nail N.

[9. Third Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. 175(a) is a front perspective view of the game board in FIG. 174 in which the front component, the game panel, and the panel decoration substrate are assembled, and (b) is the front component in the game board in FIG. 1 is a rear perspective view of the assembly of the game panel and the panel decoration substrate. FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member, the game panel, and the panel decoration substrate in the game board of FIG. 174, viewed from the front, and FIG. , and a disassembled perspective view of the panel decoration substrate as seen from the rear. In FIG. 174, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is shaded.

In the game board 5B of the third embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made opaque with a translucent white system, and a predetermined pattern (not shown) is applied to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. The configuration is the same as that of the game board 5 of the first embodiment except that the front sheet 1130 is attached, and the panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A. A detailed description of the structural parts is omitted.

The game board 5B includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100, a front sheet 1130 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a flat panel decoration having a plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of irradiating the game panel 1100 with light from behind are mounted on the front. a substrate 1140;

The front component 1000 is the same as the front component 1000 of the game board 5 of the first embodiment. This front component 1000 is made transparent.

The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110A whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110A. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. The panel plate 1110A of the present embodiment is formed in an opaque white system having translucency. Moreover, the panel holder 1120 is formed transparent.

[9-1. Game panel of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the game panel 1100 on the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. The game panel 1100 of the game board 5B includes a panel plate 1110A having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and having translucency, and a panel plate 1110A having a translucency. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of 1110A and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The thickness of the panel plate 1110A is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that

The panel plate 1110A is located at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the portion corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. A plurality of openings 1112 for mounting the front unit 2000 are formed through the panel plate 1110A in the front-rear direction.

Since the panel plate 1110A is milky white and opaque, as shown in FIG. The parts cannot be visually recognized from the front (player's side).

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is a translucent white opaque material, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201, the top front decoration 3310, and the front bottom back decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear side. When the decorative body such as 3410 is made to emit light, the light from the rear is transmitted through the panel plate 1110A so that the player can visually recognize the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body, and the luminous color of the decorative body is transmitted as it is. This allows the player to see a richly colored light emitting effect.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 is formed transparently, the portion of the panel plate 1110A that overlaps the front structural member 1000 in the front-rear direction can be visually recognized from the front through the front structural member 1000 (see FIG. 174). reference).

In addition, the panel plate 1110A has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in the form of circular holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction, respectively, and the plate thickness is formed thin. and a plurality of engagement shoulders 1114 (see FIG. 176). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the projecting pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion 1114 is engaged with the engaging claw 1125 and the engaging piece 1126 of the panel holder 1120 to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 .

The panel plate 1110A has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset upward from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the left side except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

In addition to the opening 1112 and the positioning hole 1113, the panel plate 1110A has nail holes (not shown) for implanting the obstructing nails N, and screw holes for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500. A plurality of 1116, positioning holes 1117, etc. are formed. The nail holes, screw holes 1116, and positioning holes 1117 penetrate the panel plate 1110A and the front sheet 1130 in the front-rear direction.

More specifically, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment includes a translucent main portion 1151 and a translucent specific portion 1152 having a light transmittance different from that of the main portion 1151. have. In the panel plate 1110A, the main body part 1151 and the specific part 1152 are integrally formed from the same material, and by making the thickness thinner than the main body part 1151, the light transmittance of the specific part 1152 is made different. there is

The identifying portion 1152 is provided behind a characteristic portion of the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130 . The specific portion 1152 is formed of a blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 that is cylindrically concave from the rear surface of the main portion 1151 toward the front. , the rear surface is positioned forward of the rear surface of the main body 1151 (see FIG. 178).

A plurality of identifying portions 1152 of this embodiment are provided in a portion of the guidance area 2710 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the game panel 1100A is arranged. More specifically, it is provided at the portion of the first guiding region 2711 in the guiding region 2710 . Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are caused to emit light, it is possible to cause the rear side of the guidance region 2710 to emit light, and the plurality of specific portions 1152 to make the first guidance region 2711 bright.

The thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the range of 10% to 80% of the thickness of the main portion 1151 . The reason why the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is within the above range is that if the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is thinner than the above range, the strength of the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is reduced. This is because there is a risk that the identification portion 1152 may become uneven due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, or may be damaged due to circulation or collision of the game ball B. Further, when the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is greater than the above range, the light transmittance approaches the light transmittance of the main portion 1151, so even if the rear LED 1141 emits light, the brightness is the same as that of the main portion 1151. This is because there is a possibility that the effect of the light emission effect by the specifying unit 1152 cannot be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, the identification part 1152 is provided avoiding the obstacle nail N in the panel board 1110A. In other words, the identifying portion 1152 is provided at a portion where the obstructing nail N is not implanted. It is desirable that the identifying portion 1152 be provided at a site some distance (for example, 1 mm or more) from the site where the obstructing nail N is implanted. Accordingly, since the specific portion 1152 having a thickness thinner than the main portion 1151 is provided to avoid the portion where the obstructing nail N is implanted, the portion around the root of the obstructing nail N in the main portion 1151 becomes thinner. By making the depth of the base of the obstacle nail N relatively shallow, the reduction in the holding strength of the obstacle nail N can be avoided.

The panel plate 1110A of the present embodiment is made of milky white high impact polystyrene (HIPS). This HIPS is significantly cheaper than the acrylic resin generally used for transparent game boards. Further, in the present embodiment, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is set to 20% of the thickness of the main body portion 1151, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152 is set to 100% of the thickness of the main body portion 1151. 40% of the height. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, since the thickness of the main body portion 1151 is 10 mm, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is 2 mm, and the diameter of the blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 is 4 mm.

It is desirable that the opaque material having translucency in the panel plate 1110A should have a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to decorate with light with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. On the other hand, if the haze value is lower than this, the shapes and decorations of the members provided on the rear side become easily recognizable, and there is a possibility that the presentation effect by concealment cannot be obtained sufficiently.

In addition, the panel plate 1110A is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)) as a white system. 9.2/0.5)”, “Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)”, “Ivory color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)”, “Lead white Munsell value (N 9)”, “Oyster White Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)”, “Greyish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)”, “White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)”, “ Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)”, “Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)”, “Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)”, A white color such as "cherry color Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)" may be used.

Furthermore, the panel plate 1110A is made of high-impact polystyrene (HIPS). It may be made of polyethylene, polypropylene, glass, or the like. Also, the panel plate 1110A is made white based on the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), but it may be made white by adding a coloring agent to the transparent material.

In this panel plate 1110A, the opening 1112, the positioning hole 1113, and the like are formed by cutting while the front sheet 1130 is attached to the front surface of the flat base material. More specifically, the panel plate 1110A is formed by first attaching the front sheet 1130 to one surface of a flat base material. Subsequently, using an NC router processing machine or the like, the through positioning holes 1113 and 1117 and the screw holes 1116 are formed from the surface side (surface side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is attached. , an engaging stepped portion 1114 recessed from the front side, and the like are processed. Next, the opening 1112 and the specific portion 1152 are processed from the side (rear side) to which the front sheet 1130 of the base material is not attached. Finally, the panel board 1110A is completed by processing nail holes (inclined post-nail holes) for implanting the obstructing nails N from the surface side. After that, an implanter is used to implant the obstructing nail N into the nail hole.

By the way, when cutting is performed using an end mill or the like by an NC router processing machine or the like, since cutting chips are discharged to the base end side of the end mill, the tip side of the end mill to the base end side of the object to be cut A force acts in the direction of Therefore, when cutting is performed with an end mill from the surface side to which the front sheet 1130 is attached, cutting chips are discharged to the side opposite to the base material (panel plate 1110A) of the front sheet 1130, and a force acts on the front sheet 1130. As a result, the front sheet 1130 is easily rolled up from the base material, and burrs are likely to occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the penetrating opening 1112 is cut from the back surface side by an end mill, cutting chips are discharged to the base material side of the front sheet 1130 and a force acts on the front sheet 1130. However, since a force acts on the front sheet 1130 in a direction in which it adheres to the base material, the front sheet 1130 becomes difficult to peel off, and the shearing force on the front sheet 1130 becomes stronger, so that burrs are formed on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130. It can be made difficult to generate, and the appearance can be improved.

Since the specific portion 1152 is machined at the timing of machining the opening 1112, there is no need to change the setup of the base material for machining the specific portion 1152, and the machining time is slightly increased. can process the identification portion 1152, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

By the way, in cutting (drilling) circular through holes such as a part of the positioning holes 1113, nail holes, screw holes 1116, and positioning holes 1117, a drill is used. If the back surface side of 1130 to which 1130 is not affixed is cut with a drill, a strong force acts on front sheet 1130 in the direction opposite to the base material when the hole is penetrated. It is easy for the surrounding area to be rolled up from the base material and burrs to occur on the cut end surface. On the other hand, in this embodiment, part of the positioning holes 1113, nail holes, screw holes 1116, positioning holes 1117, etc. are cut (drilled) from the surface side. It is possible to make it difficult for burrs to occur on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, and to improve the appearance.

Although the positioning hole 1113 and the engaging stepped portion 1114 are processed from the surface side, they are positioned outside the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5B, and are visually recognized from the player side. Therefore, even if some burrs are generated on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the appearance does not deteriorate. In addition, since obstructing nails N, screws, etc., are inserted from the surface side into the nail holes and screw holes 1116, even if burrs are formed on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130, the burrs are not obstructing nails N, screws, etc. As a result, it is pushed into the hole, and the appearance does not deteriorate. In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is opaque, even if the burr on the cut end surface of the front sheet 1130 is pushed into the hole, the opaque panel plate 1110A can make it invisible from the outside, improving the appearance. can be done.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110A, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110A (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion 1127 (see FIG. 176) which is approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110A and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding stepped portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to penetrate the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. The out recess 1123 has an upper portion communicating with the out port 1008 (see FIGS. 175(b) and 177).

The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins 1124 projecting forward from the holding stepped portion 1127 and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110A, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion 1127. A plurality of engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110A, and a holding stepped portion 1127 protruding upward from the lower outer side of the panel. A pair of engaging pieces 1126 that engage with the two engaging stepped portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided.

The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement stepped portion 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110A with the engagement piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left corners of the panel plate 1110A. By elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110A can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion 1127. FIG. At this time, the protruding pins 1124 of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110A with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a provided in front thereof is made opaque with a white color. is white. Therefore, compared with the case of using plywood for the game panel, the end face of the opening 1112 can be made less conspicuous, the end face can be beautifully finished, the end face can be decorated, and the center accessory attached to the opening 1112 can be used. There is no need to hide the end face with 2500 or the like, and the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced. Also, even if the center accessory 2500 or the like attached to the opening 1112 is made of a transparent material, the end face of the opening 1112 is not conspicuous, so the center accessory 2500 or the like can be made of a transparent material.

Also, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white-based opaque, a white decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided on the end surface of the opening 1112 to which the center accessory 2500 is attached. , the decorative substrate can be made to appear to be integrated with the end surface of the opening 1112, making the decorative substrate inconspicuous. It can be made to emit light, or the center side of the center accessory 2500 can be made to emit light.

[9-2. Front sheet of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the front sheet 1130 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be explained. The front sheet 1130 is attached to the entire front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 178, etc.). The front sheet 1130 is formed of a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm and excellent abrasion resistance. Although illustration is omitted, the front sheet 1130 has a predetermined pattern printed thereon. The front sheet 1130 is formed so that the LED 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light so that a part of the pattern shines brightly through the panel plate 1110A.

Although illustration is omitted, the pattern of the front sheet 1130 has a characteristic portion, and the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is provided behind the characteristic portion. As a result, the characteristic parts of the pattern can be made to shine brighter than the other parts via the specifying part 1152 .

Note that the (pattern of) front sheet 1130 may have a transparent portion, an opaque translucent portion, or an opaque portion. can be For example, in the front sheet 1130, by surrounding the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 with non-translucent (low translucent) portions, the visual contrast can be increased. You can make the parts corresponding to it shine brighter.

Materials for the front sheet 1130 in this embodiment include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

The front sheet 1130 is cut together with the base material of the panel plate 1110A before processing while being attached to the base material.

According to the front sheet 1130 of the present embodiment, since it is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material with low wear resistance as the material of the panel plate 1110A, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[9-3. Panel decoration board of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the panel decoration substrate 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. The panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided behind the portion of the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged, that is, the portion where the guide area 2710 is provided in front. The panel decoration substrate 1140 has white solder resist applied to its front and rear surfaces, and has white front and rear surfaces. A plurality of LEDs 1141 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 . The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151. As shown in FIG.

The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are high-intensity full-color LEDs. The first LED 1141a positioned behind the identification portion 1152 may be a narrow-angle LED with a narrow irradiation range, and the second LED 1141b positioned behind the main body portion 1151 may be a wide-angle LED with a wide irradiation range. .

Although illustration is omitted, a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing the plurality of LEDs 1141 to emit light, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 .

When the second LED 1141b of the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light, the portion behind the second guide region 2712 in the main body 1151 of the panel plate 1110A can brightly emit light, and when the first LED 1141a emits light, the panel plate 1110A , can be caused to emit light through the specifying portion 1152 so as to shine brighter than the second guidance region 2712 .

[9-4. Light emitting effect by the game panel and the panel decoration board of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, the lighting effect by the game panel 1100 and the panel decoration board 1140 in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 schematically shows the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration board, and (a1) of (a) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LEDs of the panel decoration board turned off, (a2) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of (a1), (b1) of (b) is an explanatory view seen from the front with the LED of the panel decoration substrate turned on, and (b2) is ( It is explanatory drawing which shows b1) in a cross section. In FIG. 178, for the sake of convenience, the color of the white (milky white) material of the panel plate 1110A is dark gray, the amount of light is indicated by shading, and the pattern of the front sheet 1130 is omitted.

In the game board 5B of the present embodiment, a translucent front sheet 1130 is affixed to the front of a translucent white (here, milky white) opaque panel plate 1110A, and a panel plate A panel decoration substrate 1140 having a plurality of LEDs 1141 mounted on its front surface is provided behind 1110A. The panel plate 1110A is composed of a main portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a plurality of specific portions 1152 thinner than the main portion 1151 . The specific portion 1152 is formed by machining a recess 1115 in the shape of a blind hole in the main portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) so as to recess forward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. Therefore, the front surface of the identification portion 1152 is flush with the front surface of the main portion 1151 .

The panel decoration substrate 1140 is coated with a white solder resist on the front and rear surfaces. The plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are composed of a second LED 1141b located behind the main portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A and a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152.

In this game board 5B, in a normal state in which the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are not illuminated, as shown in FIG. As a result, the identification portion 1152 and the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind are invisible to the players in the front.

Since the entire interior of the panel plate 1110A is uniformly opaque, the amount of light incident from the rear surface attenuates (decreases) as it travels forward. In the panel plate 1110A, the main portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 are made of the same opaque material, and the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is different from the thickness of the main portion 1151. 1152, the amount of attenuation of the amount of light incident from the rear surface until it is emitted forward from the front surface is different, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 and the light transmittance of the main portion 1151 are different.

From this normal state, when the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are caused to emit light according to the progress of the game, the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1141 is projected onto the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A (the main portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152). The light is irradiated and enters the translucent interior.

The light emitted forward from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear of the thick main body 1151 spreads in a truncated cone shape and enters the main body 1151 from the rear surface. As it spreads, the amount of light is attenuated relatively greatly by the opaque material (see (b2) in FIG. 178(b)). As a result, the portion in front of the second LED 1141b on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a relatively large diameter and emits light brighter than the other portions (( b1)).

On the other hand, the light emitted forward from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152, which is thinner than the main body portion 1151, spreads in a truncated cone shape and is applied to the rear surface of the specific portion 1152. However, the light spreading from the first LED 1141a is irregularly reflected on the inner surface of the concave portion 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is irradiated with the spread suppressed. Therefore, in the identifying portion 1152, the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is illuminated even though the distance from the rear surface to the LED 1141 (first LED 1141a) is longer than the distance from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151 to the LED 1141 (second LED 1141b). The amount of light applied to the main body 1151 is almost the same as the amount of light applied to the rear surface of the main body 1151 .

The light entering from the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is attenuated (decreased) as it goes forward. The spread range is narrow, and attenuation of the amount of light due to the opaque material is relatively small (see (b2) in FIG. 178(b)). As a result, the portion in front of the first LED 1141a (specific portion 1152) on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) has a circular shape with a smaller diameter than the portion in front of the second LED 1141b. Light is emitted so as to shine brighter than the part (see (b1) in FIG. 178(b)). In this embodiment, the specific portion 1152 emits light with the same brightness as when the panel plate 1110A is made transparent.

For this reason, in the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, the specific portion 1152 is provided behind the characteristic part of the pattern, thereby making the panel decoration substrate. By the light emission of the first LED 1141a of 1140, the player can see the light emission effect in which the characteristic part of the pattern shines brightly. As a result, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to attract the player by brightly shining the characteristic part of the pattern. To suggest the arrival of a chance, to make a player think that something good will happen, to heighten the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline of interest. can be done.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is applied as a pattern on the front sheet 1130, and the specific portion 1152 is provided behind the character's characteristic parts (eg, eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). When light is emitted forward from the first LED 1141a behind the specifying part 1152, the specifying part 1152 can make the character's characteristic part shine brightly, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, to make the player think that something good is happening, to heighten the expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest. can be made

According to the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, which is provided with the game area 5a in front of which the game balls B circulate and on which the front sheet 1130 having a predetermined pattern is attached to the front, is transparent. and a specific portion 1152 which has a higher light transmittance than the main portion 1151 and is provided at a portion corresponding to the design of the front sheet 1130, thereby making it easier to play the game. Accordingly, when the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body portion 1151 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light, the light from the second LED 1141b diffuses within the main body portion 1151 to brightly light the pattern of the front sheet 1130. can make it look as if it is emitting light by itself. Therefore, the part corresponding to the specific part 1152 in the pattern can be made brighter than other parts, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. Therefore, as compared with conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or a transparent board as the game panel 1100, the design of the front sheet 1130 shines and the inside of the game area 5a becomes various, which has never been seen before. Since the pachinko machine 1 self-luminous with brightness can be shown to the player, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player can be provided. Since a part of the pattern shines brightly, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player's game can be improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

[9-5. Specific part different from the embodiment in the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, another embodiment of the identification portion 1152 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) in the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181. FIG. FIG. 179(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of a part of a game panel provided with a specifying portion having a form different from that of FIG. 178, and FIG. (c) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of a game panel provided with a specific part of a different form. FIG. 180(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel provided with specific portions having different thicknesses together with a panel decoration substrate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a specific portion having a conical rear surface. FIG. 2C is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the game panel together with the panel decoration substrate, and FIG. and (d) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a game panel provided with a specific portion having a blind hole-shaped concave portion provided with a light-shielding sleeve, together with a panel decoration substrate. FIG. 181(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game panel provided with a specific portion formed by a groove-shaped concave portion together with a panel decoration substrate, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a substrate accommodating concave portion for accommodating the panel decoration substrate. FIG. 2C is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a game panel together with a panel decoration substrate, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section together with the board, and (d) shows a cross section of the game panel in which a specific part filled with a transparent material is provided in a blind hole-shaped recess from the front surface of the game panel together with the panel decoration board. It is a diagram.

First, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 179(a), a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) has a specific portion 1152 formed by a recess 1115 formed in a main portion 1151 in the form of a triangular prism-like blind hole. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape in front view) of the identifying portion 1152 is triangular. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side is illuminated, the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A can be illuminated brightly in a triangular shape.

179(b), the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) has a specific portion 1152 formed by a recessed portion 1115 of a star-shaped blind hole formed in the main portion 1151. FIG. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape in front view) of the identifying portion 1152 is star-shaped. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side emits light, the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A can emit light so as to shine brightly in a star shape.

In the embodiment of FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b), the shape of the rear surface of the identifying portion 1152 is shown as triangular or star-shaped, but the shape is not limited to this, and can be "elliptical" or "quadrilateral". , “pentagon”, “hexagon”, “polygon”, “heart shape”, “indefinite shape”, “predetermined character or item shape”, “character shape such as logo”, and the like.

Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), a specific portion 1152 is formed by a recess 1115 formed in the main portion 1151 in the shape of a hexagonal tubular blind hole. In other words, the specific portion 1152 is formed by the groove-shaped concave portion 1115 of a constant width extending along the outer periphery of the hexagon. In this embodiment, the rear surface (shape in front view) of the identifying portion 1152 is an annular hexagon. As a result, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided on the rear side emits light, the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A can emit light so as to shine brightly in a ring-shaped hexagon. One first LED 1141 a may be provided for one identification portion 1152 (recess 1115 ), or a plurality of first LEDs 1141 a may be provided depending on the size and shape of the identification portion 1152 .

In the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shown as a ring-shaped hexagon, but it is not limited to this, and can be "annular circular" or "annular elliptical". , "annular triangle", "annular quadrilateral", "annular pentagon", "annular polygon", "annular star", "annular heart", "annular indeterminate", "predetermined It may be the shape of the outer circumference of a character or item, the shape of the outer circumference of a character such as a logo, or the like.

Also, in the embodiment of FIG. 179(c), the specific portion 1152 is formed by annularly extending a groove with a constant width, but the specific portion 1152 is not limited to this, and may extend linearly or curvedly. The specified portion 1152 may be formed by the protruding groove.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 179, since the specific portion 1152 has various shapes, the front surface of the game panel 1100 (front sheet 1130) is illuminated by causing the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration board 1140 to emit light according to the progress of the game. The front portion of the specific portion 1152 in , can be made to shine brightly with the same shape as the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 . As a result, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to think that something good is about to happen. , it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Specifically, for example, the front sheet 1130 is provided with a pattern of a predetermined character, and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is provided with grooves along the outer periphery of the character to form the specifying portion 1152, and the rear panel When the first LED 1141a of the decoration board 1140 is illuminated, the outer periphery of the character can be brightly illuminated, and the player can be shown a light emission effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 180(a), the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made different in one panel plate 1110A. As a result, the thicker the specifying portion 1152, the lower the light transmittance. Therefore, even if the first LED 1141a provided at the rear side emits light with the same brightness, the thicker the specifying portion 1152, the lower the brightness of the front surface of the specifying portion 1152. Get dark. Therefore, since the front surface of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) emits light with various brightnesses, it is possible to show the player a more colorful lighting effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. .

Further, when forming the specific portion 1152 by cutting, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed only by changing the cutting program. Alternatively, when the specific portion 1152 (game panel 1100) is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed by simply changing the amount of protrusion of the core pin or mandrel for forming the specific portion 1152. can be done. Therefore, since the thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed, design changes and model changes can be easily dealt with, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to easily provide the specifying unit 1152 with a higher performance effect, so that the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the players can be provided.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180(b), the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is formed into a conical shape with the thinnest point at the center. As a result, since the center of the specific portion 1152 is the thinnest, when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 is illuminated, the center of the panel plate 1110A in front of the specific portion 1152 is illuminated most brightly. can be shown to the player.

In addition, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, compared with the case where the thickness of the specific portion 1152 is made thin as a whole, the decrease in the strength of the panel plate 1110A due to the formation of the concave portion 1115 is suppressed. be able to. This makes it possible to make the specific portion 1152 shine brighter while maintaining the strength of the panel plate 1110A. Further, since the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is conical, it can be easily processed with a drill having a conical tip, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the embodiment of FIG. 180(b), the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 has a conical shape with the center positioned forward, but this is not a limitation, and the conical shape with the center positioned rearward is shown. It may have a shape, and it can be made to shine in an annular shape by the light from the first LED 1141a.

Further, the back surface of the identifying portion 1152 may be “pyramidal”, “relief shaped to imitate characters, items, logos, etc.”, “geometric pattern”, or the like. If the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is shaped like a relief or a geometric pattern, the thickness of the specific portion 1152 varies according to the shape of the rear surface. Due to the difference, light from the first LED 1141a makes it possible to see light with shading along the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 on the front portion of the specific portion 1152 on the panel plate 1110A, and the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130), it is possible to project a predetermined character, pattern, or the like, and to provide a lighting effect capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In the embodiment of FIG. 180(c), a blind-hole-shaped concave portion 1115 for forming a specific portion 1152 is provided with a light-shielding film 1153 on the side surface thereof. The coating 1153 is formed by applying a highly light-shielding paint or by attaching a highly light-shielding film or metal foil. On the other hand, in the embodiment of FIG. 180(d), a light-shielding sleeve 1154 is provided (inserted) in the recess 1115 in the form of a blind hole. The sleeve 1154 is made of synthetic resin, paper, wood, metal, or the like, which has a high light-shielding property. The sleeve 1154 is attached to the recess 1115 by press fitting or gluing. Alternatively, the sleeve 1154 is provided by insert molding or two-color molding when injection molding the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A).

According to the embodiment of FIGS. 180(c) and (d), when the first LED 1141a of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the identification portion 1152 is illuminated, the identification portion of the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) Since only the part in front of 1152 can be brightly illuminated, the decoration effect and presentation effect by the brilliance of the part can be certainly exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, the side surface of the concave portion 1115 forming the specific portion 1152 is formed by the main portion 1151 having translucency, so that it is provided behind the specific portion 1152. When the side surface of the concave portion 1115 is irradiated with the light from the first LED 1141a that is present, part of the irradiated light enters the main body portion 1151, and the light that enters the main body portion 1151 causes the panel plate 1110A A portion around the specific portion 1152 in the main portion 1151 of the light shines brightly. Therefore, when the periphery of the specific part 1152 in the main part 1151 shines together with the specific part 1152, the shape of the specific part 1152 becomes unclear, and the part of the pattern of the front sheet 1130 that does not correspond to the specific part 1152 emits light. By doing so, there is a risk that the effect of light emission produced by the specifying unit 1152 may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 with high light blocking properties are provided on the side surface of the concave portion 1115 forming the specific portion 1152, light enters the main portion 1151 from the side surface. can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the portion around the specifying portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 from shining due to the light from the first LED 1141a behind the specifying portion 1152, and it is possible to make only the specifying portion 1152 shine brightly. The pachinko machine 1 that can surely exhibit the performance effect by the shine of the specifying part 1152 and is highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Note that the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 may have high light reflectance. As a result, the light from the first LED 1141a is diffusely reflected by the inner surface of the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154, and can be guided forward. More can be directed to the rear surface of the identification portion 1152, making the identification portion 1152 shine brighter.

In the embodiment of FIGS. 180(c) and 180(d), the coating 1153 and the sleeve 1154 are provided on the side surface of the blind hole-shaped concave portion 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152, but it is limited to this. Alternatively, a coating 1153 or a sleeve 1154 may be provided on the side surface of the groove-shaped recess 1115 for forming the specific portion 1152 .

Next, in the embodiment of FIG. 181(a), a second LED 1141b is provided behind the main body portion 1151 between the two specific portions 1152 formed by the groove-shaped recesses 1115. As shown in FIG. As a result, the portion (range a) of the identification portion 1152 can be illuminated brightly by the light emission of the first LED 1141 a provided behind the identification portion 1152 , and the portion (range a) of the identification portion 1152 can be sandwiched between the identification portions 1152 of the main portion 1151 . By the light emission of the second LED 1141b provided behind the part (range b) where the specified part 1152 is located, only the part (range b) sandwiched by the specific part 1152 can be illuminated brightly, and the boundary between the brightness and darkness of the light becomes clear. It is possible to show the light emission effect to the player.

More specifically, in the panel plate 1110A, since the main portion 1151 has translucency, when the light from the second LED 1141b provided at the rear enters the interior from the rear surface of the main portion 1151, the light is also diffused in the direction along the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. is blocked, and the light is not diffused beyond the specific portion 1152 to the main portion 1151 on the opposite side. For this reason, in FIG. 181(a), when the second LED 1141b is lit, only the portion (range b) sandwiched between the specifying portions 1152 can be brightly illuminated, and the area outside the specifying portion 1152 can be illuminated brightly. Areas can be darkened.

Therefore, for example, if a specific portion 1152 formed by a groove is provided along the outer circumference of a characteristic character or the like in the pattern of the front sheet 1130, the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the character can be formed. With the light from the second LED 1141b, it is possible to make only the character emit bright light while keeping the part outside the character dark, and with the light from the first LED 1141a provided behind the specifying part 1152, the outer circumference of the character can be illuminated. can shine. As a result, the character can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be shown to the player and amuse the player.

In the embodiment of FIG. 181(b), a substrate accommodating recess 1155 recessed forward is provided on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), and the panel decoration substrate 1140 is accommodated in the substrate accommodating recess 1155. It is what I did. As a result, the rear surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 can be positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A, so that the space behind the panel plate 1110A can be easily secured, and the decoration body of the back unit 3000 can be easily secured. The pachinko machine 1 can present a performance with a higher performance effect by relatively increasing .

Further, by housing the panel decoration substrate 1140 in the substrate housing recess 1155, the first LED 1141a provided behind the identification portion 1152 can be brought closer to the rear surface of the identification portion 1152, so that the identification portion 1152 can be more easily moved. can shine brightly.

The embodiment of FIGS. 181(c) and (d) fills recesses 1115 such as blind holes or grooves for forming identification portions 1152 with transparent filling portions 1156 . The filling portion 1156 may be formed by pressing or bonding the filling portion 1156 having the same shape as the recess 1115 after forming the specific portion 1152 with the recess 1115 . Alternatively, when injection molding the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A), the filling portion 1156 may be provided by insert molding or two-color molding. According to this embodiment, the filling portion 1156 allows the panel plate 1110A to have a constant thickness, and compared to the case where the hollow recess 1115 is formed, the reduction in the strength and rigidity of the panel plate 1110A can be prevented. can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 181(d), the front surface of the identification portion 1152 is located behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the identification portion 1152 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. A filling portion 1156 is filled in a concave portion 1115 such as a blind hole or a groove in front of the specific portion 1152 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are flush with each other. As a result, the surface of the panel plate 1110A can be a flat surface without irregularities, and the front sheet 1130 can be adhered to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A in a good state, and the surface through which the game balls B circulate. can be a flat surface.

In addition, in the panel plate 1110A, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 may be positioned behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 may be positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A. In other words, the specific portion 1152 thinner than the main portion 1151 may be provided at an intermediate portion in the thickness of the panel plate 1110A (main portion 1151). In this case, it is desirable to fill at least a portion in front of the specific portion 1152 with the filling portion 1156 so that the front surface of the filling portion 1156 and the front surface of the panel plate 1110A are flush with each other. As a result, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be flattened, and the front sheet 1130 can be adhered in a favorable state without floating.

[9-6. Game panel with a different embodiment on the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, in the game board 5B of the third embodiment, the game panel 1100A having a different embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 182(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the game panel and the panel decoration substrate whose board thickness is changing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a different relationship from (a). FIG. 182 shows a portion where the board thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed. The game panel 1100A of this embodiment has a main body portion 1151 having a predetermined thickness and a specific portion 1152 which is thinner than the main body portion 1151 and has an increased light transmittance. Behind the game panel 1100A, a first LED 1141a positioned behind the identification portion 1152 and a second LED 1141b positioned behind the main portion 1151 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 182) are mounted on the front. A panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided.

In the game panel 1100A of this embodiment, the portion where the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted (for example, the portion where the game area 5a is provided in front) is made thicker, and the other portions are made thinner. ing. As a result, the weight of the game panel 1100A can be reduced while maintaining the holding strength of the obstacle nail N. In addition, by forming the game panel 1100A of the present embodiment by injection molding, the amount of synthetic resin applied to the game panel 1100A can be reduced compared to the case where the whole is formed with a constant thickness. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(a), the panel decoration substrate 1140 extends to the rear of the portion where the plate thickness of the game panel 1100A is changed, and behind the portion where the plate thickness is changed, He is trying to provide LED1141c which can irradiate light to the front. As a result, when the LED 1141c emits light, the front portion of the game panel 1100A ahead of the portion where the plate thickness is changed emits light so that it becomes brighter toward the left in the plane of the drawing. That is, by the light from the LED 1141c, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be ring-shaped so that it becomes brighter toward the outside. For this reason, in this embodiment, the portion of the game panel 1100A where the plate thickness is changed is one type of the identification portion 1152 .

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(a), the portion where the plate thickness is changed is the peripheral portion of the game area 5a, but it is not limited to this. The plate thickness may be changed by slanting the end surface of the opening 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the LED 1141c may be provided behind it.

In the embodiment of FIG. 182(b), the portion where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes in the direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100A outside the portion where the thickness of the game panel 1100A changes. A second panel decoration substrate 1145 is provided on which an LED 1146 capable of irradiating light is mounted. As a result, when the LED 1146 emits light, light is emitted along the front surface of the game panel 1100A to the portion where the plate thickness is changed, and the light incident on the inside of the game panel 1100A from this portion is emitted. By diffusing, the part in front of the part where the plate thickness is changed in the game panel 1100A and the part inside thereof can be illuminated darker than in the embodiment of FIG. 182(a). Therefore, for example, when the portion where the plate thickness is changed is the periphery of the game area 5a, the light from the LED 1146 can be circularly emitted from the periphery of the game area 5a to the inside with a constant width.

[9-7. Features of the game board of the third embodiment]
Next, main features of the game board 5B of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177 and the like. As described above, the game board 5B of the third embodiment includes a transparent front structural member 1000, a game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and provided with the game area 5a in front thereof, and a game panel 1100. A front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface and having a predetermined pattern thereon, and a panel decoration substrate 1140 capable of irradiating the game panel 1100 with light from behind are provided.

The game panel 1100 detachably holds the panel plate 1110A, which is a white opaque flat panel plate in which a game area 5a is provided in front and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted, and the panel plate 1110A. and a transparent frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 . The panel plate 1110A has a main portion 1151 having translucency and a specific portion 1152 having a higher light transmittance than the main portion 1151 . The identifying portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is provided behind a characteristic portion of the pattern (not shown) of the front sheet 1130. As shown in FIG.

The panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided at a position between the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A and the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction. The panel decoration substrate 1140 has white surfaces (front and rear surfaces). A plurality of LEDs 1141 capable of emitting light forward are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 . The plurality of LEDs 1141 are composed of a first LED 1141a located behind the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A and a second LED 1141b located behind the main body portion 1151. As shown in FIG.

According to the game board 5B of the present embodiment, according to the progress of the game (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005), When the second LED 1141b provided behind the main body part 1151 of the panel plate 1110A in the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light, the light from the second LED 1141b is diffused within the main body part 1151 to make the pattern of the front sheet 1130 shine brightly. When the first LED 1141a provided behind the identification portion 1152 emits light, the light transmittance is higher than that of the main portion 1151, so the amount of light that travels straight increases, the portion corresponding to the specific portion 1152 in the pattern can be made to shine brighter than the other portions, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. Therefore, compared with the conventional pachinko machine 1 that uses plywood or a transparent board as the game panel, the design of the front sheet 1130 shines, and the inside of the game area 5a that has never been seen before is varied. Since the pachinko machine 1 self-luminous with high brightness can be shown to the player, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player can be provided. , part of the pattern shines brightly, which can suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, so that the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player can It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by increasing the expectation for the game.

Specifically, for example, a predetermined character is applied as a pattern on the front sheet 1130, and the specific portion 1152 is provided behind the character's characteristic parts (eg, eyes, teeth, scars, moles, etc.). When provided, when light is emitted from the rear to the front of the specifying portion 1152, the characteristic parts of the character can be brightly illuminated by the specifying portion 1152, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. To strongly attract a player's interest, to make the player think that something good is going to happen to the player, to heighten expectations for a game, and to suppress a decline in interest. can be done.

In addition, since the front sheet 1130 with a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A and the specific portion 1152 is formed by recessing the panel plate 1110A (the main portion 1151) from the rear, the game can be played. The identification portion 1152 of the panel 1100 is made invisible from the front. As a result, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is irradiated with light by the light emission of the LED 1141 provided on the panel decoration substrate 1140, and the light emitting effect is executed in which the main portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 shine with different brightness. can make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the specifying part 1152, so that the impact of the execution of the light emitting effect (light emitting decoration) on the game panel 1100 can be enhanced and the player can be surprised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game by making the player think that there is something good for the game.

In addition, since the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque, and the specific portion 1152 is not visible from the front, the color of the front surface of the panel plate 1110A becomes uniform white, so that the game area 5a. The inside of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen. Since the color of the front unit 2000) can be relatively conspicuous, the decoration effect of the decoration can be strongly exhibited, and the appealing power that can strongly attract the player's interest is high. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Further, as described above, since the front surface of the panel plate 1110A is uniformly white, the coloring of the pattern applied to the front sheet 1130 can be improved, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably exhibited. be able to.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is white-based and opaque, and the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 are full-color LEDs, by changing the emission color of the LEDs 1141 according to the progress of the game, the main body of the panel plate 1110A can be changed. It is possible to cause the part 1151 and the specific part 1152 to emit light in various colors, so that the player can see the light emission effect of various colors, and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the game, to entertain the player and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made opaque with a white color, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front can be brightened, and the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily seen. In addition, since the color of the decoration of the front unit 2000 provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively conspicuous, the decoration effect of the decoration can be strongly exhibited, and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players. Further, as described above, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white, the design of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface can be improved in color development, and the decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be ensured. can be exhibited.

In addition, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is made thinner than the main portion 1151 so as to have different light transmittances, the main portion 1151 has recesses such as blind holes and grooves. By forming 1115 and having different thicknesses, specific portions 1152 having different light transmittances can be easily provided. As a result, the specifying portion 1152 can be made of the same material as the main body portion 1151, and compared to the case where the specifying portion 1152 having a different light transmittance is inserted into the main body portion 1151, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) can be applied. Cost can be reduced.

Further, in the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, the concave portion 1115 is formed in the main portion 1151 and the thickness is made different to provide the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance. Since it is made of the same material as the portion 1151, the cost of the game panel 1100 can be reduced compared to inserting a specific portion having a different light transmittance into the main portion. In addition, since the specific portion 1152 is formed by cutting, it is possible to easily change the thickness (light transmittance), shape, and position of the specific portion 1152 simply by changing the cutting program. , design changes and model changes can be easily dealt with, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, and the specifying part 1152 with a higher performance effect can be easily provided. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, when the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is formed by cutting, a nail hole (preparatory hole) for implanting the obstacle nail N in the panel plate 1110A, and a center accessory in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) are formed. 2500 and the lower right unit 2400 can be cut at the timing of cutting the opening 1112 penetrating back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 and the like. As a result, it is not necessary to change the setup for cutting the specific part 1152, the specific part 1152 can be machined with a slight increase in machining time, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is made white and opaque, compared to the case where the panel plate is transparent, even if the pattern of the front sheet 1130 has a transparent part, it will not be planted on the panel plate 1110A. The roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N (portions inserted into the panel plate 1110A) can be hidden from the player's side, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is white-based and opaque, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 and the back bottom front effect unit 3400 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A). A part of the back lower front decoration 3410 can be made invisible from the front (player side). When the back front peripheral edge decorations 3201 and the like provided behind the panel plate 1110A are decorated with light, the light from the back front peripheral edge decorations 3201 and the like is transmitted forward through the translucent panel plate 1110A. Therefore, the panel plate 1110A can be partially decorated with light, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 or the like provided at the rear. At this time, since the panel plate 1110A is made white, when the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 provided behind the panel plate 1110A is decorated with light, the color of the emitted light can be transmitted forward. Thus, the player can be entertained with colorful light emitting performances, and various light emitting performances can be presented to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is white and opaque, part of the front lower back decorative body 3410 of the lower front front effect unit 3400 provided behind the panel plate 1110A is positioned forward (for the player). side), when the lower front decoration 3410 is raised to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110A, the lower front decoration 3410 can be seen through the opening 1112. The entire 3410 can be visually recognized from the front, and the player can see a movable performance in which a part of the back lower front decorative body 3410 is hidden or the whole is visible, and various movable performances can be presented to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque, and the surface of the panel decoration substrate 1140 in the rear is white, the panel decoration substrate 1140 can be made difficult to see through the panel plate 1110A, and the game panel 1100 ( In addition, the white panel decoration substrate 1140 can reflect the light from the LED 1141 and the panel plate 1110A side to the front, and the panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) can be made to emit brighter light.

The panel plate 1110A is made of an opaque material (synthetic resin), and the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A protects the panel plate 1110A from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, compared to the case where the panel plate 1110A is made transparent, an inexpensive synthetic resin (here, high-impact polystyrene) having a low grade such as abrasion resistance is used as the material of the panel plate 1110A. and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A is white and opaque, and the front sheet 1130 is patterned, the player can easily focus on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A when looking at the game area 5a. , the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a is naturally focused just by looking at the panel plate 1110A. At this time, as described above, the light from the LED 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 causes the panel plate 1110A (the main portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152) to be self-luminous. Since the circulating game ball B can be seen as a silhouette by the light from behind, the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be controlled. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is made thinner than the main portion 1151, when the second LED 1141b of the panel decoration substrate 1140 provided behind the main portion 1151 emits light, the light diffuses within the main portion 1151. Diffusion of the light from the second LED 1141b, which is on, is blocked by the portion recessed to form the specific portion 1152, so that only the portion in front of the second LED 1141b in the main portion 1151 can emit light. Become. Therefore, for example, when an annular groove is formed in the main body portion 1151 and the portion of the groove is used as the specific portion 1152, the second groove provided behind the inner portion of the annular specific portion 1152 in the main body portion 1151 is provided. When the LED 1141b emits light, only the portion inside the specified portion 1152 can be illuminated brightly, and the portion outside the specified portion 1152 can be darkened. In other words, the shape of the specifying portion 1152 and the arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 1141 of the panel decoration substrate 1140 make it possible to cause only an arbitrary portion of the main portion 1151 to emit light, thereby realizing the pachinko machine 1 capable of executing more diverse lighting effects. can provide.

Further, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is made thinner than the main portion 1151, when the rear surface of the specific portion 1152 is formed into a three-dimensional relief shape imitating a predetermined character, item, logo, or the like, the specific Since the thickness of the portion 1152 is different so as to follow the shape of the rear surface, when the first LED 1141a provided behind the specific portion 1152 in the panel decoration substrate 1140 emits light, the portion of the specific portion 1152 transmits light. When the degree is different, when viewed from the front (player's side), light with shading along the shape of the rear surface of the specific part 1152 can be seen, and the light emitted from the first LED 1141a on the front surface of the panel plate 1110A gives a predetermined light. It is possible to project a character or the like, and to provide a lighting performance capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A is recessed from the rear surface of the main body portion 1151, the front surface of the specific portion 1152 and the front surface of the main body portion 1151 are flush with each other. The game ball B can be smoothly circulated in the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the portion of the front component 1000 that overlaps the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction also has the pattern of the front sheet 1130 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A. It is possible to display the light emission of the panel plate 1110A to the player. In other words, since the front component 1000 is transparent, the entire panel plate 1110A (front sheet 1130) can be seen from the player side, and a wider range can be decorated (see FIG. 174).

In addition, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing for hiding wiring behind the panel plate 1110A. In other words, with a transparent panel board, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the panel board in order to improve its appearance. There is no need to process to hide the wiring etc. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel (panel board) is made transparent, it is possible to separately provide a member for hiding the wiring behind the panel board 1110A, or to arrange the wiring so as to make it difficult to see. There is no need to play or play, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the panel plate 1110A is provided with a plurality of recesses 1115, the weight of the panel plate 1110A can be reduced by the plurality of recesses 1115, and the game board 5 can be lightened. It should be noted that the panel plate 1110A may be provided with a recessed portion 1115 for lightening the weight of the game board 5 (the panel plate 1110A), in addition to the above-described light emitting effect due to the difference in light transmittance. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1100 is composed of one member. It is good as

In the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110A is cut from a flat base material, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) may be injection molded. By injection molding the panel plate 1110A, it is possible to form the specific portion 1152 having a complicated shape or a sharp shape that cannot be obtained by cutting. By using insert molding or two-color molding (multi-color molding) for molding the panel plate 1110A, the specific portion 1152 may be made of a material having a light transmittance different from that of the main portion 1151, or the sleeve 1154 and the filling portion 1156 may be formed. It can be integrally formed or made.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittance is formed by recessing the main body portion 1151 (panel plate 1110A) to have different thicknesses, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the specific portion 1152 may be formed of a material having a different light transmittance from that of the main portion 1151 . Specifically, for example, a material having a light transmittance different from that of the main body portion 1151 is provided so as to penetrate the main body portion 1151 (the material is inserted, press-fitted, injected, insert-molded, two-color molded, etc.). The identification part 1152 may be formed by

When the game panel 1100 (including the panel plate 1110A) is formed by injection molding, the main portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 having different light transmittances can be integrally formed at the same time. In addition, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a transparent material can be insert-molded or multi-color molded in the portion (recess 1115) forming the specific portion 1152 thinner than the main portion 1151. , the thickness of the main portion 1151 and the portion of the specific portion 1152 can be made the same, and by eliminating the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the strength and rigidity of the game panel 1100 . Further, in this case, since the main body portion 1151 and the specific portion 1152 have the same thickness, it is possible to implant the obstructing nail N in the specific portion 1152 as well, and the specific portion 1152 can be arranged freely. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can enhance the performance and has a higher decorative effect and performance effect.

Also, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the protruding amount of core pins and mandrels into the cavity for forming recessed portions (recessed portions 1115) by specific portions 1152 thinner than the main portion 1151 is changed. The thickness of the specific portion 1152 can be changed by simply doing so, and the light transmittance of the specific portion 1152 can be easily changed.

In addition, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, a finer shape or a sharper shape can be formed with respect to the shape of the rear surface of the specific portion 1152, the shape of the specific portion 1152 when viewed from the front, etc., compared to cutting. be able to. Therefore, the specifying part 1152 capable of enhancing the performance effect can be provided, the player can be entertained, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player. can be provided.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the panel plate 1110A is shown as a white opaque one, but the panel plate 1110A (game panel 1100) may be of a predetermined color (for example, a reddish color). , blue, yellow, mixed colors, etc.)", "colorless or colored transparent". As the opaque panel plate 1110A, there are various types of panel plate 1110A, such as "the whole including the inside is opaque", "the inside is partially opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one side is opaque", and "the transparent panel is transparent". "Molded from opaque synthetic resin with transparency", "A product in which a transparent plate and an opaque plate with translucency are pasted together", "At least one surface of a transparent plate has translucency ``An opaque film (cell) attached to the back surface of a transparent plate'', ``The back surface of a transparent plate that has undergone a shrinking process using ultraviolet curable ink'', ``The back surface of a transparent plate that has been sandblasted'', etc. is mentioned. Also, as for the colored ones, there are "red ones", "blue ones", "yellow ones", and "mixed colors (mixing multiple specific colors to make a single color)". , "multicolor (various colors dispersed in a mottled pattern, striped pattern, polka dot pattern, geometric pattern, etc.)", and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specifying portion 1152 has a higher light transmittance than the main portion 1151, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specifying portion 1152 has a lower light transmittance than the main portion 1151. It is good as a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 1151 of the panel plate 1110A is shown to be opaque, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main body portion 1151 may be transparent. In this case, since the light transmittance does not change significantly even if the thickness of the main body 1151 is changed, the specific part 1152 having a light transmittance different from that of the main body 1151 depending on the color and material is provided. As a result, the identification portion 1152 can appear to be floating in the air with respect to the transparent main body portion 1151, and the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated with the shape of the identification portion 1152. FIG. At this time, when the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110A) is illuminated with light, the identification portion 1152, which appears to be floating in the air, emits light in a self-luminous manner. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract players and has a high appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1140 is provided behind the panel plate 1110A, and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110A is irradiated with light. A decoration substrate may be provided on the outside of the side surface or the end surface to irradiate the side surface or the end surface of the panel plate 1110A with light.

It should be noted that in the above embodiment and the embodiments described later, the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110A, the panel plate 1110B, etc. of the game panel 1100 in which the obstacle nail N is planted are made of resin regardless of whether they are transparent or opaque (milky white). Since it is made of steel, compared with the case where plywood such as veneer is used for the game panel, the accuracy of the interval between the planted obstacle nails N is good and there is little aging.

[10. Fourth Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is an exploded perspective view of the panel plate, the rear sheet, and the panel decoration substrate in the game board of the fourth embodiment, viewed from the front. In the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made opaque with a translucent white color. A panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided on which a plurality of LEDs 1171 capable of irradiating light from the rear to the front of the rear sheet 1160 are mounted on the front. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration are omitted.

The panel plate 1110B has the same shape as the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100A described above, and is detachably held from the front by a frame-shaped transparent panel holder 1120. The panel plate 1110B has a transparent front configuration through the panel holder 1120. It is attached to the rear side of the member 1000 .

The panel plate 1110B of the present embodiment is made of milky white high impact polystyrene (HIPS).

It is preferable that the opaque material having translucency in the panel plate 1110B has a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. This is because if the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to decorate with light with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. On the other hand, if the haze value is lower than this, the shapes and decorations of the members provided on the rear side become easily recognizable, and there is a possibility that the presentation effect by concealment cannot be obtained sufficiently.

In addition, the panel plate 1110B is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)) as a white system, but "white Munsell value (N 9.5)", "gofun color Munsell value (2.5Y)" 9.2/0.5)”, “Ubana color Munsell value (10Y 9/1)”, “Ivory color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)”, “Lead white Munsell value (N 9)”, “Oyster White Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)”, “Greyish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)”, “White indigo Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)”, “ Secret color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)”, “Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)”, “Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)”, A white color such as "cherry color Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5)" may be used.

Furthermore, the panel plate 1110B is made of high-impact polystyrene (HIPS). It may be made of polyethylene, polypropylene, glass, or the like. Also, the panel plate 1110A is made white based on the color of the material (high impact polystyrene (HIPS)), but it may be made white by adding a coloring agent to the transparent material.

As the opaque panel plate 1110B, there are various types of opaque panel plate 1110B, such as "the whole including the inside is opaque", "the inside is partially opaque", "the inside is transparent and at least one surface is opaque", and "the translucent panel plate 1110B" "Molded from opaque synthetic resin with transparency", "A product in which a transparent plate and an opaque plate with translucency are pasted together", "At least one surface of a transparent plate has translucency ``An opaque film (cell) attached to the back surface of a transparent plate'', ``The back surface of a transparent plate that has undergone a shrinking process using ultraviolet curable ink'', ``The back surface of a transparent plate that has been sandblasted'', etc. It is good as

Also, a front sheet having excellent abrasion resistance may be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B, like the game board 5B of the third embodiment. The front sheet attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B may or may not have a pattern. As a result, the panel plate 1110B can be protected by the front sheet from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. , high impact polystyrene) can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The rear sheet 1160 is attached to the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The rear sheet 1160 is formed of a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. Although not shown, the rear sheet 1160 is printed with a predetermined light-transmitting pattern. The rear sheet 1160 can project a pattern on the white opaque panel plate 1110B by causing the LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 to emit light.

The rear sheet 1160 (the pattern thereof) may have a transparent portion, or may have an opaque portion other than in front of the panel decoration substrate 1170 .

Materials for the rear sheet 1160 in this embodiment include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", " polyethylene resin", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

The panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided behind the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 at two locations, one between the gate 2002 and the upper left side unit 2300, and the other at the front where the guidance area 2710 is provided. . The panel decoration substrate 1170 has white solder resist applied to its front and rear surfaces, and has white front and rear surfaces. A plurality of LEDs 1171 are mounted on the front surface of the panel decoration substrate 1170 . The plurality of LEDs 1171 are high-intensity full-color LEDs.

Although illustration is omitted, a connector for connection, a 24-bit LED driver for causing the plurality of LEDs 1171 to emit light, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the panel decoration board 1170 .

In the game board 5C of the present embodiment, in a normal state in which the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration board 1170 are not illuminated, the entire front surface of the panel board 1110B is white with uniform brightness, and the front (the player The design of the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 provided behind are not visible from the side).

When the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 are caused to emit light as the game progresses from this normal state, the light is emitted forward through the rear sheet 1160 and the panel plate 1110B. At this time, since the rear sheet 1160 has a predetermined pattern, the pattern is projected onto the opaque white panel plate 1110B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171. The pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be made visible.

Thus, according to the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment, according to the progress of the game (for example, the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 By causing the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 to emit light, the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 can be projected onto the panel plate 1110B, so the pattern is projected on the rear surface of the game area 5a in which the game ball B circulates. By doing so, it is possible to show the game area 5a in which the pattern emerges in the rear, which has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and also to the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can strongly attract the interest of the players and has a high appeal to the players.

In addition, since the pattern is projected onto the panel board 1110B in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and adding interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is used to project (project) the translucent pattern of the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B. Since the light transmittance can be varied depending on the color or ink (paint) used, the design of the rear sheet 1160 can be used to determine the main portion 1151 and specific portion 1152 of the panel plate 1110A in the game board 5B of the third embodiment. can provide the same functionality as More specifically, in the rear sheet 1160, for example, by increasing the light transmittance of the portion of the pattern and decreasing the light transmittance of the portion other than the pattern, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 can be It is possible to make the part of the pattern shine brightly, and to make the part of the pattern shine brightly. Therefore, the game board 5C of the present embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the game board 5B of the third embodiment as described above.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B is made white and the surface of the panel decoration substrate 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B is formed white, the color of the panel decoration substrate 1170 matches the color of the panel plate 1110B. It can be assimilated so that it cannot be seen from the front, and it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the existence of the panel decoration board 1170 and furthermore the rear sheet 1160 (the pattern thereof). When the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 are caused to emit light, the shadow of the design of the rear sheet 1160 is projected onto the panel board 1110B. By noticing the existence of (the pattern of) the rear sheet 1160 that was not there, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can strongly think that the chance has arrived, and the light emission performance with a higher performance effect can be realized. The game can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the rear sheet 1160 is made of a sheet material, the rear sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In addition, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed in a flat shape and provided so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, the space required for arranging the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5C) can be reduced. Since it can be made as small as possible, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members (for example, a production device, a production display device, etc.) behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting more diverse performances to the players.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this. You can do it. As a result, the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be prevented from being seen through the panel plate 1110B, and the impact of the appearance of the pattern when the pattern is projected by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170. can be further enhanced.

In the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided on the entire rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In the above-described embodiment, the back sheet 1160 has a translucent pattern so that the light transmitted through the pattern is projected onto the panel plate 1110B. Alternatively, the shadow of the pattern may be projected onto the panel plate 1110B.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The design of the back sheet 1160 may be projected onto the panel plate 1110B by light from the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 or the back bottom front decoration 3410), the effect display device 1600, or the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to project the light-emitting decoration provided in the panel board 1110B or the effect image of the effect display device 1600 onto the panel plate 1110B. More specifically, the light-transmitting decorative body provided behind the panel plate 1110B is used instead of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160, and the decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted for the decorative body to emit light is called the panel. It is used instead of the decorative substrate 1170 . Alternatively, a liquid crystal panel for displaying an effect image in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160, and the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are substituted. As a result, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above, and by moving the decorations and moving the effect image, the pattern projected on the panel plate 1110B moves, resulting in more effective light emission. A performance can be shown to a player.

Further, in the above embodiment, the panel board 1110B is shown as being white, but the panel board 1110B is not limited to this and may be colored. As colored ones, there are ``red ones'', ``blue ones'', ``yellow ones'', ``mixed colors (multiple specific colors are mixed to make a single color)'', and `` multicolor (speckled pattern, striped pattern, polka dot pattern, geometric pattern, etc., in which each color is dispersed)”, and the like.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1170 is provided behind the panel plate 1110B to irradiate the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160) with light, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a decorative substrate may be provided outside the side or end face of the panel plate 1110B to irradiate the side or end face of the panel plate 1110B with light.

Also, in the above embodiment, the front sheet 1130 may be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B. At this time, the front sheet 1130 may be provided with a predetermined pattern corresponding to the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 . Specifically, for example, if the shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 caused by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is projected onto the parts other than the characteristic parts of the pattern on the front sheet 1130, When the LEDs 1171 are not illuminated, the pattern on the front sheet 1130 can be displayed with the same brightness as a whole. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of brightening (shining) the characteristic parts of the pattern of the front sheet 1130 by the shadow and strongly attracting the interest of the players. .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rear sheet 1160 is provided between the panel plate 1110B and the panel decoration substrate 1170. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Between them, a movable or deformable projecting body may be provided according to the progress of the game. As a result, the shadow of the projection projected onto the game panel 1100B by the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 can be moved or deformed, which greatly surprises the player. To make a player strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a state of a ``jackpot'' game) will occur in which the player is advantageous, and to increase the player's expectation and suppress the decline in interest.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, the projection body can be moved in accordance with the progress of the game between a retracted position that is invisible from the front through the panel plate 1110B and an appearing position that is visible from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B. You can make it work. As a result, when the projector is in the retracted position, it is invisible from the front due to the opaque panel plate 1110B. Since the shadow is not projected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the projection. In this state, if the LED 1171 is caused to emit light according to the progress of the game, the light from the LED 1171 causes the shadow of the projector to be projected onto the panel board 1110B. The shadow of the projection can be shown to the player, and the player can indirectly recognize the existence of the projection. It can surprise and strongly attract the player's interest. When the projection body is moved to a position where it can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110B as the game progresses, the projection body can be seen directly through the opening 1112, which greatly facilitates the player. To surprise a player, give a strong impact to the player, and make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a state of a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, when the projector is moved between the retracted position and the appearing position, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 at the retracted position causes the shadow of the projector projected on the panel board 1110B to form a panel. The decoration mode of the plate 1110B and the decoration mode of the projection body itself (for example, the pattern applied to the projection body) may be different. Specifically, for example, when the outer shape of the projection body is the shape of the initial form of a predetermined character, and the image of the final form of the character is applied to the front surface of the projection body, the light from the LED 1171 is emitted at the retracted position. Since the initial form of the character is projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light, the player can be made aware of the existence of the projected body (decorative body) of the character in the initial form. When the projection body is moved from the retreat position to the appearance position in accordance with the progress of the game, contrary to the expectation that the character in the initial form will appear, the character in the final form will appear. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to make the player strongly think that an advantageous game state is likely to occur, and to raise the expectation for the game, and to entertain the player. can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 is used to project the shadow of the pattern of the flat rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B, but the present invention is not limited to this. A three-dimensional projection body may be provided instead of the rear sheet 1160, and the shadow of the projection body may be projected onto the panel plate 1110B. In this case, if the three-dimensional projection body is made translucent, the shadow of the projection body projected onto the panel board 1110B by the light from the LED 1171 will appear in shades, and the decoration of the projection body will be visible to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest.

In addition, if the projection body is formed by molding a sheet material into a three-dimensional shape by air pressure molding or vacuum molding, the projection body can be made lighter than its apparent size. If the projection body can be moved in accordance with the progress of the game, it will be possible to move the projection body with a small force (energy). A small drive source with a small output can be used, the space required for driving can be relatively reduced, and an inexpensive drive source can be used. In addition, since the projection body can be lightened, the projection body can be supported even by a support mechanism having relatively low rigidity, and the size of the projection body support mechanism can be easily reduced (space saving). The support mechanism can be made inexpensive. As described above, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members, and by arranging the other members, it is possible to entertain the player by showing more various performances, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Such cost can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 in which the game area 5a in which the game balls B circulate is provided in front of the game board 5C is made opaque white with translucency. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a can be brightened, and the game balls B flowing through the inside of the game area 5a can be easily seen. When the panel plate 1110B is irradiated with light, light from lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, etc., the light is diffused on the panel plate 1110B. Thus, the panel plate 1110B can appear dimly and self-luminous. Therefore, compared with conventional pachinko machines that use a plywood board or a transparent board as the game panel 1100, it is possible for the player to see the pachinko machine 1 in which the inside of the game area 5a self-illuminates, which has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the player.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is opaque with translucency, the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 provided behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160) are not illuminated. In the state (normal state), the rear sheet 1160 (projector) and the panel decoration substrate 1170 are invisible from the front due to the opaque panel plate 1110B, and the player cannot see the rear sheet 1160 or the panel decoration substrate 1170. It can be made difficult to notice its existence. From this normal state, when the LED 1171 is caused to emit light according to the progress of the game, the light from the LED 1171 projects (projects) the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 onto the panel board 1110B, so that the translucency is improved. The shadow of the pattern on the rear sheet 1160 can be visually recognized by the player through the provided panel plate 1110B, and the panel plate 1110B can be illuminated so as to have light and shade. At this time, since the panel plate 1110B is white-based and opaque, the luminescent color of the LED 1171 and the pattern color of the rear sheet 1160 can be transmitted forward, and the player can enjoy the colorful luminous effect. At the same time, it is possible to present a variety of light emitting effects to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to suppress the loss of interest. In this way, since the shadow of the pattern of the rear sheet 1160 is projected behind the game area 5a, the inside of the game area 5a can be decorated with the shadow, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. A strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, the pattern on the rear sheet 1160, which is invisible in a normal state, becomes visible by the light emitted from the LED 1171, which emits light according to the progress of the game. It is possible to make the player think about the game, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 becomes self-luminous due to light from the outside or the like, and the light from the plurality of LEDs 1171 of the panel decoration substrate 1170 causes the panel plate 1110B to emit light. Since the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a can be made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel plate 1110B, the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a. The game ball B can be easily visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, since the game ball B in the game area 5a can be easily visually recognized, it is possible to easily perform delicate adjustment of the hitting strength of the game ball B, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be easily performed. The original game of the devised pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the rear sheet 1160 is made of a sheet material, the rear sheet 1160 can be made relatively light, and an increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. In addition, since the rear sheet 1160 is formed flat so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110B, the space in the front-rear direction required for arranging the rear sheet 1160 in the pachinko machine 1 can be minimized. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members (for example, a production device, a production display device, etc.) behind the panel plate 1110B (rear sheet 1160), thereby realizing a more diverse production. The pachinko machine 1 that can be shown and enjoyed by a player can be provided, the rear sheet 1160 can be easily made inexpensive, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made of translucent and opaque material (synthetic resin), compared to the case where the panel plate 1110B (game panel 1100) is made transparent, the grade is lower. A low synthetic resin can be used, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B is made opaque, compared to the case where it is transparent, the roots of the plurality of obstacle nails N (portions inserted into the panel plate 1110B) that are planted in the panel plate 1110B are more visible to the player. It can be made invisible from the side, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made white, the color of the decoration provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the decoration effect of the decoration is strongly exhibited. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players. In addition, since the panel plate 1110B is white, when the front sheet 1130 with a pattern is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110B, the coloring of the pattern on the front sheet 1130 can be improved. The decorative effect of the front sheet 1130 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, by attaching the front sheet 1130 to the front surface of the panel board 1110B, the front sheet 1130 can protect the panel board 1110B from the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to use an inexpensive material with low grade such as abrasion resistance as the material of the panel plate 1110B, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the panel plate 1110B of the game panel 1100 is made opaque, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing for hiding wiring behind the panel plate 1110B. In other words, with a transparent game panel, it is necessary to hide the wiring behind the game panel in order to improve its appearance. There is no need to process to hide the wiring, etc. As a result, compared to the case where the game panel (panel board) is made transparent, it is possible to separately provide a member for hiding the wiring behind the panel board 1110B, or to arrange the wiring so as to make it difficult to see. There is no need to play or play, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[11. Detailed configuration of the winning opening on the game board]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning openings on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 184 to 189. FIG. FIG. 184(a) is a plan view showing the configuration of the winning openings on the game board, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of (a). FIG. 185(a) is a side cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of the winning opening of the present embodiment, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view schematically showing the configuration of a conventional winning opening. Figures 186(a) and (b) are perspective views showing a winning opening in which the direction of entering a ball is inclined and in which a guiding piece portion of a different embodiment is provided, and Figures 187(a) and (b). ) is a perspective view showing a prize winning opening provided with a guide piece portion of a further different embodiment, and FIGS. It is a perspective view showing. FIG. 189 is a perspective view showing a conventional winning hole in which the ball entering direction is inclined.

Below, the relationship between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 that constitute the winning opening unit 2030 having the winning opening 2015, the guiding piece portion 2035 provided in the winning opening 2015 or the winning opening 2016 or the guidance The configuration of piece 2050 will be described in detail. The winning opening 2015 or the winning opening 2016 can be applied to the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the ordinary winning opening 2008, the sub-out opening, and the like. Further, the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 can be applied not only to the winning port unit 2030 but also to a guide passage, a discharge passage, and the like through which the game balls B circulate.

[11-1. Relationship between upstream passage portion and downstream passage portion]
First, the relationship between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 in the prize winning port unit 2030 having the prize winning port 2015 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG.184(b), only the cut end surface is shown. The winning hole unit 2030 of the present embodiment has a winning hole 2015, receives the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a, and is an upstream passage part capable of changing the direction of circulation backward. 2031, and a downstream passage portion 2032 provided behind the upstream passage portion 2031 and through which the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2015 can flow.

The upstream passage portion 2031 includes a box-shaped (container-shaped) upstream main body 2031a that is open at the top and rear, and a rib-shaped guide piece that stands upward from the center of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a in the left-right direction. 2035 and . The upstream main body 2031a is formed in a size that allows only one game ball B to enter. The upper end face of the guide piece portion 2035 is highest at the front end side and slopes downward toward the rear. The height of the rear end of the guide piece 2035 is higher than the upper surface of the bottom of the upstream main body 2031a.

The upper end surface (tip surface) of the guide piece portion 2035 is bent in the middle in the front-rear direction so that the angle of inclination changes. More specifically, the guiding piece portion 2035 has a bending front portion that is steeply inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and a bending rear portion that is inclined at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. gently sloping. A portion of the guiding piece portion 2035 that is inclined at a steep angle (steep piece portion 2035a) has a triangular shape (roughly an isosceles right triangle shape) when viewed from the side. It is a change piece that changes backward. On the other hand, the portion (loose piece portion 2035b) inclined at a loose angle in the guide piece portion 2035 serves as a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B backward. As described above, the upstream passage portion 2031 can guide the game ball B that has entered the upstream main body 2031a from above to the downstream passage portion 2032 provided behind by the guiding piece portion 2035 .

In the prize winning port unit 2030 of the present embodiment, the side surface of the guide piece 2035 of the upstream passage 2031 is formed by bending a triangular straight line. Compared to the case, the length of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the front-rear direction can be shortened. As a result, the guiding distance (rolling distance) until the game ball B entering (accepted) the winning hole 2015 is guided backward can be shortened as much as possible, so that the game ball B can be released quickly. It is possible to guide the game balls B backward, suppress the stagnation of the game balls B to make it difficult to cause clogging, and increase the number of the game balls B received per unit time into the prize winning opening 2015.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more.

The downstream passage portion 2032 has a gutter-shaped downstream main body 2032a that is open in the front-rear direction and upward direction, and a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2032b that extends laterally and downwardly from the front end of the downstream main body 2032a. there is The bottom of the downstream main body 2032a is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The downstream main body 2032a has an internal lateral width w1 larger than a lateral width w2 of the upstream main body 2031a of the upstream passage portion 2031 (see FIG. 184(a)). The flange portion 2032b is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in contact with the rear surface thereof.

By the way, when the flow path through which the game ball B circulates is formed by a plurality of passage portions as in the winning opening unit 2030 of the present embodiment, the upstream passage portion 2031 on the upstream side and the downstream passage portion on the downstream side are formed. 2032, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is assembled, if the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are set to have the same height, the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion Due to manufacturing errors (errors or tolerances) of 2032, assembly errors, and the like, a step (also referred to as a reverse step) may occur where the downstream passage portion 2032 is higher than the upstream passage portion 2031. Then, when a reverse step occurs between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, the game ball B is stagnant due to the reverse step and causes ball clogging, or the game ball B moves upstream due to the reverse step. By rebounding to the side, there is a possibility that the upstream passage portion 2031 will flow backward and be discharged from the entrance of the upstream passage portion 2031, thereby invalidating the prize winning.

On the other hand, when the prize winning port unit 2030 of the present embodiment is assembled, there is a step G at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 where the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher than the downstream passage portion. is formed so that Specifically, a step 2033 (see FIG. 184(b)) is formed between the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece 2031b and the front end of the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a. formed. As a result, a step 2033 in which the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher than the upstream passage portion 2031 is formed between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032. Even if there is an error, an assembly error, or the like, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse step where the downstream passage portion 2032 side is higher. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged due to the reverse step, and the invalidation of winning due to the reverse flow of the game balls B, and the like.

Incidentally, the height G of the step 2033 between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 is preferably within the range of 0.5 mm to 5 mm, preferably within the range of 0.5 mm to 1 mm. The reason why the height G of the step 2033 is set within this range is that if the height G of the step 2033 is smaller than the above range, manufacturing errors in each of the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 and the upstream passage portion Depending on the assembly error between 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, etc., a reverse step where the downstream main body 2032a side is higher occurs, and the reverse step hinders the circulation of the game ball B, resulting in ball clogging. This is because there is a possibility that the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2015 flows backward and is ejected from the winning hole 2015 to invalidate the winning. On the other hand, if the height G of the step 2033 is larger than the above range, the game ball B from the upstream passage portion 2031 is likely to rebound greatly at the bottom of the downstream passage portion 2032. The game ball B jumps out from the open upper end side, or the game ball B rampages in the downstream passage part 2032, causing a blockage of the ball due to a delay in circulation, or a vertical problem related to the structure of the winning opening unit 2030. This is because there is a risk that the dimension in the direction may be unnecessarily large. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are formed of separate members, a remarkable effect can be expected because of the influence of mounting errors and the like. Even when the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are integrally formed, the effect of preventing the backflow of the game ball B by the step 2033 can be expected.

In the above-described embodiment, the acute piece portion 2035a of the guiding piece portion 2035 has a triangular side surface, but the shape is not limited to this, and may be an arc shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B circulates (rolls) on the bottom of the downstream main body 2032a of the downstream passage portion 2032. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A guide rib (a guide piece) may be provided that protrudes upward from the bottom of the main body 2032a and extends in the front-rear direction so that the rear is lower, and on which the game ball B rolls on the upper end surface. When the guide rib is provided in the downstream passage portion 2032, the front end of the guide rib is made lower than the rear end of the upstream passage portion 2031 (the guide piece portion 2035). Further, when the guide rib is provided in the downstream passage portion 2032, the bottom portion of the downstream main body 2032a may be formed horizontally.

In the above-described embodiment, the rear edge of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031 has a pin angle. A chamfered portion such as C-chamfered or R-chamfered portion may be provided. As a result, when the upstream passage portion 2031 is plated, clogging of the game balls B due to plating pools can be prevented. More specifically, when a plated pool is formed on the rear end side of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035, the plated pool also bulges upward, so that the game ball B is caught in the plated pool, thereby Clogging may occur. On the other hand, by providing the chamfered portion on the rear edge side, the plating (plating solution) can escape downward, making it difficult for the plating pool to form, and even if the plating pool is formed, the plating pool can be prevented from forming. can be suppressed from bulging upward from the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035, and the occurrence of ball clogging due to plating deposits can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the downstream passage portion 2032 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the upstream passage portion 2031 is attached to the rear end side. may extend to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the downstream passage portion 2032 may be a ball guiding member (or a ball discharging member) provided behind the game panel 1100.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning opening unit 2030 is configured by the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, but is not limited to this, and the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage The part 2032 may constitute a guidance passage or a discharge passage through which the game ball B circulates.

[11-2. Prevention of ball clogging at the prize opening]
Next, the prevention of clogged balls in the winning opening 2015 (winning opening unit 2030) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. A winning opening unit 2030 having a winning opening 2015 of this embodiment has the same configuration as the winning opening unit 2030 in FIG. The winning opening 2015 opens upward in the game area 5a so that the game ball B can be received therein. This winning hole unit 2030 has a guiding piece 2035 for guiding the received game ball B backward. The guiding piece portion 2035 is formed so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent in the middle in the front-rear direction so that the angle of inclination changes.

The guiding piece portion 2035 has a sharp piece portion 2035a that is steeply slanted at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal at the front portion of the bend, and a sharp portion 2035a at the rear portion of the bend that is 5 degrees from the horizontal. The loose piece portion 2035b is gently inclined at an angle of 100 degrees. The steep piece portion 2035a of the guide piece portion 2035 is formed in a triangular shape (approximately a right-angled isosceles triangle shape) in side view, and serves as a change piece portion for changing the circulation direction of the game ball B backward. . On the other hand, the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035 is a rear piece portion that guides the game ball B backward.

Therefore, when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2015 from above, it first contacts the sharp edge portion 2035a of the guide piece portion 2035, and the game ball B is reflected by the inclination of the steep edge portion 2035a. It can be changed from downward to backward. Then, the game ball B whose flow direction is changed backward by the sharp piece portion 2035a is guided backward by the loose piece portion 2035b. Thereby, the game ball B can be quickly guided backward from the entrance of the winning opening 2035. - 特許庁

In the winning hole unit 2030 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185(a), the center of the game ball B in contact with both the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guiding piece portion 2035 is the winning hole. A guiding piece portion 2035 is formed so as to be positioned forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) forming the rear end of 2015 at a distance shorter than the length of the radius of the game ball B.

By the way, the winning hole unit 2901 having the conventional winning hole 2900 has a guiding piece part 2902 for guiding the received game ball B backward, as shown in FIG. 185(b). . The guiding piece portion 2902 is formed such that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear, and is bent in the middle in the front-rear direction so that the angle of inclination changes. More specifically, the guiding piece portion 2902 has a sharp piece portion 2902a with a steep slope and a loose piece portion 2902b that continues from the rear end of the sharp piece portion 2902a and has a gentler slope than the steep piece portion 2902a. there is

In the guiding piece portion 2902 of such a conventional winning hole unit 2901, the center of the game ball B in contact with the sharp piece portion 2902a and the loose piece portion 2902b forms the rear end of the winning hole 2900. It is located forward of the length of the radius of the game ball B from the front surface of the panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when the game ball B in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 from above comes into contact with the game ball B in contact with the sharp piece portion 2902a and the loose piece portion 2902b, Due to the load from the game ball B on the upper side, a forward force acts on the game ball B on the lower side, and the game ball B on the lower side cannot move backward, resulting in ball jamming. Occur. Occurrence of ball clogging at the prize winning opening 2900 may make the player feel uncomfortable and reduce the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the winning hole unit 2030 of the present embodiment, as described above, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with both the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035 is located on the game panel. Since it is positioned at a distance shorter than the length of the radius of the game ball B forward from the front surface of the 1100, the game ball B is in contact with both the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035. In addition, when the game ball B in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 comes into contact from above, the load from the game ball B on the upper side acts on the game ball B on the lower side with a backward force. , the lower game ball B can be moved backward by the force, and the game ball B does not stay on the guiding piece portion 2035 . Therefore, since ball jamming (ball clogging) does not occur in the prize winning opening 2015, it is possible to avoid giving the player an unpleasant feeling due to the ball jamming, and the player enjoys the game and adds interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, in the downstream passage portion 2032, the flange portion 2032b does not extend above the winning opening 2015 in front view. A downstream passage portion 2032 may also be formed in which a plate-shaped flange portion 2032b extends directly above the winning opening 2015 on the front surface of the game panel 1100 . In this case, the center of the game ball B, which is in contact with both the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b of the guide piece portion 2035, moves forward from the front surface of the flange portion more than the length of the radius of the game ball B. be located at a short distance.

[11-3. Detailed configuration of a prize-winning opening with an inclined ball entry direction]
Next, the detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 2040 having the winning opening 2016 in which the game ball B enters in an inclined direction with respect to the vertical will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 186 to 189 and the like. The winning opening 2016 of this embodiment is capable of receiving the game ball B within the game area 5a. The prize winning unit 2040 extends rearward from a flat plate-like front plate portion 2041 provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) and the front plate portion 2041, and is open obliquely upward and rearward. A gutter-shaped receiving portion 2042, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2043 extending outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 and capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the flange portion 2043 continuing to the receiving portion 2042. and a gutter-like rear extension 2044 extending rearward. The winning opening unit 2040 forms a winning opening 2016 with a front plate portion 2041 and a receiving portion 2042 .

In addition, the winning hole unit 2040 has a guiding piece part 2050 that guides the game ball B received in the winning hole 2016 backward. The guiding piece portion 2050 has a changing piece portion 2051 for changing the direction of circulation of the game ball B entering the winning opening 2016 backward, and a rear piece portion 2052 for guiding the game ball B backward. The changing piece portion 2051 is provided so that the tip end surface (upper end surface) with which the game ball B abuts faces the direction (parallel direction) facing the entry direction of the game ball B in the winning opening 2016 . The rear piece portion 2052 is provided so that the tip end surface (upper end surface) with which the game ball B abuts is directed in a direction different from the entrance ball direction (including the facing direction).

By the way, in the conventional winning hole 2910 in which the ball entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. A guide piece 2911 is erected in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the winning opening 2910 from diagonally above, the game ball B is likely to come into contact with the edge of the boundary between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2911, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2911, and the like. Since force acts on the guide piece 2911 in a direction different from the standing direction due to the contact of the game ball B, there is a problem that the guide piece 2911 is quickly fatigued and easily damaged. If the guiding piece portion 2911 is damaged, the broken pieces cause ball jamming, which inevitably interrupts the game, thus reducing the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) facing the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end face (tip end face) of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not hit the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Next, a specific embodiment of the prize winning unit 2040 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186(a) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with its bottom curved in a semicircular shape, and is formed in an inclined U shape when viewed from the front. The guiding piece portion 2050 extends upward from the lowest portion of the semicircular bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and extends from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 in the front-rear direction. The rear extending portion 2044 has a gutter-like shape that opens upward, and the bottom surface thereof is curved in an arc with a radius larger than the radius of the arc-shaped bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and is lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. placed in position.

The prize winning port unit 2040 further includes a rear guiding piece portion 2045 extending upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 and having an upper end surface inclined so as to become lower toward the rear. have. The rear guide piece portion 2045 is provided directly behind the guide piece portion 2050 , and the front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is located lower than the rear end of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050 . It extends back and forth from the to the rear end. Thus, in the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, a step is formed between the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045 so that the guide piece portion 2050 side is higher.

The winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, and a guide piece portion 2050 integrally formed, and a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The guiding piece portion 2050 of the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment is vertically erected upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, and the portion extending from the front end to the rear within a predetermined range extends in the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016 ( The direction of the arrow in the drawing) is bent in a direction (parallel direction) to extend upward. In the present embodiment, a portion of the guide piece portion 2050 that is bent and extends in a direction (parallel direction) facing the entering direction of the ball is a change piece portion 2051, and a portion on the rear side thereof is a rear piece portion. 2052.

The upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2052 of the guide piece portion 2050 is inclined from the rear end of the change piece portion 2051 so as to be lower than the upper surface of the change piece portion 2051 at a gentle angle, and then further inclined halfway in the front-rear direction. Bent so that it is loose. As a result, the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2050 is bent so that the inclination becomes gentler in two stages from the front end side.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 186(a), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the upper end face of the changing piece part 2051 of the guiding piece part 2050 , and the flow direction is changed from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rearward and downward direction, and the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2052 continuing to the rear end of the change piece portion 2051 is moved backward. It will roll to As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

Thus, according to the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B entering the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end face of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not touch the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 186(b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with its bottom surface curved in a semicircular shape, and is formed in an inclined U shape when viewed from the front. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 . The rear extending portion 2044 has a bottom surface that is curved in a semi-arc shape and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 . As a result, a step is formed between the receiving portion 2042 and the rearwardly extending portion 2044 so that the receiving portion 2042 side is higher. In this embodiment, two guide pieces 2050 are provided. This prize winning port unit 2040 is integrally formed as a whole.

The two guiding pieces 2050 are provided on both sides of the center line of the winning opening 2016 parallel to the direction of entry of the game ball B (the direction of the arrow in the drawing). The guiding piece portion 2050 above the center line extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces the ball entering direction from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends upward (inlet side) in the direction (parallel direction). The upper end surface of the upper guide piece portion 2050 is inclined so that the front end side becomes lower as it goes rearward from a portion below the entrance of the prize winning port 2016 (the upper end side of the front plate portion 2041), and the rear end is It matches the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 . The guiding piece portion 2050 has a triangular side surface (substantially a right-angled isosceles triangle shape), and has only a changing piece portion 2051 for changing the direction in which the game ball B flows.

On the other hand, the guiding piece portion 2050 below the center line extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 2044, and extends halfway between the receiving portion 2042 and the rearwardly extending portion 2044. It extends vertically upward from the lowest part of the bottom surface that is curved in an arc, and from the middle, it bends in the direction opposite to the entering direction (parallel direction) and extends upward (entrance side). out. The portion of the lower guide piece 2050 facing the ball entering direction (parallel direction) is provided at a position symmetrical to the upper guide piece 2050 with respect to the center line of the winning opening 2016. , and the upper end surface thereof is formed on the same plane as the upper end surface of the upper guide piece portion 2050 . Therefore, in the lower guide piece portion 2050, the portion in the direction (parallel direction) facing the ball entering direction is the change piece portion 2051, and the vertically erected portion behind it is A rear piece portion 2052 is formed, and the upper end surface is twisted between the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece portion 2052 . The guide piece portion 2050 has the rear end of the upper end surface positioned above the bottom surface of the rearwardly extending portion 2044 .

From the above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the prize winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment has two change piece portions 2051 and one rear piece portion 2052, and one of the two The changing piece 2051 is integrally continuous with the rear piece 2052 .

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 186(b), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the entering ball direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the entering ball direction (direction parallel) Abuts on the upper end surface of each change piece portion 2051 of the two guide piece portions 2050 provided in the , and the flow direction is changed from the entrance direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction. be. Then, the game ball B whose circulation direction has been changed backward by the changing piece portion 2051 rolls backward on the upper end surface of the rear piece portion 2052 in the lower guiding piece portion 2050 . As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

Thus, according to the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B entering the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end face of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not hit the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In addition, in the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, two changing pieces 2051 extending in a direction (parallel direction) facing the ball entering direction are provided, and two game balls B entering the winning hole 2016 are provided. Since it abuts on one change piece portion 2051, it is possible to reduce the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B on one change piece portion 2051, and the durability of the change piece portion 2051 (induction piece portion 2050) can be increased, and the main winning hole 2016 can be applied to a winning hole into which more game balls B enter.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187(a) will be described. A portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 is curved in an arc shape to be low. The rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 abuts on the front surface of the flange portion 2043, and an opening portion 2043a having a size through which the game ball B can pass is formed in a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042. ing. The lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening 2043a so that the receiving portion 2042 side is higher. A part of the bottom surface of the rear extension portion 2044 is curved in an arc shape to be low, and is provided at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043 a of the flange portion 2043 . As a result, a step is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange 2043 and the rear extension 2044 so that the flange 2043 side is higher.

The prize winning opening unit 2040 further has a pair of rear guide pieces 2045 which are inclined downward to the left and right of the lowest portion of the rear extension 2044 . The pair of rear guide pieces 2045 extends forward and backward from a portion on the same plane as the front surface of the flange portion 2043 to a portion behind the rear end of the rear extension portion 2044 . The front ends of the upper end surfaces of the pair of rear guide pieces 2045 protrude into the opening 2043 a of the flange portion 2043 at a height lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 .

The winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, and a guide piece portion 2050 integrally formed, and a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045 are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with two guiding pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. As shown in FIG. One guiding piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion forward of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces the direction opposite to the direction of ball entry on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. extends from the portion near the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the entrance direction. The guide piece portion 2050 extending in a direction opposite (parallel to) the entering direction has an upper end surface inclined at a steep angle with respect to the side (base) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. ing. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050 is formed in a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the direction of circulation of the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entering direction to the rearward direction. It is a changeable piece 2051 that can be changed.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 and extends upward from the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 . extending vertically to The guide piece portion 2050 has an upper end face inclined at a gentle angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and serves as a rear piece portion 2052 capable of guiding the game ball B backward. The rear piece portion 2052 protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 as a whole. The rear piece portion 2052 is provided so as to be positioned forward between the pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 .

As described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece portion 2052 separately.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 187(a), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the ball entering direction of the two guiding pieces 2050 The upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the direction facing (parallel direction), and the distribution direction is backward and downward from the ball entry direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 direction is changed. Since this change piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052, which is the remaining guide piece 2050 below, the change piece 2051 causes the flow direction to move backward. The game ball B changed to 2 contacts the upper end face of the rear piece portion 2052 and rolls backward on the upper end face. Then, the game ball B rolling on the rear piece portion 2052 rolls backward from the rear end of the rear piece portion 2052 so as to straddle the pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 . As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly, and can be rectified straight backward by the pair of rear guide pieces 2045. .

Thus, according to the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end face (tip end face) of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not hit the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In addition, a portion (upper end side) of the change piece portion 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece portion 2052 (in plan view, the upper end surface of the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece Because it intersects the upper end surface of the part 2052), the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning opening 2016 is changed in the distribution direction by the change piece 2051, and backward by the rear piece 2052. can be induced. Thereby, even if the ball entering direction of the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the entered game ball B can be guided backward in a good condition.

Furthermore, as in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, even if the positions of the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045 provided on the front and rear sides are different and are not continuous, the rear side rear guide piece Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is configured to be lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the downflow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 187(b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 extends horizontally in the front-rear direction with its bottom curved in a semicircular shape, and is formed in an inclined U shape when viewed from the front. The rear end surface of the receiving portion 2042 abuts on the front surface of the flange portion 2043, and an opening 2043a notched in a U shape and having a size that allows the game ball B to pass through at a portion corresponding to the downstream end of the receiving portion 2042. is formed. The lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is located below the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the opening 2043a so that the receiving portion 2042 side is higher.

The rearward extending portion 2044 has a J-shape when viewed from the front, and the bottom surface thereof is curved in a semicircular arc with a radius larger than the radius of the U-shaped portion of the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043. It is also provided at a position lower than the lower end of the opening 2043 a of the flange 2043 . As a result, a step is formed between the lower end of the opening 2043a of the flange 2043 and the rear extension 2044 so that the flange 2043 side is higher.

The prize winning port unit 2040 further includes a rear guiding piece portion 2045 extending upward from the lowest portion of the bottom surface of the rear extending portion 2044 and having an upper end surface inclined so as to become lower toward the rear. have. The rear guiding piece portion 2045 extends forward and backward from the same portion as the front surface of the flange portion 2043 to the rear end of the rearward extending portion 2044 . The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 extends upward to the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and protrudes into the opening portion 2043 a of the flange portion 2043 .

The winning opening unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, and a guide piece portion 2050, which are integrally formed, and a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045, which are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the flange portion 2043 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment is provided with two guiding pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. As shown in FIG. One guiding piece portion 2050 extends back and forth from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and from a portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 facing the direction of ball entry, It extends to a portion near the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the entrance direction. The guide piece portion 2050 extending in a direction opposite (parallel to) the entering direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) steeper than a side (base) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. slanted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050 is formed in a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the direction of circulation of the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entering direction to the rearward direction. It is a changeable piece 2051 that can be changed.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and is lower than the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends upward from a portion opposite to the changing piece portion 2051 . The guide piece portion 2050 has an upper end surface (tip surface) inclined at a loose angle with respect to the horizontal so as to be lowered rearward, and serves as a rear piece portion 2052 capable of guiding the game ball B backward. . The rear piece portion 2052 protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 as a whole. The rear piece portion 2052 is provided below the change piece portion 2051 .

As described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the prize winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece portion 2052 separately.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 187(b), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the ball entering direction that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the ball entering direction of the two guiding pieces 2050 The upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the direction facing (parallel direction), and the distribution direction is backward and downward from the entrance ball direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 direction is changed. Since this change piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece 2052 which is the remaining guide piece 2050 below, the change piece 2051 causes the distribution direction to move backward. The game ball B changed to abuts on the upper end surface (tip surface) of the rear piece portion 2052 below the change piece portion 2051 and rolls backward.

At this time, since the rear piece portion 2052 is provided on the opposite side to the change piece portion 2051 with the lowest part of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 in between, the game ball B is the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece portion. 2052 and rolls backward. As a result, the swinging of the game ball B in the left-right direction is suppressed, and the game ball B is rectified straight backward. Then, the game ball B guided backward rolls backward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 on the upper end surface of the rear guiding piece portion 2045 . As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

Thus, according to the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end face (tip end face) of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not hit the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In addition, a part (upper end side) of the changing piece portion 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece portion 2052 (in plan view, the upper end surface of the changing piece portion 2051 and the rear piece Because it intersects the upper end surface of the part 2052), the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning opening 2016 is changed in the distribution direction by the change piece 2051, and backward by the rear piece 2052. can be induced. Thereby, even if the ball entering direction of the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the entered game ball B can be guided backward in a good condition.

Furthermore, as in the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, even if the positions of the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045 provided on the front and rear sides are different and not continuous, the rear rear guide piece Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is configured to be lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the downflow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188(a) will be described. A portion of the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 of the winning opening unit 2040 is curved in an arc shape to be low. The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 . The front end surface of the rearwardly extending portion 2044 is in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2043 . The bottom surface of the rearward extending portion 2044 is curved in an arc shape with a radius larger than the radius of the arc-shaped bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 . Accordingly, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 and the bottom surface of the rearwardly extending portion 2044 so that the receiving portion 2042 side is higher.

The prize winning opening unit 2040 extends upward from the lowest portion of the rear extension portion 2044, and the rear guide piece portion 2045 extending back and forth over the entire length of the rear extension portion 2044 have more. The rear guiding piece portion 2045 has an upper end surface gently inclined so as to become lower toward the rear. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is approximately the same height as the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 .

The winning opening unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, a guide piece portion 2050, and a flange portion 2043 which are integrally formed, and a rear extension portion 2044 and a rear guide piece portion 2045 which are integrally formed. The receiving portion 2042 side (upstream passage portion side) and the rear extension portion 2044 side (downstream passage portion side) are separate members from each other.

The winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality (here, three) of guiding pieces 2050 for guiding the game ball B. As shown in FIG. One guiding piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion in front of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and faces the direction opposite to the ball entering direction on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. extends from the portion near the entrance of the winning opening 2016 (a portion closer to the entrance than the lowest portion of the receiving portion 2042) in a direction opposite (parallel to) the entrance direction. The guide piece portion 2050 extending in a direction opposite (parallel to) the entering direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) steeper than a side (base) in contact with the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. slanted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050 is formed in a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and the direction of circulation of the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2016 can be changed from the entering direction to the rearward direction. It is a changeable piece 2051 that can be changed.

On the other hand, the remaining guide piece portion 2050 extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to the same portion as the rear surface of the flange portion 2043, and is the lowest portion of the arcuately curved bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. It extends vertically upward from the left and right sides of the area. The pair of guide piece portions 2050 are inclined at a loose angle with respect to the horizontal so that the upper end surface (tip surface) is lowered rearward, forming a rear piece portion 2052 capable of guiding the game ball B backward. ing. The rear piece portion 2052 protrudes upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 as a whole. The pair of rear piece portions 2052 are provided so that the portion therebetween is located in front of the rear guide piece portion 2045 .

As described above, the guide piece portion 2050 of the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment is provided with one change piece portion 2051 and two (a pair of) rear piece portions 2052 separately.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 188(a), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the entering ball direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the entering ball direction (direction parallel) Abuts on the upper end surface (tip surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the , and the flow direction is changed from the entrance direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the rearward and downward direction. Since this change piece 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the prize winning opening 2016 from directly above the lower pair of rear pieces 2052, part of which is the remaining guide piece 2050, the change piece 2051 The game ball B, which has been changed to the rear, abuts on the upper end surfaces (tip surfaces) of the pair of rear pieces 2052, and rolls rearward while straddling the pair of rear pieces 2052. The pair of rear pieces 2052 allows the game ball B to be straightened backward. Then, the game ball B guided backward rolls backward on the upper end surfaces of the rear guiding piece portions 2045 from the rear ends of the pair of rear piece portions 2052 . As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

Thus, according to the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the upper end face (tip end face) of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not hit the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In addition, a part (upper end side) of the changing piece portion 2051 extends toward the entrance side of the winning opening 2016 from directly above the rear piece portion 2052 (in plan view, the upper end surface of the changing piece portion 2051 and the rear piece Because it intersects the upper end surface of the part 2052), the game ball B that has entered (entered) the winning opening 2016 is changed in the distribution direction by the change piece 2051, and backward by the rear piece 2052. can be induced. Thereby, even if the ball entering direction of the winning hole 2016 is close to the horizontal direction, the entered game ball B can be guided backward in a good condition.

Furthermore, as in the winning opening unit 2040 of the present embodiment, even if the positions of the guide piece portion 2050 and the rear guide piece portion 2045 provided on the front and rear sides are different and are not continuous, the rear side rear guide piece Since the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the portion 2045 is configured lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042, it does not interfere with the downflow of the game ball B.

Next, the winning opening unit 2040 shown in FIG. 188(b) will be described. The receiving portion 2042 of the prize winning port unit 2040 has a side wall 2042 a that stands vertically so as to face the prize winning port 2016 . The bottom surface of this receiving portion 2042 is formed in a flat shape and is gently inclined so as to be lowered rearward. The guide piece portion 2050 is provided within the receiving portion 2042 . The flange portion 2043 extends outward from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 . The rear extension portion 2044 extends rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2043 .

The prize-winning unit 2040 is erected vertically upward from the bottom surface of the rearward extension 2044, and the upper end surface is gently inclined downward toward the rear, and the entire length of the rearward extension 2044 It further has a rear guiding piece portion 2045 that extends back and forth across. The front end of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 is provided at a position lower than the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 . In the present embodiment, a pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 are provided at the winning opening 2016 on the left side in the paper surface of FIG. 188, and one rear guiding piece portion 2045 is provided at the winning opening 2016 on the right side.

The prize winning port unit 2040 has a front plate portion 2041, a receiving portion 2042, a guide piece portion 2050, a flange portion 2043, a rear extension portion 2044, and a rear guide piece portion 2045, which are integrally formed.

The guiding piece portion 2050 of the prize winning opening unit 2040 of this embodiment extends forward and backward from the rear surface of the front plate portion 2041 to a portion forward of the rear end of the receiving portion 2042, and enters from the side wall 2042a of the receiving portion 2042. It extends to a portion near the entrance of the winning opening 2016 in a direction (parallel direction) facing the ball direction. The guide piece portion 2050 extending in a direction opposite to (parallel to) the entering direction has an upper end surface (tip surface) steeper than a side (bottom) in contact with the side wall 2042a of the receiving portion 2042. tilted at an angle. Therefore, the shape of the side surface of the guiding piece portion 2050 is formed in a shape close to a right-angled isosceles triangle, and it is possible to change the direction of circulation of the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2016 from the entering direction to the rearward direction. A change piece portion 2051 is formed.

In the winning hole unit 2040 of FIG. 188(b), when the game ball B enters the winning hole 2016 along the entering ball direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the direction opposite to the entering ball direction (parallel direction) Abuts on the tip end surface (upper end surface) of the change piece portion 2051 provided in the , and the flow direction is changed from the entrance direction along the front surface of the game panel 1100 to the backward and downward direction. Since the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 gently slanted toward the rear is provided below the changing piece portion 2051, the game ball B whose circulation direction is changed to the rear by the changing piece portion 2051 can be received. It contacts the bottom surface of the portion 2042 and rolls backward. Then, the game ball B that rolls backward on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042 moves from the rear end of the receiving portion 2042 so as to straddle the pair of rear guide piece portions 2045 or the upper end surface of one rear guide piece portion 2045. will roll backwards. As a result, the game ball B that has entered (accepted) the winning hole 2016 can be guided backward smoothly and quickly.

Thus, according to the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the guiding piece portion 2050 that guides the game ball B backward extends in a direction (parallel direction) opposite to the direction of the ball entering the winning hole 2016. Since it has the changing piece portion 2051 , the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 can be brought into contact with the tip surface (upper end surface) of the changing piece portion 2051 . As a result, the game ball B does not contact the corner sides between the upper end surface and the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, the side surface of the guide piece portion 2050, etc., and the game ball B does not hit the corner sides and the side surfaces. Since it is possible to prevent the guiding piece portion 2050 from being easily damaged due to early fatigue due to the abutment, the fragments of the damaged guiding piece portion 2050 do not cause ball clogging, and the game due to ball clogging is prevented. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption, and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, like the winning hole unit 2040 of the present embodiment, the upstream end (front end) of the upper end surface of the rear guide piece portion 2045 on the rear side of the receiving portion 2042 is the game ball B on the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2042. Since it is configured to be lower than the portion where the game ball B flows down, it does not become an obstacle.

In the above-described embodiment, the modified piece portion 2051 of the guide piece portion 2050 has a triangular side surface, that is, has a linear flat upper end surface (tip surface), but is limited to this. Instead, it may be a curved surface in which the upper end surface (tip side) is curved in an arc shape.

By the way, like the winning opening 2016 shown in FIG. 187(a), if the opening 2043a through which the game ball B passes in the flange portion 2043 is a through hole, that is, the flange portion 2043 is above the winning opening 2016 in front view. When the opening 2043a is formed of a through-hole extending to and through which the game ball B passes, regardless of whether the ball entering direction of the winning opening 2016 is in the vertical direction or the direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the guiding It is desirable that the upper end surface (tip surface) of the modified piece portion 2051 (or the sharp piece portion) of the piece portion 2050 is curved in an arc shape.

More specifically, if the opening 2043a of the flange portion 2043 is a through hole, the flange portion 2043 abutting on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) exists on the rear end side of the entrance of the prize winning port 2016. Therefore, the rear end of the entrance of the prize winning port 2016 is positioned forward by the thickness of the flange portion 2043, and the length of the prize winning port 2016 in the front-rear direction is the thickness of the flange portion 2043. becomes smaller. If the winning opening 2016 is provided with a changeable piece 2051 having a triangular side surface and a flat upper end surface (tip surface), the changeable piece 2051 (induction piece 2051) is formed from the upper end of the opening 2043a. 2050) becomes a state in which the distance from the upper end of the change piece 2051 to the lower part becomes shorter and then longer, so that the size of the flow path of the game ball B is partially narrowed, so that the game The speedy circulation of the balls B is suppressed, and there is a possibility that the game balls B are stagnated or clogged with balls. On the other hand, if the upper end surface (tip surface) of the changeable piece portion 2051 is a curved surface that is curved in a circular arc shape, the upper end of the opening portion 2043a of the flange portion 2043 extends from the changeable piece portion 2051 (the guide piece portion) 2050) hardly changes even if it goes downward from the upper end of the change piece part 2051, and the size of the flow path of the game ball B can be kept substantially constant. As a result, the circulation of the game balls B that have entered (accepted) the winning opening 2016 is not restricted, and the game balls B can be quickly circulated, causing stagnation of the game balls B, ball clogging, and the like. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 185, for the guiding piece portion 2050 of the winning opening 2016 in which the ball entry direction of the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, a guiding device having a function of preventing the ball from getting stuck as shown in FIG. The configuration of piece 2035 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from being stuck even in the winning hole 2016 where the direction of entering the ball is inclined.

[12. Relationship between the front unit and the game panel on the game board]
Next, the relationship (attachment relationship) between the front unit 2000 and the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192 and the like. FIG. 190(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the starter unit and the center accessory in the front unit of another embodiment from the front, and (b) is the positioning pin, the mounting hole, and the game panel in (a). It is an explanatory view showing an enlarged cross-section of the relationship between. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a positioning pin portion in a front unit of a further different embodiment. FIG. 192(a) is an explanatory view showing the position of a positioning pin in a front unit of a further different embodiment from the front, (b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing (b) ) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the portion of ) is brought into contact with the game panel in a cross section. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the site|part of the same structure as embodiment mentioned above.

As shown in FIG. 190(a), the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in this embodiment extends in a flat plate shape to the left and right sides with the first starting port 2004 in between, and the game panel 1100 (panel It has a flange portion 2103 that contacts the front surface of the plate 1110). The starter unit 2100 also has a mounting hole 2106 for attaching the starter unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, and a positioning pin 2107 for positioning the starter unit 2100 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100. there is

The mounting hole 2106 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 190(b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2103 in the front-rear direction. The positioning pin 2107 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2103 in a cylindrical shape and has a conical tip. The mounting hole 2106 and the positioning pin 2107 of the starting port unit 2100 are paired so that the distance L1 between their centers is within a predetermined range (for example, 5 mm to 8 mm). In the left and right flange portions 2103, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 are provided symmetrically with respect to a vertical center line CL passing through the center of the first starting port 2004 in the left-right direction.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in this embodiment is formed in the shape of a frame as a whole. It has an attachment hole 2504 for attachment to the game panel 1100 and a positioning pin 2505 for positioning the center accessory 2500 at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100 .

The mounting hole 2504 is a countersunk hole (see FIG. 190(b)) that penetrates the flange portion 2502 in the front-rear direction. The positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 in a cylindrical shape and has a conical tip. The mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500 are paired so that the distance L1 between their centers is within a predetermined range (for example, 5 mm to 8 mm).

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a stage 2513 on the lower side of the frame for rolling the game ball B in the horizontal direction and then releasing it into the game area 5a. This center accessory 2500 is provided with a flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513, and two sets of attachments are provided at a portion of the flange portion 2502 below the stage 2513 with the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 therebetween. Holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on the left and right sides, respectively.

Two sets of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 provided below the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 are centered in the center of the center release portion 2513a in the left-right direction, that is, the center passing through the center in the left-right direction of the first starting port 2004. They are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to the line CL. Although illustration is omitted, the center line CL passes through the center of two obstacle nails N (so-called umbilical nails) implanted directly above the first starting port 2004 .

In this embodiment, the two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) affect the game, such as the first starting port 2004, the central ejection portion 2513a of the stage 2513, and the navel nail. are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to a center line CL passing through the center of a certain portion. As a result, by inserting the positioning pins 2107 and 2505 of the starting port unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500 into the corresponding positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 and the stage 2513 The central release portion 2513a can be accurately positioned at a specific position (on the center line CL) within the game area 5a. As a result, the acceptance probability that the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is accepted in the lower first start port 2004 can be within a desired range, and the game board 5 Variation for each (product) can be reduced as much as possible.

In addition, since the positioning pins 2107 and the positioning pins 2505 are provided symmetrically with respect to the center line CL, the game panel 1100, the starter unit 2100, and the center accessory may be affected by changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity. Even if 2500, etc. expand and contract and deform respectively, the center of the first starting port 2004 and the center discharge part 2513a can be maintained on the center line CL, and the reception of the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 It is possible to prevent the probability from changing.

In addition, since it has a plurality of positioning pins 2505, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the front surface of the game panel 1100, the positioning pins 2505 can be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100. Since the center accessory 2500 can be positioned, when the mounting screw is screwed into the screw hole 1116 of the game panel 1100 through the attachment hole 2504, the center accessory 2500 may move or float from the game panel 1100. In addition, even if the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2504 and tightened, the center accessory 2500 will not move slightly. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to the specific position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Furthermore, this embodiment does not provide a member, such as a front plate portion, which is spaced forward from the flange portion 2502 in front of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 extends rearward. In other words, the positioning pin 2505 is not provided at the rear portion of the flange portion 2502 where the front plate portion is provided, which is spaced forward from the flange portion 2502 . As a result, when the game board 5 is assembled, when the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the front plate portion does not interfere with the positioning pin 2505 on the flange portion 2502. The positioning pin 2505 can be reliably pushed into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 by pressing the front surface of the provided portion. In addition, a positioning pin 2505 may be provided at a rear portion of the front plate portion where the operator's finger can be inserted between the flange portion 2502 and the front plate portion.

In the above-described embodiment, two sets of mounting holes 2106 and positioning pins 2107 (mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505) are applied to the first starting port 2004 (central release portion 2513a of stage 2513). However, it is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, and the ordinary winning opening 2008, etc. may be applied.

Next, an embodiment different from the above in the part where the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided in the center accessory 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a groove portion 2506 recessed forward so as to surround the outer periphery of the positioning pin 2505 is formed at the base of the positioning pin 2505 projecting backward. , has.

By the way, when the center accessory 2500 is formed by injection molding or the like, the base of the positioning pin 2505 is likely to be rounded, and the base of the positioning pin 2505 is thickened by the R. Then, when the positioning pin 2505 has an R attached to its base, and it is attempted to be inserted into the positioning hole 2505 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the thickened portion of the base enters the positioning hole 1117. The insertion of the positioning pin 2505 stops halfway, and the insertion of the positioning pin 2505 is incomplete (a state in which there is a gap between the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 and the front surface of the game panel 1100). , the center accessory 2500 may be attached to the game panel 1100. A decorative or protective sheet is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). Burrs may form on the leading edge. When the positioning pin 2505 is inserted into the positioning hole 1117 with burrs on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117, the burr is caught between the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the flange portion 2502. As a result, the center accessory 2500 may be attached to the game panel 1100 with the positioning pin 2505 inserted incompletely. As described above, if the positioning pin 2505 is incompletely inserted, the positioning effect cannot be sufficiently exhibited, and the above-described effects may not be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange 2502, the base of the positioning pin 2505 is located in the groove 2506 in front of the rear surface of the flange 2502. Even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the portion of the positioning pin 2505 behind the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 does not become thicker than the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, and the thickness of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 ( diameter) can be made uniform, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 contacts the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 . Also, even if there is a burr on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burr is accommodated in the groove portion 2506 so that the burr is sandwiched between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. The positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 . Accordingly, the positioning effect of the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

In addition, even if the positioning pin 2505 has an R at its base, the portion thickened by the R can be moved forward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 due to the presence of the groove portion 2506, so that the positioning pin 2505 can be A gap does not occur between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 due to imperfect insertion into the positioning hole 1117 due to the thickened base portion. In addition, since the burr generated at the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 can be accommodated in the groove portion 2506, the burr between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 at the portion of the mounting hole 2504 of the flange portion 2502 is caused by the burr. No gap occurs. Therefore, the center accessory 2500 is not attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502, and the center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1100 is There is no rattling.

Furthermore, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 on the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of the positioning pin 2505 on the flange portion 2502 during the injection molding of the center accessory 2500. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks that dent the front side of the flange portion 2502 when the molten resin is cured.

In the above-described embodiment, the groove 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 of the center accessory 2500. However, the groove is not limited to this, and the groove is provided on the starting port unit 2100, the side It may be provided in a member attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 such as the unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the gate member 2600, or the like.

Next, an embodiment different from the above in the part where the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided in the center accessory 2500 will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192, a seat surface portion 2507 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is provided. The seat surface portion 2507 has a flat rear surface parallel to the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 .

A pair of mounting holes 2504 and a positioning pin 2505 are provided at the seat surface portion 2507 . In other words, the seat surface portion 2507 is provided so as to surround the pair of mounting holes 2504 and the positioning pins 2505 . Therefore, the outer shape of the seat portion 2507 is teardrop-shaped. The seat surface portion 2507 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 by a predetermined length (for example, in the range of 0.2 mm to 1 mm).

According to this embodiment, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the seating surface portion 2507 abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 are separated from each other. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed between them. As a result, even if the flange part 2502 is wavy when the center role 2500 is injection molded, the unevenness caused by the wavy can be absorbed by the gap, and the center role 2500 is securely attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加be able to.

In addition, when the rate of expansion and contraction of the center accessory 2500 is different from that of the game panel 1100 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the seat surface portion 2507 forms a gap between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502. Therefore, the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 can be absorbed by the gap, and distortion of the center accessory 2500 can be suppressed.

Further, since the seat surface portion 2507 is provided to surround the pair of mounting holes 2504 and the positioning pin 2505, for example, if the center accessory 2500 is transparent, the teardrop-shaped seat surface portion 2507 can be visually recognized from the front side. Therefore, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat surface portion 2507, and the labor required for attachment can be simplified.

In the above-described embodiment, the seat surface portion 2507 is provided in the center accessory 2500, but this is not a limitation, and the seat surface portion is the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the upper left side unit 2300. , the lower right unit 2400, the gate member 2600, and other members attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 may be provided.

[13. Detailed Configuration of Distribution Passage with Game Ball Detection Sensor]
Next, the detailed configuration of the distribution passage 2061 having the game ball B detection sensor 2060 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 193(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a distribution passage in which the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution passage of an embodiment different from (a). and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a distribution passage having a conventional detection sensor. In this embodiment, a guiding portion 2062 for guiding the game ball B is provided in the circulation passage 2061 to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (so-called double counting). It should be noted that the “horizontal direction” hereinafter may be a horizontal direction, and may be the left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1 or the front-back direction in the pachinko machine 1 .

First, a conventional circulation passage 2920 shown in FIG. 193(c) will be described. The conventional flow passage 2920 has a first horizontal portion 2920a extending horizontally so that the downstream side is lower, and a first vertical portion 2920b vertically extending downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2920a. a second horizontal portion 2920c extending horizontally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b so that the downstream side is lower; and a second horizontal portion 2920c vertically extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion and two longitudinal sections 2920d. A detection sensor 2060 for detecting the game ball B is provided in the middle of the first vertical portion 2920b. The second horizontal portion 2920c is provided below the first horizontal portion 2920a. Therefore, downstream of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by the first vertical portion 2920b, the second horizontal portion 2920c, and the second vertical portion 2920d.

In the conventional circulation passage 2920, the outer corner of the portion where the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2920b and the upstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c are in contact is the outer corner of the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2920b and the second horizontal portion 2920c. It is in contact with the bottom wall. In addition, the outer corner of the portion where the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the upstream end of the second vertical portion 2920d are in contact is where the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2920d are in contact. It is in the form of For this reason, the conventional circulation passage 2920 has walls in two different directions with which the game ball B can contact at the same time. In other words, the conventional circulation passage 2920 has a portion where walls in different directions contact the game ball B at the same time, which may hinder the circulation of the game ball B.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. When the game ball B in contact with the inner surface on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2920b in the hole 2060a contacts from above, the center of the game ball B on the lower side is more than the center of the game ball B on the upper side. Since it is located on the outer wall side of one vertical portion 2920b, the load from the upper game ball B causes the lower game ball B to move to the outer wall side of the first vertical portion 2920b, that is, the upstream side of the second horizontal portion 2920c. As a result, the lower game ball B cannot move to the downstream side of the second horizontal portion 2920c.

Therefore, the game ball B on the upper side rebounds upward due to the recoil of contact with the game ball B on the lower side from above, and the game ball B on the upper side moves up and down in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. As a result, the game ball B on the upper side is detected by the detection sensor 2060 multiple times. Therefore, there is a problem that the detection sensor 2060 detects (erroneously detects) more game balls B than actually circulated in the circulation passage 2920 . If the detection sensor 2060 makes an erroneous detection, the extra payout of the game balls B increases the burden on the game hall side, or a discrepancy with the count number of the game balls B separately counted causes problems such as ball clogging. There is a problem that it is determined that the player is present and causes the game to be interrupted. In addition, as described above, since the game ball B on the lower side cannot move to the downstream side of the second horizontal portion 2920c, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs in the circulation passage 2920.

Although not shown, the game ball B, which is in contact with the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2920d, is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2920c from the upstream side. Since the center of the game ball B on the downstream side is located above the center of the game ball B on the upstream side, the game ball B on the downstream side will move upward (second horizontal part 2920c), the game ball B on the downstream side cannot flow down the second vertical portion 2920d, and there is a risk of ball clogging. Then, when the stuck game ball B due to the occurrence of ball clogging in the relevant part accumulates below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 (downstream end of the first vertical part 2920b), the game ball B flowing down from the upstream A game ball B below the detection hole 2060a is contacted and rebounded, so that the game ball moves up and down in the detection hole 2060a and may be detected multiple times, thus causing the same problem as described above.

On the other hand, the circulation passage 2061 of the present embodiment includes a first horizontal portion 2061a extending in the horizontal direction so that the downstream side is lower, and a first horizontal portion 2061a vertically extending downward from the downstream end of the first horizontal portion 2061a. One vertical portion 2061b, a second horizontal portion 2061c horizontally extending from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b so that the downstream side is lower, and a vertical portion 2061c vertically extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. and a protruding second vertical portion 2061d.

The first horizontal portion 2061a and the second horizontal portion 2061c are gently inclined at an angle of θ1 (for example, within the range of 2 to 7 degrees, here 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal. The second horizontal portion 2061c is provided below the first horizontal portion 2061a. This circulation passage 2061 is provided with a detection sensor 2060 for detecting the game ball B in the middle of the first vertical portion 2061b. Therefore, on the downstream side of the detection sensor 2060, the passage is cranked by part of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c, and the second vertical portion 2061d.

Further, the circulation passage 2061 has a first horizontal portion 2061 a provided above the detection sensor 2060 and a second horizontal portion 2061 c provided below the detection sensor 2060 . As a result, the distribution passage 2061 meanders around the detection sensor 2060 in the vertical direction, so that the lateral size of the distribution passage 2061 can be made compact. In addition, when the first horizontal portion 2061a and the second horizontal portion 2061c wrap around the detection sensor 2060 in the vertical direction, the communication passage 2061 has a vertical length of the first vertical portion 2061b. It is formed to the minimum length required for installation. The length of the first vertical portion 2061b (the distance from the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a to the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c) is within the range of 2.5 times to 3.5 times the diameter of the game ball B. Inside. Thereby, while being able to provide the detection sensor 2060 in the 1st vertical part 2061b, the increase in the circulation speed (falling speed) of the game ball B can be suppressed in the 1st vertical part 2061b.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the circulation passage 2061 of this embodiment is located between the top wall of the first horizontal portion 2061a and the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b. and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d. The guide portion 2062A in FIG. 193(a) is formed in an arc shape with a radius r centered on the lower end of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b.

It is desirable that the radius r of the arc of the guiding portion 2062A is larger than the diameter of the game ball B. More specifically, the arc-shaped radius r of the guiding portion 2062A is 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm to 16 mm, preferably 11 mm to 13 mm). is desirable. The reason for limiting the radius r of the arc-shaped guide portion 2062A within the above range is that if the radius r of the guide portion 2062A is smaller than this range, the game ball directly below the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 in the guide portion 2062A Since the angle of the tangential line of the contact portion of B becomes close to horizontal, the force for guiding the game ball B in the horizontal direction is weakened, and the game ball B does not quickly move downstream. This is because the repulsive force increases when the later game ball B comes into contact with the starting game ball B, and there is a risk that the later game ball B bounces upward and is detected again by the detection sensor 2060 . Further, if the radius r of the guiding portion 2062A is larger than this range, the horizontal and vertical directions of the circulation passage 2061 become unnecessarily large, and there is a risk that the degree of freedom in arranging the circulation passage 2061 may decrease. By increasing the height of the horizontal portion 2061c, the speed of the game ball B flowing down from the first vertical portion 2061b to the second horizontal portion 2061c becomes faster, and the impact when contacting the guide portion 2062A becomes stronger. This is because there is a risk that the flow path 2061 will be quickly fatigued and easily damaged by the impact. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the radius r of the arc is 12 mm.

According to the present embodiment, circular Since the arcuate guiding portion 2062A is provided, the wall in two different directions does not come into contact with the game ball B at the same time, and there is no part that hinders the circulation of the game ball B. As a result, the game ball B that has passed through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 can be quickly moved downstream from below the detection hole 2060a by the arc-shaped guiding portion 2062A. Even if the later (upper) game ball B contacts the game ball B on the side), the starting game ball B moves downstream (horizontal direction) due to the impact of the contact of the later game ball B. Since the repulsive force acting on the later game ball B is reduced as much as possible, the later game ball B does not rebound upstream, and the game ball B is not detected multiple times by the detection sensor. . Therefore, since the number of game balls B circulating in the circulation passage 2061 can be accurately detected (counted), it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being put out due to unnecessary detection, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress the burden on the side of the game hall that is playing, and there is no discrepancy with the count number of the game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor, and the game is interrupted due to the discrepancy. can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to the interruption of the game.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B can be quickly guided downstream by the arc-shaped guiding portion 2062A, so that the occurrence of ball clogging in the circulation passage 2061 can be prevented. be able to.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the distribution passage 2061 is cranked, the vertical dimension of the distribution passage 2061 can be minimized, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the distribution passage 2061 can be increased. can.

By the way, although illustration is omitted, in the conventional circulation passage 2920, the length of the first vertical portion 2920b is increased and the detection sensor 2060 is provided near the upper end of the first vertical portion 2920b. When the part of 2060 on the downstream side of the detection hole 2060a extends straight downward, immediately after the starting game ball B passes through the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060, the later game ball B with a high circulation speed passes through the detection hole 2060a and collides with the starting game ball B, the later game ball B may bounce upward and be detected (double counted) by the detection sensor 2060 again, resulting in the same problem as described above. occurs. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the length of the first vertical portion 2061b is shortened, the passage is cranked downstream of the detection sensor 2060, and the leading game ball B is detected by the guide portion 2062. The sensor 2060 can be quickly moved from the portion below the detection hole 2060a. In other words, by the guiding portion 2062 directly below the detection sensor 2060, the centers of the starting game ball B and the following game ball B can be quickly shifted in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the later game ball B with a high speed to collide with the first game ball B at the part immediately below the detection hole 2060a, and even if it collides, it is rebounded laterally and rebounded upward. It is possible to prevent the subsequent game ball B from being detected (double counted) again by the detection sensor 2060, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Next, another embodiment of the circulation passage 2061 shown in FIG. 193(b) will be described. The distribution passage 2061 of this embodiment is the same as the distribution passage 2061 in FIG. 193(a) except for the shape of the guide portion 2062B, and the description of the same structure is omitted. The guide portion 2062B of the flow passage 2061 is formed in a straight line inclined at an angle of θ2 with respect to the vertical line, and is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062. The center of the game ball B on the side is in contact with the inner surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b. It is formed so as to be spaced apart by a distance L2 in the downstream direction.

It is desirable that the inclination angle θ2 of the guide portion 2062B that is linearly inclined is within the range of 40 degrees to 50 degrees. The reason for limiting the inclination angle of the guiding portion 2062B to the above range is that if the inclination angle is smaller than the above range, the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 will move in the horizontal direction when it comes into contact with the ball. Since the force to guide the game ball B is weakened and the game ball B does not move downstream quickly, the repulsive force when the later game ball B contacts the starting game ball B in contact with the guide part 2062B is large. This is because there is a possibility that the subsequent game ball B bounces upward and is detected again by the detection sensor 2060 . In addition, if the inclination angle is larger than the above range, the force that guides the game ball B downward when the game ball B comes into contact with it becomes stronger, so that the impact acting on the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c is relatively high. This is because the flow path 2061 may be fatigued early due to the impact and may be easily damaged. Incidentally, in this embodiment, θ2 is set to 45 degrees.

Also, the distance L2 between the center of the game ball B on the lower side and the center of the game ball B on the upper side is preferably in the range of 0 mm to 5.5 mm, preferably 3 mm to 4 mm. The reason why the distance L2 is limited within this range is that the distance L2 is smaller than this range (the center of the lower game ball B is positioned upstream of the second horizontal part 2061c from the height of the upper game ball B). ), the game ball B flowing down from the detection sensor 2060 is likely to contact the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c substantially at the same time as the guide portion 2062B. This is because the upward repulsive force of the game ball B increases, and there is a possibility that the game ball B bounces back toward the detection sensor 2060 and is detected again. Further, when the distance L2 is larger than this range, the distance from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface on the side closer to the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b in the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 to the inclined guide portion 2062B becomes shorter. Since the flow path becomes narrower, the game ball B is likely to stagnate. This is because there is a risk of being detected. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the distance L2 is set to 3.5 mm.

According to this embodiment, straight lines are drawn between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d. In addition, the center of the game ball B that is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal part 2061c and the guide part 2062 is the inner wall of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060. A guide portion 2062B is provided so as to be separated by a distance L2 in the downstream direction of the second horizontal portion 2061c from the center of the game ball B that is in contact with the downstream portion of the second horizontal portion 2061c. As a result, the lower game ball B that is in contact with the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the guide portion 2062B at the same time is placed on the inner surface of the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 on the same side as the inner wall of the first vertical portion 2061b. When the upper game ball B in contact comes into contact, the lower game ball B is pressed downstream of the second horizontal part 2061c by the load from the upper game ball B, and the downstream game ball B separates from the guiding portion 2062B and moves downstream.

Therefore, even if the game ball B on the upstream side comes into contact with the game ball B on the downstream side, the game ball B on the downstream side moves downstream due to the impact of the game ball B on the upstream side coming into contact with the game ball B on the upstream side. Since the repulsive force acting on the game ball B is as small as possible, the game ball B on the upstream side will not bounce back to the upstream side, and the game ball B will not be detected multiple times by the detection sensor. . As a result, the number of game balls B circulating in the circulation passage 2061 can be accurately detected (counted), so that the game balls B can be prevented from being put out due to unnecessary detection, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to suppress the burden on the installed game hall side, and there is no discrepancy between the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor and the number of game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor. Interruption can be avoided, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to the interruption of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the game ball B on the downstream side can be moved downstream by the inclined guiding portion 2062B, the occurrence of ball clogging in the circulation passage 2061 is prevented. can do.

As described above, according to the embodiment of FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), even if the later game ball B comes into contact with the starting game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the guiding part 2062 Since it is possible to suppress the rebound of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and the number of game balls B (the number of ) can be provided.

In addition, by the guidance portion 2062 provided between the top wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, the game ball B that has circulated through the second horizontal portion 2061c is quickly moved to the second vertical portion. 2061d, it is possible to suppress congestion of a plurality of game balls B whose momentum has been weakened by circulating in the lateral direction in the second horizontal portion 2061c, and to avoid congestion. It is possible to avoid the game ball B coming in contact with the game ball B which is already playing and rebounding to the detection sensor 2060 side, and prevent one game ball B from being detected a plurality of times by the detection sensor 2060.例文帳に追加As a result, (the number of) game balls B circulating in the circulation passage 2061 can be accurately detected.

For this reason, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (also referred to as double counting, erroneous detection, etc.). It is possible to prevent the provision of a privilege such as the payout of the game ball B due to unnecessary detection), and suppress the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, double counting of the game balls B can be prevented, so that discrepancies between the counted number of the game balls B and the number of the game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor can be prevented. By avoiding the interruption of the game caused by the discrepancy, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to the interruption of the game.

In addition, since the second horizontal portion 2061c extends laterally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the second horizontal portion 2061c can suppress an increase in the circulation speed of the game ball B, The distribution speed (momentum) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060 can be weakened, and the game ball B is placed in a good state (for example, with less impact) with respect to the member provided on the downstream side of the distribution passage 2061. state, rectified state, etc.).

Furthermore, in the distribution passage 2601, the first horizontal portion 2061a extending in the horizontal direction is provided upstream of the first vertical portion 2061b in which the detection sensor 2060 is provided. It is possible to suppress the increase in the circulation speed of the game ball B, and by weakening the momentum of the game ball B, the game ball B circulates through the first horizontal part 2061a, and the top wall of the first horizontal part 2061a and the first vertical part 2061b When the game ball B between the outer wall and the outer wall of the guide portion 2602 contacts the guide portion 2602, it can be made difficult to rebound to the upstream side, and can be smoothly guided downward by the guide portion 2062. The detection sensor 2060 directly below can reliably detect each one.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding portion 2062 of the circulation passage 2061 has a wall shape, but is not limited to this, and may be a rib-like guiding portion.

In addition, as the detection sensors 2060 in the above embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the first big winning opening sensor 2525 , a second large winning opening sensor 2561, a pseudo large winning opening sensor 2403 used for presentation, an out sensor 664, and the like.

[14. Game ball stop prevention part on rolling surface]
Next, the stop prevention portion 2071 of the game ball B on the rolling surface 2070 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 194(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a stop prevention portion for a game ball on a rolling surface, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention portion of an embodiment different from (a). c) is an explanatory diagram showing a stop prevention portion of a further different embodiment, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional rolling surface without a stop prevention portion. The rolling surface 2070 of this embodiment has a portion (horizontal portion 2070a) in contact with the horizontal line (horizontal surface) from below, and a stop prevention portion 2071 for preventing the game ball B from stopping on the horizontal portion 2070a. , furthermore.

First, the conventional rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls is, as shown in FIG. It has a horizontal portion 2070a in contact with the horizontal line (or horizontal plane). As a result, depending on the rolling direction (distribution direction) or rolling speed (distribution speed) of the game ball B, the game ball B may stop on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will decrease due to the stagnation of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stop prevention portion 2071 is provided on the horizontal horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, the stop prevention portion 2071 can prevent the game ball B from stopping at that portion. can.

More specifically, the stop prevention portion 2071A shown in FIG. 194(a) protrudes upward in a semicircular arc with a predetermined width (for example, 1 mm to 3 mm) in the left-right direction, and extends in the front-rear direction with the same cross-sectional shape. It is a projecting ridge. A stop prevention portion 2071B shown in FIG. 194(b) protrudes upward in a triangular shape having a predetermined length (for example, 1 mm to 3 mm) at its base, and has the same cross-sectional shape and extends in the front-rear direction. Article. The height of the stop prevention part 2071 is a height that the game ball B can climb over, for example, in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm (or 0.1 to 0.3 times the diameter of the game ball B). is within.

According to this embodiment, since the stop prevention portion 2071 protruding in a semicircular or triangular shape is provided on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070, the game ball B stops on the horizontal portion 2070a of the rolling surface 2070. you can't. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stalled due to the game ball B stopping on the rolling surface 2070, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the height of the stop prevention portion 2071 is set to a height that the game ball B can overcome, depending on the rolling speed of the game ball B, the horizontal portion 2070a (stop prevention portion 2071) may be rolled. Since the game ball B can roll from one side to the other side of the moving surface 2070, the function as the rolling surface 2070 on which the game ball B rolls can be exhibited, and the rolling surface 2070 can be used by the player. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball B in , and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In the above-described embodiment, the stop prevention portion 2071 is a projection, but the stop prevention portion 2071 is not limited to this. It is good as

A stop preventing portion 2071C shown in FIG. 194(c) has a columnar shape extending in the front-rear direction at a portion of the rolling surface 2070 directly above the horizontal portion 2070a. This columnar stop prevention part 2071C is provided within a predetermined range (for example, within a range of 1 mm to 3 mm) upward from the rolling surface 2070, and the game ball B rolling on the rolling surface 2070 is opposite. It is possible to climb over to the side. This stop preventing portion 2071C can also provide the same effects as described above.

As the columnar stop prevention portion 2071C, an obstacle nail N planted in the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) may be used, or a flange for attaching the rolling surface 2070 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 may be used. It may extend forward from the part.

The rolling surface 2070 of this embodiment may be provided in the starting unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the lower right unit 2400 (pseudo attacker unit), the center accessory 2500, the gate member 2600, and the like. can. Also, the rolling surface 2070 may be movable (for example, a windmill, a movable shelf, a distribution member, an opening/closing door, etc.).

In addition, when there is a space in front or behind the rolling surface 2070 (at least the horizontal part 2070a) in which the game ball B can circulate, the stop prevention part 2071 guides the game ball B to the space side. Forms (eg, protrusions, grooves, etc.) may also be used. In this case, the rolling surface 2070 may be the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the stop preventing portion 2071 may be the central discharge portion 2513a.

[15. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the rear unit of the present invention, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is the holder of the present invention, and the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 of the present embodiment is The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 in this embodiment is the specific surface part of the present invention. Side walls of the back box 3010 correspond to the restricting portions of the present invention.

[16. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the game board 5, the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200 visible through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) provided with the game area 5a in front is , the back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120) holds the back box 3010, and the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 protrudes forward from the back box 3010. The distance from the user to the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be made shorter than before, and the decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be made more visible. At this time, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided behind the front surface of the back box 3010, the functional surface portion 3011 does not come into contact with the game panel 1100, and the back box 3010 (back unit 3000) is not a problem. It can be attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 without any need, and the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be made more conspicuous than the functional surface portion 3011.例文帳に追加In addition, since the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 projects forward from the front surface of the back box 3010, the position of the front surface (decoration) of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted to the front and rear of the game area 5a. Since the position of the direction can be approached as much as possible, when the game area 5a is focused, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is also focused. The decoration of 3201 can be clearly visually recognized, and the decoration of the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can be surely shown to the player. As described above, the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be made conspicuous, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the decorative effect of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be fully and surely exhibited. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 can execute a predetermined effect (light emitting effect) according to the progress of the game, if the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 executes the predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. Since the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be made conspicuous by the effect, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can enjoy the effect by the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201. It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, raise the player's sense of expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the back box 3010 holding the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is provided with the functional surface portion 3011, for example, when assembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 is attached to the back box 3010. is held, the back front peripheral edge decoration is placed between the predetermined member 3015 and the functional surface portion 3011 when the front end side is turned downward on the predetermined member 3015 consisting of a mounting table such as a work table. By interposing a pillar-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member 3016 higher than the distance from the front surface of the body 3201 to the functional surface portion 3011, it is possible to prevent the predetermined member 3015 from contacting the front surface of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201. . At this time, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 is provided so as to surround the center of gravity of the back unit 3000, the back box 3010 tilts or swings when the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is placed face down. The back box 3010 can be placed face down in a stable state. As a result, the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be prevented from being damaged by the contact of the predetermined member 3015, the back front peripheral edge decoration 3201 can be maintained in good condition, and the back front peripheral edge decoration can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defective products (defective products) due to scratches on the body 3201, and to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as described above, since the functional surface portion 3011 of the back box 3010 can avoid the contact between the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 and the predetermined member 3015, the back box 3010 holding the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be prevented from contacting the predetermined member 3015. is placed face down, other members (for example, the back box rear unit 3030) can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 and wiring work can be performed.

Furthermore, since the back box 3010 is provided with the functional surface portion 3011, compared to the case where the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 is provided with the functional surface portion, the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 is not held during assembly. The back box 3010 can be placed face down even in the state, and various working states can be handled.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a restricting portion (here, the peripheral wall of the functional surface portion 3011 recessed rearward in the back box 3010) capable of restricting the relative movement of the intermediate member 3016 in contact with the functional surface portion 3011. Therefore, in assembly work or the like, when the intermediate member 3016 is interposed between a predetermined member 3015 such as a workbench and the functional surface portion 3011 and the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 is placed face down, the intermediate member 3016 is By coming into contact with the restricting portion, it is possible to restrict the movement of the back case 3010 (back unit 3000 ) in the direction along the surface of the predetermined member 3015 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 from tilting or falling due to the functional surface part 3011 falling off from the intermediate member 3016 by the restricting part of the back box 3010. , the front surface of the back front peripheral edge decorative body 3201 can be prevented from coming into contact with the predetermined member 3015, and the effects as described above can be reliably achieved.

Further, as described above, since the movement of the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 in the direction along the predetermined member 3015 can be restricted by the regulating portion of the back box 3010, the back box 3010 or the back in the face down state can be regulated. Since the unit 3000 can be made difficult to move, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work in the face down state, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the functional surface portion 3011 is provided so as to face the back of the back unit 3000 (visible when viewed from the back), the assembly work is such that the back front peripheral decoration 3201 and the like are held by the back box 3010 from the front. , the front end side of the back box 3010 is directed upward (upside down), and the distance between the functional surface portion 3011 and the predetermined member 3015 is greater than the distance from the functional surface portion 3011 to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. By inserting a long column-shaped or block-shaped intermediate member 3017, it is possible to avoid contact of the predetermined member 3015 with the rear surface of the back unit 3000, so that the back box 3010 or the back unit 3000 can be stably placed on its back. As a result, the assembly work from the front end side of the back box 3010 can be facilitated.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B circulates downward through the first vertical portion 2061b of the circulation passage 2061, the detection hole 2060a of the detection sensor 2060 is detected near the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b. After being detected by the detection sensor 2060 by passing through, after entering the second horizontal portion 2061c from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b below the detection sensor 2060, it moves toward the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. , and flows down the second vertical portion 2061d extending downward from the downstream end of the second horizontal portion 2061c. At this time, the game ball B that has passed through the detection sensor 2060 is brought into contact with the guide portion 2062 provided between the outer wall of the first vertical portion 2061b and the bottom wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c, thereby allowing the game ball B to flow. The direction is changed from the downward direction to the horizontal direction, and the fluid flows rapidly toward the downstream side of the second horizontal portion 2061c. In such a circulation passage 2061, when the starting game ball B (lower game ball B) in contact with the guide portion 2062 comes into contact with the later game ball B (upper game ball B) from above, Due to the impact, the lower game ball B is pushed downstream and quickly moved away from the position below the detection sensor 2060 by the arc-shaped or linear guiding part 2062, and the repulsive force acting on the upper game ball B is maximized. It is possible to reduce the size of the upper game ball B as much as possible, thereby suppressing the upward rebound of the upper game ball B as much as possible. Therefore, even if the later game ball B comes into contact with the starting game ball B below the detection sensor 2060, the centers of the starting game ball B and the later game ball B are quickly shifted in the lateral direction by the guiding part 2062. As a result, it is possible to suppress the upward rebound of the later game ball B, so that one game ball B can be prevented from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and the distribution passage 2061 is distributed. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of accurately detecting (the number of) game balls B to be played.

In addition, in this circulation passage 2061, since the arc-shaped or linear guiding portion 2062 is also provided between the ceiling wall of the second horizontal portion 2061c and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, the second vertical portion 2061d After being detected by the detection sensor 2060 provided in the second horizontal portion 2061c of the second horizontal portion 2061c of the second horizontal portion 2061c of the game ball B in which the increase in the circulation speed is suppressed by flowing through the second horizontal portion 2061c Since it can be guided downward by the guide portion 2062 provided between the top wall and the outer wall of the second vertical portion 2061d, it can be quickly moved downward of the second vertical portion 2061d. It is possible to suppress congestion of a plurality of game balls B whose momentum is weakened in the second horizontal part 2061c, and the detection sensor 2060 side when the later game ball B abuts on the jammed game ball B. It is possible to avoid rebounding to the top, prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060, and accurately detect (the number of) game balls B circulating in the circulation passage 2061. can be detected.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected multiple times by the detection sensor 2060 (also referred to as double counting, erroneous detection, etc.). It is possible to prevent the provision of a privilege such as the payout of the game ball B due to (unnecessary detection) and reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Alternatively, as described above, double counting of the game balls B can be prevented, so that discrepancies between the counted number of the game balls B and the number of the game balls B counted by a separate detection sensor can be prevented. By avoiding the interruption of the game caused by the discrepancy, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest due to the interruption of the game.

In addition, as described above, since the game ball B can be quickly guided to the downstream side by the guiding portion 2062, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from stagnation in the circulation passage 2061, thereby preventing the game ball B from stagnation. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging (ball jam) due to

Furthermore, since the detection sensor 2060 is provided in the first vertical portion 2061b and the second horizontal portion 2061c extends horizontally from the downstream end of the first vertical portion 2061b, the game ball can be detected by the second horizontal portion 2061c. It is possible to suppress the increase in the circulation speed of B, the circulation speed (momentum) of the game ball B detected by the detection sensor 2060 can be weakened, and the member provided downstream of the circulation passage 2061 , the game ball B can be delivered in a good state (for example, in a state with little impact, in a rectified state, etc.).

In addition, since the guide portion 2062A has an arc shape with a radius larger than the diameter of the game ball B, the game ball B can be smoothly guided downstream, and the game ball B in contact with the guide portion 2062A is less likely to bounce. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the rampage due to meandering of the game ball B in the second horizontal part 2061c and the second vertical part 2061d, and the game ball B is quickly circulated to cause ball clogging due to stagnation. can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the effects of the guiding piece portion 2210 of the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the guiding piece portion 2050 of the winning opening 2016 of the winning opening unit 2040 in which the ball entering direction is inclined. I will explain in detail. Here, the winning hole unit 2040 will be described as an example, but the side unit 2200 can also achieve the same effect. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning hole unit is attached via the flange portion 2043 to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) provided with the game area 5a in front of the game board 5. In 2040, the front plate portion 2041 and the receiving portion 2042 form a winning opening 2016 in which the ball entering direction (receiving direction) is inclined. It rolls on the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the rib-shaped guide piece portion 2050 provided in the receiving portion 2042 and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 . This guiding piece portion 2050 has a changing piece portion 2051 for changing the distribution direction of the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 in which the ball entering direction is inclined. , the upper end surface of the change piece portion 2051 (the rolling surface of the game ball B) includes a component in the direction perpendicular to the axis parallel to the entrance direction. More specifically, the upper end surface of the changeable piece 2051 is a surface that is formed by tilting a surface perpendicular to the direction of ball entry (a surface facing the direction of ball entry). When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2016 in which the direction of entry is inclined, it first contacts the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the change piece portion 2051 in the guide piece portion 2050, and the direction of circulation is the entry ball. The direction is changed rearward, and then the upper end surface (rolling surface) of the rear piece portion 2052 of the guide piece portion 2050 guides it to the rear downstream passage portion. At this time, since the game ball B that has entered the winning opening 2016 contacts the upper end surface of the change piece portion 2051, the impact due to the contact of the game ball B can be received by the surface, so that the game can be played as in the past. Since the ball B does not contact the corner side of the guide piece portion 2050 (change piece portion 2051), damage to the guide piece portion 2050 due to the contact of the game ball B can be reduced as much as possible, and the guide piece It is possible to reduce the occurrence of clogged balls due to breakage of the part 2050, prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to clogged balls, and suppress the decline of the player's interest. be able to.

In addition, in the winning opening unit 2040, since the guide piece portion 2050 for guiding the game ball B has the change piece portion 2051 and the rear piece portion 2052, the change piece portion 2051 controls the distribution direction of the game ball B. Since the game ball B whose entry direction can be changed backward and whose circulation direction has been changed backward can be guided backward by the rear piece 2052, the game ball B entering the winning opening 2016 can be quickly moved. It is possible to guide the game ball B backward to the rear downstream passage part without any problem.

Furthermore, the guiding piece portion 2050 has a rear piece portion 2052 that extends in a direction different from the change piece portion 2051 and guides the game ball B backward, and the game ball is guided backward by at least the rear piece portion 2052. Since the game ball B is supported, the game ball B can be reliably guided backward by the rear piece portion 2052 compared to the case where the guide piece portion 2050 is configured only by the change piece portion 2051, and the winning opening is achieved. In the unit 2040, it is possible to prevent the circulation of the game ball B from being stopped and stagnating.

In addition, since the ball entry direction of the winning hole 2016 capable of receiving the game ball B is inclined with respect to the vertical direction, the game ball B is received by the movement of the game ball B in the left and right direction within the game area 5a. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be varied to make it difficult to be monotonous. It is possible to entertain the reception of the game ball B into the winning opening 2016 with a slope, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the prize winning opening unit 2040, a step with a low rear side (downstream side) is formed between the receiving portion 2042 (induction piece portion 2050) and the rear extension portion 2044 (rear induction piece portion 2045). Since the game ball B can be prevented from flowing back from the rear extension part 2044 side to the receiving part 2042 side, the game ball B in the receiving part 2042 can be prevented from flowing in the receiving part 2042 because the ball entering direction of the winning opening 2016 is inclined. Even if the height difference of circulation is small, the game ball B that has entered the winning hole 2016 does not return to the winning hole 2016 due to the backflow, and the winning hole where the ball entering direction is inclined in the game area 5a. 2016 can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the prize winning opening 2016 in which the ball entering direction is inclined, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the winning hole unit 2040, since the guide piece 2050 is provided in the receiving part 2042 which is open in the direction opposite to the entrance direction and backward, the game ball B guided backward is supported from below. The rear piece 2052 extends like a rib from the bottom of the receiving portion 2042 , and the thickness of the receiving portion 2042 can be increased by the rear piece 2052 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the receiving portion 2042 from being directly impacted by the impact caused by receiving the game ball B into the winning hole 2016, thereby preventing the receiving portion 2042 from being easily fatigued and damaged at an early stage. Thus, it is possible to make the receiving part 2042 (the winning hole unit 2040) difficult to damage, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the winning hole unit 2040.例文帳に追加, the player can enjoy receiving the game ball B into the prize winning opening 2016 to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the guiding piece portion 2050 is extended like a rib and the game ball B is guided by the upper end surface, the thickness can be increased by the extent of the extending of the guiding piece portion 2050. Therefore, even if the game ball B rushes into the prize winning opening 2016, the impact can be received by the guide piece portion 2050, and the guide piece portion 2050 and the like can be made difficult to break. Therefore, as the winning opening 2016, a part where the game ball B enters vigorously or circulates frequently (for example, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, second big prize winning opening 2007, etc.).

Also, the winning opening 2016 unit having the winning opening 2016 and the guiding piece portion 2050 is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) via the flange portion 2043, that is, at the same position in the front-rear direction as the game area 5a. Since it is relatively easy to secure the space behind the prize winning port 2016 unit, the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more by providing a performance device in the space. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning opening unit 2030 that is open to receive the game ball B is provided in the game area 5a in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) on the game board 5. When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031, the game ball B rolls on the rolling surface (upper end surface) of the guide piece portion 2035 protruding upward in a rib shape, and moves backward downstream. It is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 via the downstream passage portion 2032 connected to the side. The guiding piece portion 2035 has a sharp piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b with different inclination angles, and the steep piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b are inclined so as to become lower toward the rear. Therefore, when a force including the front is applied from above to the game ball B that is in contact with both the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b, the strength of the force and the angle of the loose piece portion 2035b on the downstream side Depending on the situation, the game ball B can be stopped as it is, and the position where the game ball B touches the two sharp piece portions 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b is defined as a specific position. At this time, the rear end of the game ball B located at the specific position is located behind the rear end of the winning opening 2015 (here, the front surface of the game panel 1100). Since the loose piece portion 2035b (induction piece portion 2035) is formed, the game ball B (upper side When the game ball B) comes into contact, the point of contact becomes a position in front of the center of the game ball B at the specific position (lower side), so the game ball B on the upper side touches the game ball B on the lower side. As a result, the lower game ball B is pushed backward, and the game ball B can be pushed out backward. The game ball B can be satisfactorily discharged backward without causing ball jam (ball clogging) in which the ball B stays, and the occurrence of the ball jam at the prize winning opening 2015 can be prevented. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decline in interest by entertaining a player without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, since the guiding piece portion 2035 is composed of a sharp piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b with different inclinations, the inclination of the slope portion becomes gentler (closer to the horizontal) toward the rear end side. It is possible to suppress the increase in the circulation speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B that has entered the 2015, and it is possible to reduce the momentum of the game ball B that is discharged (released) to the downstream passage portion 2032 behind. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from vigorously contacting the downstream passage portion 2032 provided behind (downstream side) of the upstream passage portion 2031, so that the downstream passage portion 2032 is hardly damaged. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage of the downstream passage portion 2032 (the winning opening unit 2030).

In addition, the guiding piece portion 2035 is composed of a sharp piece portion 2035a and a loose piece portion 2035b having different inclinations, and as described above, the momentum of the game ball B is suppressed by the sharp piece portion 2035a and the loose piece portion 2035b. Since the game ball B can be stably circulated to the rear downstream passage portion 2032 side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and stagnation on the downstream passage portion 2032 side. , the game ball B can be discharged smoothly from the winning opening unit 2030.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the guide piece 2035 in the upstream passage 2031 is protruded upward in a rib shape, it is likely that the rear end of the guide piece 2035 is located downstream of the downstream passage 2032. Since it is higher than the bottom portion, a step 2033 with a lower downstream side can be formed between the upper end surface of the conductive piece portion 2035 and the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 2032 . Therefore, when the game ball B tries to flow backward from the downstream passage portion 2032 side to the upstream passage portion 2031 side, it has to overcome the step 2033 by the guide piece portion 2035, and the end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 facing the downstream side Backflow of the game ball B can be prevented by the game ball B coming into contact with. Therefore, although it once entered the prize winning port 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031, it flows backward and returns to the prize winning port 2015 of the upstream passage portion 2031, and the game ball B can be seen, giving the player a sense of distrust. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the slow circulation of the game balls B in the winning hole unit 2030, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031 of the winning opening unit 2030 (winning opening 2015 ), after rolling on the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031, it is delivered to the downstream passage portion 2032 and circulates downstream. At this time, the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 is formed by making the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage portion 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031. Since the backflow prevention part consisting of the step 2033 is provided, the subsequent (subsequent) game ball B comes into contact with the preceding game ball B in the downstream passage part 2032, and the following game ball B bounces back to the upstream side. , Even if the game ball B hits the rear wall (not shown) provided behind the upstream end of the downstream passage portion 2032 and rebounds upstream, the rebounded game ball B can be bounced back to the downstream side by contacting the step 2033 as a backflow prevention portion, preventing the backflow to the upstream passage portion 2031 side and reaching the upstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031 (winning opening 2015) The return of the game ball B can be prevented, and the following game ball B comes into contact with the rebounded game ball B, causing the game ball B to stay in the upstream passage part 2031 and the downstream passage part 2032.例文帳に追加can be avoided. Therefore, even though it has entered the prize winning port 2015 once, it flows backward and returns to the prize winning port 2015 at the upstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031, and the game ball B can be seen, giving the player a sense of distrust. Discomfort is given to the player due to the delay in circulation of the game ball B in the distribution passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, and the player can be prevented from being displeased, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest of the player. can.

In other words, when the game ball B is received at the upstream end (winning opening 2015) of the upstream passage portion 2031, as described above, the backflow prevention provided at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 Since the backflow of the game ball B is prevented by the step 2033 as a part, the game ball B once received (won a prize) flows backward and returns to the winning opening 2015, and the game ball B returns from the winning opening 2015. It is possible to reduce the feeling of distrust to the player due to the view of the , and the unpleasant feeling to the player due to the delay of the circulation of the game balls B in the upstream passage part 2031 and the downstream passage part 2032. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of surely entertaining a player with receiving a game ball B into a prize winning opening 2015 and suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game. can be done.

In addition, since the upstream passage portion 2031 is provided with a guide piece portion 2035 protruding in a rib shape capable of guiding the game ball B, it is likely that at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 , the guiding piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031 is higher than the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 2032, and the step between the upper end surface of the guiding piece portion 2035 and the bottom portion of the downstream passage portion 2032 is lower on the downstream passage portion 2032 side. 2033 can be formed. Therefore, when the game ball B tries to flow backward from the downstream passage portion 2032 side to the upstream passage portion 2031 side, it has to overcome the step 2033 by the guide piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031, and the downstream of the guide piece portion 2035 Since the backflow of the game ball B can be prevented by contacting the game ball B with the end surface facing the side, the backflow of the game ball B can be further prevented, and the above-described effects can be further enhanced. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is easy to play.

In addition, since a step 2033 as a backflow prevention portion is provided at the boundary between the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032, the dimension in the front-rear direction from the upstream end (entrance) of the downstream passage portion 2032 to the rear wall can be adjusted. The space behind the downstream passage portion 2032 can be relatively widened. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide an effect device capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a light emitting effect, a movable effect, an image effect including a moving image, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game behind the downstream passage portion 2032. The effect device can entertain the player more, suppress the decline in interest of the player, and can make the pachinko machine 1 more conspicuous by the effect device, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the player. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be attached.

Furthermore, since the backflow prevention portion is a step 2033 formed by making the inner circumference of the downstream passage portion 2032 larger than the inner circumference of the upstream passage portion 2031, the backflow prevention portion may be a one-way opening/closing piece. In comparison, the configuration of the backflow prevention section can be simplified, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball B is guided by the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 protruding like a rib in the upstream passage portion 2031, and the thickness in the vertical direction is thicker than the bottom portion by the guide piece portion 2035. Therefore, even if the game ball B vigorously enters the upstream passage portion 2031, the impact can be received by the guiding piece portion 2035, and the upstream passage portion 2031 can be made difficult to be damaged. . Therefore, as the upstream passage part 2031, a part where the game ball B enters vigorously or circulates frequently (for example, the first start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007, etc.).

In addition, the inner circumference of the upstream end of the downstream passage portion 2032 is made larger than the inner circumference of the downstream end of the upstream passage portion 2031 to intentionally form a step 2033 as a backflow prevention portion that is lower on the downstream passage portion 2302 side. Therefore, the upstream passage portion 2031 and the downstream passage portion 2032 are separated from each other, and even if there is a manufacturing error or an assembly error in each, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a reverse step in which the downstream passage portion 2032 side is higher. Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the game balls B being jammed due to the reverse step, and the player's distrust caused by the backflow of the game balls B, and the like.

Further, by chamfering the downstream edge of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 of the upstream passage portion 2031, for example, when a plating layer is provided (plated) on the surface of the upstream passage portion 2031 , it is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B due to the plating accumulation. More specifically, when the upstream passage portion 2031 is plated for decoration or the like, plating pools are likely to be formed on the edge of the upstream passage portion 2031, and the downstream edge of the rolling surface (upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035) is likely to be plated. When a puddle is formed, the plated puddle bulges upward, and the game ball B may get caught in the plated puddle, which may cause ball clogging. On the other hand, by chamfering the downstream edge of the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035 in the upstream passage portion 2031, the plating (plating solution) is allowed to escape downward during the plating process, forming a plating pool. In addition, even if a plated pool is formed, it is possible to suppress the plated pool from bulging upward from the upper end surface of the guide piece portion 2035, thereby preventing ball clogging due to the plated pool. can do.

From here to the following paragraph [2016], the action and effect will be described with the center accessory 2500 as an example, but the same action and effect can be obtained in the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the gate member 2600. . According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the flange portion 2502 along the game panel 1100 has a plurality of pins for attaching to the game panel 1100. In addition, since the plurality of mounting portions attached to the game panel 1100 have positioning pins 2505 to be inserted into the positioning holes 1117 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of positioning pins The center accessory 2500 can be positioned at a predetermined position on the game panel 1100 by 2505, and the center accessory can be accurately positioned at a desired position within the game area 5a. Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error of the center accessory 2500 or an assembly error of the pachinko machine 1, the center accessory 2500 can be attached at a desired position within the game area 5a with high accuracy. In the center accessory 2500, two sets of mounting portions are provided symmetrically with respect to the center line CL of the advantageous portion (here, the first start port 2004) in which the player in the game area 5a is advantageous. Therefore, even if the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 expand and contract due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the centers of the two sets of mounting portions are maintained on the center line CL of the first starting port 2004. It is possible to reliably prevent the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 from being displaced from the first start port 2004, and to prevent the change in the environment such as temperature and humidity. It is possible to prevent the game from changing, to entertain the player without discomfort, and to suppress the loss of interest. In other words, since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 can be accurately positioned directly above the first starting port 2004, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is the first The probability of acceptance to the starting port 2004 can be within the intended range, the variation for each pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be reduced as much as possible, and the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513 The game ball B released from the ball can be received into the first start port 2004 with an intended acceptance probability, and the player can be entertained as intended to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the flange portion 2502 of the center role item 2500 along the game panel 1100 is provided with a plurality of attachment portions including the attachment holes 2504 and the positioning pins 2505, when the center role item 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, The positioning pin 2505 can be easily inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 by pressing the front surface of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 is provided toward the game panel 1100 . At this time, since the positioning pin 2505 is provided so as to avoid the rear of the front plate portion (for example, the center left front plate 2527) that is separated forward from the flange portion 2502, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, When inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the operator can press the front side of the portion of the flange portion 2502 where the positioning pin 2505 protrudes rearward from the front. , the positioning pin 2505 can be surely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, and a strong force is not applied to the front plate portion, so that the front plate portion can be prevented from being damaged. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed. By inserting the positioning pin 2505 into the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from moving or floating with respect to the game panel 1100. can be made easy, the labor involved in assembly work can be simplified, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, and even if the mounting screw is screwed in and tightened, the center accessory 2500 will not move subtly. , the center accessory 2500 can be reliably attached to a predetermined position of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a).

Furthermore, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505 in the center accessory 2500, the base of the positioning pin 2505 is the bottom of the groove portion 2506 in front of the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502). Therefore, even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the portion of the positioning pin 2505 behind the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 does not become thicker, and the thickness of the effective range of the positioning pin 2505 ( diameter) can be made uniform, and the positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 until the front surface of the game panel 1100 contacts the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 . Also, even if there is a burr on the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100, the burr is accommodated in the groove portion 2506 so that the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502) are separated. The positioning pin 2505 can be completely inserted into the positioning hole 1117 by avoiding the burr being caught between them. As a result, the positioning effect of the positioning pin 2505 can be reliably exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

Also, as described above, even if the base of the positioning pin 2505 is rounded, the portion thickened by the rounded radius is moved forward from the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 (flange portion 2502) due to the presence of the groove portion 2506. Therefore, a gap is generated between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 due to imperfect insertion into the positioning hole 1117 due to the part where the base of the positioning pin 2505 is thickened. no. In addition, since the burr generated at the front edge of the positioning hole 1117 of the game panel 1100 can be accommodated in the groove 2506, the burr can There is no gap between the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁Therefore, the center role object 2500 is not attached to the game panel 1100 with a gap between the game panel 1100 and the center role object 2500. There is no rattling.

Furthermore, since the groove portion 2506 is provided on the outer periphery of the base of the positioning pin 2505, the positioning pin 2505 is located at the location of the positioning pin 2505 in the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 during injection molding of the center accessory 2500. Due to the difference in plate thickness due to the presence of , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks, which are recesses on the front side of the flange portion 2502 in front of the positioning pin 2505 when the molten resin is cured.

In addition, since a plurality of mounting portions each including a set of mounting holes 2504 and positioning pins 2505 are provided on a seat surface portion 2507 projecting rearward in a stepped manner from the rear surface of the flange portion 2502, the center accessory 2500 can be used in a game. When attached to the front surface of the panel 1100, the seat surface portion 2507 abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100, thereby forming a predetermined gap between the game panel 1100 and the rear surface of the center accessory 2500 excluding the seat surface portion 2507. Therefore, even if the rear surface (flange portion 2502) of the center accessory 2500 is wavy when the center accessory 2500 is injection-molded, the unevenness due to the wavy can be absorbed by the gap, and the seat surface portion 2507 The center accessory 2500 can be attached in good condition to the front surface of the game panel 1100 via the .

Furthermore, since the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505 are provided in the seat surface portion 2507, even if the rate of expansion and contraction of the center accessory 2500 differs from that of the game panel 1100 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the seat surface portion The gap between the game panel 1100 and the center role 2500 by 2507 can absorb (accommodate) the distortion of the center role 2500 due to the difference in expansion and contraction between the game panel 1100 and the center role 2500. The accessory 2500 can be securely attached.

In addition, since the seat surface portion 2507 is provided with a mounting portion composed of the mounting hole 2504 and the positioning pin 2505, if the center accessory 2500 is made transparent, the teardrop-shaped outer shape of the seat surface portion 2507 can be visually recognized from the front side. Therefore, when attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the position of the attachment hole 2504 can be easily grasped by the seat surface portion 2507, and the labor required for attachment can be simplified.

In addition, since the flange portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is provided with mounting holes 2504 and the like, by screwing mounting screws into the game panel 1100 (the screw holes 1116 of) through the mounting holes 2504 and tightening them, the rear surface of the flange portion 2502 can be can be brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, the frictional resistance between the game panel 1100 and the flange portion 2502 becomes higher, so that the center accessory 2500 moves in the direction along the surface of the game panel 1100. It can be made difficult to move, and the center accessory 2500 can be attached to the game panel 1100 more firmly. In addition, since the flange portion 2502 is provided along the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extending in the direction intersecting the flange portion 2502 of the center role item 2500 further increases the strength and rigidity of the center role item 2500. can be enhanced. For this reason, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the center accessory 2500 provided in the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from moving or deforming. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of surely performing an intended game by a center accessory 2500, entertaining a player, and suppressing a decline in interest.

[17. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 203 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197. FIG. FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 195, and FIG. 197 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[17-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number for use in determining the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determination of the hit type), and a symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this symbol random number, etc. prepared. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the acceptance of the game ball of the second start port 2005, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, various kinds of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the processing when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information regarding the information as numerical values is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match, the initial value determination random number for normal pattern per determination is taken out from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU has. Based on the ID code, an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed value range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. there is That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the second security measure is taken to prevent analysis by taking two steps of security measures.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate 2002 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed so that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2005.例文帳に追加A game state cannot be generated.

[17-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the blackout warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a blackout warning signal is input from the blackout monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S14, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch is operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination The flag indicates whether or not to erase various types of information including information indicating the value of the counter for data processing, etc., and is set to a value of 1 when the various information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the various information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase various information, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

In the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, the main control internal RAM A work area is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processing, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- is set. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when determining to erase various information, or in the determination of step S30, the main control MPU When the control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, when the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) That is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the main-control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU does this by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Note that the main control MPU may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power supply When the shutdown processing is not normally completed, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates the random number for judging a normal pattern based on the retrieved ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. Normal per symbol determination initial value determination Set to random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all the values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-win/lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, symbol initial value determination random numbers, small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-win/lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the win/lose determination (hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops outputting drive signals to various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, the second attacker solenoid 2652, etc. ( step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power ON processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing is not stored immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied due to the fact that the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) will match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control internal RAM, and the contents of the main control internal RAM will be completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the power is restored after that, this main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by a fraudulent act.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby process in step S22, and subsequent processing is performed. I will explain the problems in

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as a DC +5V to the island of the game hall. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and just before reaching the standby time, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a game hall clerk or other attendant, and even if the game hall clerk or other attendant does not indicate the intention of clearing the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. It is possible to prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) from being updated, and checksum calculation results It is designed so that there is no change in As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 can be determined to match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated to set the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, clear the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, and restart the clocking. By not being able to start, the main control built-in WDT can force the main control MPU to reset.

By forcibly resetting the main control MPU by the main control built-in WDT by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 By preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls A mechanism is adopted in which updating of various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starter solenoid 2632 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starter solenoid 2632 and information instructing the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652. Problems in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not set to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 controls the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second When the second attacker solenoid 2652 is driven and the first big prize winning port 2006 and the second big winning prize port 2007 are opened by the opening and closing member, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. As a result, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started, and the state in which the first large prize winning port 2006 and the second large prize winning port 2007 are closed by the opening and closing member shifts to the state in which they are opened. It will happen.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the game state (whether it is a time saving state, etc.) indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. . However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the game state indicated by the state command at the time of power-on received from, even if it is possible to display the screen in the big win game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return, in any round of the big win game state or cannot be displayed at all. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 and is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 or the second big winning hole sensor 2602, and the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole sensor 2602 detects the ball. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a large winning hole 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls that entered the second large winning hole 2007, the peripheral control The substrate 1510 can display the number of game balls entering the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007 on the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the game state. It is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 and stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. The fact that the winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 shift from the state opened by the opening and closing member to the closed state (that is, the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 of the attacker unit When the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing the closing start), and the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds (fifth round) of the jackpot game state , the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started, and the state in which the first big prize winning port 2006 and the second big prize winning port 2007 are closed by the opening/closing member is shifted to the state in which they are opened. (That is, the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning hole opening fifth display command instructing the opening of the fifth round of the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the above-described screen corresponding to the game state to display the screen for starting the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2005 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2632 to open the movable piece and open the second starting opening 2005 is in the open state, and when power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the starting port solenoid 2632 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2005 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2005 as a game state and a game state is generated that is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen during the big win game state based on the game state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. 2005, the game ball can be received into the second start port 2005, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The control board 1510 cannot display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2005 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2005 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game of entering the game ball into the second start port 2005) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a state command at power-on classified as power-on, a command to return to main control at power-on, and a command at power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 are started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big prize opening are started. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the prize winning port 2007 is to be shifted from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member, the peripheral control board 1510 can inform that there are 4 rounds in the jackpot game state. Although the specified screen (that is, the screen indicating how many rounds it is) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in the jackpot game state and the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 is started to drive, and a screen notifying that the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 are opened by the opening/closing member (for example, "It's a big win. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning hole." is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine is displayed. After the power is restored, it is possible to instruct a game in which the game ball is entered into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007, and for example, in the above-described example, the game ball enters the second starting hole 2005 is acceptable, and the game state is advantageous to the player. 2632 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2005 (for example, "The movable piece is open. A game ball is in the second starting port. Please play the game so as to enter the ball.”) is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510 and returned to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine. A game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2005 after powering can be instructed.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is cleared. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the above-mentioned time-saving It consists of information indicating which game state to return to, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption or misunderstanding that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[17-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 197 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general prize winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, etc., the detection from the second starting opening sensor 2401 signals, detection signals from the first and second prize winning opening sensors 2525 and 2602, detection signals from the V winning opening sensor 2603, detection signals from the losing opening sensor 2604, detection signals from the out sensor 664, magnetic A detection signal from the sensor 1030, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later from the payout control board 633 that tells that the payout control board 633 has normally received are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second starting When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2401, a starting mouth winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing). , are read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2501, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first Detection signals from the large winning opening sensor 2525 and the second large winning opening sensor 2602, detection signals from the V winning opening sensor 2603, detection signals from the losing opening sensor 2604, detection signals from the out sensor 664, detection signals from the magnetic sensor 1030, A detection signal, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, and a payout control board 633 notification that the payout control board 633 has normally received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. Signal reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone idle terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the symbol initial value determination random number and the small The random number for determining the initial value for winning symbols is also updated. These symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win-lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the initial value determination random number for the small winning symbol are set to the non-hitting random number in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update process and the win/loss random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated, respectively. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is randomized by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the timer is generated, the initial value determination random number for the symbol and the small win The random number for determining the symbol initial value may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007, a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls is created, and the game scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is generated. Since the number of balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is issued to the payout control board. 633, or when the payout control board 633 does not receive a payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has received the prize command normally within a predetermined time, the board between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A self-check command for checking the connection state is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. , second starting hole 2005, and various winning holes such as first big winning hole 2006 and second big winning hole 2007 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on game board 5"). Based on the number of balls, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted. It has become. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and detection signals from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 and the second big winning hole sensor 2602 are detected when the game is not in the jackpot game state. is input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007), etc., a winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created, It is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2401 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second Set the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2652, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or the number of times (round) that the first big winning mouth 2006 or the second big winning mouth 2007 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2 times, the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the 2nd round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area, When the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp is set so as to light the 15th round indicator lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area. , setting the output of the lighting signal to the state indicator of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the presence or absence of the time saving occurrence in a predetermined color, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second region of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the variable winning opening 2003 by opening the movable piece, which is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2632 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , Creating various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, storing as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and lighting the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the main payout control board 633 Or, when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2642 and the second attacker solenoid 2652 that perform opening and closing operations of the opening and closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 , In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2632 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to games such as a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the payout control board 633 .

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, detection signals from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 and the second big winning hole sensor 2602 when detecting a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to the big winning mouth count command based on), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, and classified as normal electric role related effects Various commands, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands classified as others (for example, when the main control board 1310 is connected to the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls entered into various prize holes provided in the , a main prize number information output signal to that effect is used as main prize number information. to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558, etc.) is stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. can be done. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. A main control return destination command at power-on that instructs the drive state of the starter solenoid 2632, the first attacker solenoid 2642, and the second attacker solenoid 2652, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine when the power is turned on. can be output to the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared at step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[18. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 201. FIG. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 198, and FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[18-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, information on the number of winning balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on an error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank judgment time, it is judged whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit to Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, a logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, for example, which is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. , that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is determined to be in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting process, As an error status output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal is output to notify that the payout operation to pay out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the above-described full-tank determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is conveyed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[18-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 198 to 200.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 201, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[19. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. FIG. FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing an example of power-on processing of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing an example of V blank interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 204 is an example of 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit. 205 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[19-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start/cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC that indicates that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when determining to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Various detection sensors such as the sensor 373 and the elevation detection sensor 374 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). 303 acquired various information (for example, contact history information for the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and operation history information for the pressing operation unit 303 etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. It is appropriately determined whether or not the state of the operation is reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228, and the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. When one specified brightness value is set up to the specified value, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated so as to become the specified brightness specified value. ing.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to set one brightness specified value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value which is the maximum brightness. can be done.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228, and if the current brightness is the minimum brightness (lights off), the 0th (zero) brightness When the specified value is set to the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear or a spline tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher, while the light amount adjustment button 228 When the "-" side is operated and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined formula (for example, a straight line or a spline tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to select the desired brightness, the selected desired brightness is confirmed (after selecting the desired brightness, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed). may be determined by doing). In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. A person in charge, etc.) can set a desired brightness by using the light amount adjustment button 228 (and operation of the pressing operation section 303). In addition, when the player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the light amount adjustment button 228, the specified brightness value to the 31st brightness are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the palette A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the above-described gradation information along predetermined formulas (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting each of the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation unit 303) While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) presses the light amount adjustment button 228 (and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light) 303) is set according to the specified luminance value and the corresponding special palette value. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation section 303), the direct light The brightness of the LED used as is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and is linked to this Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th luminance specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). , the lowest luminance at which the state where the light guide plate emits light with indirect light can be visually recognized.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation section 303)) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the 31st specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decoration board. On the other hand, for the other decoration boards, one specified luminance value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright, or dark), the brightness can be adjusted very easily.

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. 622 and the like (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects that match various performances.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the order of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the light amount adjustment button 228 (and the pressing operation unit 303) to specify the 31st brightness that is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. When one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, the gradation information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the brightness specified value is set. ing.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start winning prize command for instructing the start of the starting winning prize effect, normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs Command, pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, big winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the first big winning opening 2006 or second big winning opening 2007 It analyzes whether or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the performance display control section 1512, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 for one screen. A minute (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into 1024 steps of values up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for the low tone of the body frame 4 Music and sound effects are played from In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch. It's like

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used.

Specifically, for the production sound, the board volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the board volume is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. Seconds have elapsed), by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, and serializes the amplified production sound. output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3 , the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized effect sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the sound volume, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data, and is used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of this synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4 It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, serializes this amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data.

Here, when the performance sound is flowing from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the staff of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this sound effect is suppressed. Synthesize the sound data of the embedded track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is embedded, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume. , the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared with the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound on the main body frame 4 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the sound effect is muted, the sound effect does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It progresses according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top central speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When this predetermined period elapses, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is reduced to the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume control switch. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the adjusted sound effect sub The sound is set to a volume value), and flows from the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. FIG.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko is played. When a notification sound is played to notify a hall clerk or the like of a fraudulent act on the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame. 4, but this muted effect sound progresses in accordance with the schedule data for sound generation, so that after a predetermined period of time the notification sound has passed, the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 462, when the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 cease to flow, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point at which the informative sound started to flow, but continues for a predetermined period after the informative sound starts to flow. The sound starts to flow again from the point where it has progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts by setting a value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is, as described above, a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the signal is input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[19-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral controller steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral controller power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[19-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing in FIG. 202 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 204 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is started by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or acquire the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the touch operation unit 302 is touched or whether the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted. It is also possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in plurality on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 .

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[19-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 205 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the judgment of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been sequentially read out from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the received main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[19-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether a power failure warning signal has been input. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated, and if it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, the power saving process is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

After step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, it returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 202 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (especially the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2004) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the first RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second start opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 according to the big winning game state is executed. Further, when the state of suggesting "5R big win" is reached, processing for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize winning port 2006 is executed according to the 5R big win gaming state, and when the mode of suggesting "2R big win" is reached. Then, a process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2006 according to the 2R jackpot gaming state is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2006, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating the time saving state, and the 2R big hit game based on the fact that the result of the lottery processing at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R big hit". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting the ``5R jackpot'', when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 218 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times of continuation of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes '0', but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes '0'. Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 218 described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Further, if the big hit running flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small winning running flag indicating that the small winning game state is controlled is set (step S236), and the small winning running flag is determined. is set, small winning control processing (step S236A) for controlling the small winning game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "small hit", A process for controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning hole 2007 is executed according to the small winning game state, and the game ball received in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603. When it is done, it controls the transition to the 15R big hit game state.

Also, if neither the big hit running flag nor the small winning running flag is set, the value of the second special pending number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol holding storage area On the condition that it is "0" (step S237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is executed. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the reserved storage area is not "0" (step S237), the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 2nd special design process processing including this lottery processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the processing of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, reach random number, first symbol random number, and fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, the random numbers obtained in step S241 are stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is set to the first reserved memory. Along with updating to correspond to the number, a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determining process (step S245). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when starting the effect pre-determination process, uses the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in step S241 or the random number obtained in step S251 described later, specifically the special random number (first special random numbers, second special random numbers), symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second special random numbers), reach random numbers, and fluctuating random numbers are compared to determine whether or not a big hit will occur. If the game effect is not a big hit, a ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the One special pending number counter value), and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to, and in the second special symbol performance pre-determination process executed in step S255 of the second start opening passage process described later, Set the second special symbol pre-determination command according to the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the second special random number, and the second reservation memory number (second special reservation number counter value) (step S262 ).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the first start gate 2004 and the second start gate 2005 where the starting prize is generated. In addition to the number of pending memories stored corresponding to , whether the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the generated start winning is a big win, the type of big win in the case of a big win, and the type of big win in the case of no big win is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or pre-determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is displayed on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. It becomes possible to grasp the peripheral control ICs mounted on the

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The reserved storage area (first reserved storage area, second reserved storage area) has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storage areas. The determination information is stored in order from the first (first) storage area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored, and when a variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) that notifies the start of variation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received, the received variation pattern command (second 1st variation pattern command, 2nd variation pattern command) Nth Move the pre-determination information stored in the (N=2 to 4) storage areas to the (N-1)-th (N=2 to 4) storage areas (pre-determination information stored in the reserved storage areas shift). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the start of the variable display is postponed, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing such as, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2005, as shown in FIG. Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S251, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it becomes a big hit, and if it does not become a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed on the display device 851, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed (variation pattern type) before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S255), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reservation number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reservation memory. In addition to updating to correspond to the number, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-4). It's like

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", while the game ball entering the second starting port 2005 The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on entering the ball is set to "4". In addition, the second starting port 2005 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, so the second reserved memory number Even if the upper limit is set to "4", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed for a long period of time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second start port 2005 Even if a game ball enters the game ball, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being able to obtain the chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and random numbers used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 213 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 214 (A) is for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state ( A low-probability jackpot determination table used in a low-probability time-saving state)) and a high-probability jackpot determination table used in a high-probability game state (high-probability time-saving state) are provided. . Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 4, 1/279 if the set value is 5, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number coincides with the big hit determination value indicating that the small win was won with a probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, 1/319, with the setting value 2 1/309 if set value 3, 1/299 if set value 3, 1/289 if set value 4, 1/279 if set value 5, 1/269 if set value 6 The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a jackpot probability, and the second special random number matches the small hit judgment value that indicates that the second special random number has won the jackpot with a small hit probability of 144/319. The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the second special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2005 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2004 is executed is more advantageous to the player. In addition, the high-probability win determination table is constructed such that the jackpot probability for each set value is ten times higher than that of the low-probability win determination table. As for the setting values 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, the setting values can be changed by the hall manager performing a predetermined setting change operation using the setting key when the power is turned on. It has become.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. And in the reach determination table at the time of the time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 215, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the decided type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

in particular,
1. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 15R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern) is obtained. , second special pattern) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot 2. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol) is obtained. 2. 5R time-saving big hit that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 77 times. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 2R jackpot game state, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. If the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of a big win game state, one of three types of big wins of 2R big wins to be controlled to a normal state after the end of the big win game state is decided as a big win.

Also, if the big hit flag is set in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the second symbol random number read out in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 214(B). to determine the type of the big hit, and determine the mode (stop design of the second special design) when the variation control of the second special design corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is stopped.

in particular,
1. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 15R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special pattern (first special pattern) is obtained. , second special pattern) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variable jackpot 2. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 5R big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, a special symbol (first special symbol) is obtained. 2. 5R time-saving big hit that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 77 times. After the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to enter the first big winning hole 2006 (easily) in a 2R jackpot game state, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled. If it is, it is controlled to a time-saving state in which it is terminated unless a big win is achieved during the time when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the big win game state, and 2R is performed. If the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of a big win game state, one of three types of big wins of 2R big wins to be controlled to a normal state after the end of the big win game state is decided as a big win.

In addition, in the big hit pattern determination table compared with the first pattern random number, 8 decision values are distributed when the 15R probability variable jackpot is obtained, and 100 decision values are distributed when the 5R time-saving jackpot is obtained, and the 2R jackpot is distributed. 92 judgment values are distributed when That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, a 5R big win has a probability of 50%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 46%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 92 determination values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 determination values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight determination values are distributed when a big hit is achieved. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the probability of the 15R variable jackpot is 46%, the jackpot of the 5R is 50%, and the jackpot of 2R is 4%. . Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the second pattern random number is determined to be a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher than the jackpot pattern determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize to the second starting port 2005 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting prize to the first starting port 2004 The state is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 2R big win is determined, the 2R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the 5R big win is determined, the 5R big win pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win is determined, the big win is determined. A 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the big hit flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easily). , After the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds). Alternatively, when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning hole 2006, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated 14 times, so that the game balls can enter the first big winning hole 2006. Control to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible to enter (easy), and after the jackpot game state ends, the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 77 times. 2. The first sub-win which shortens the execution period more than usual and controls to a high-probability time-saving state in which the special lottery results are drawn with a higher probability than usual. An opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easily). , After the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 is distributed to the V winning hole 2008 and detected by the V winning hole sensor 2603, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds). Alternatively, when the first big winning hole sensor 2525 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first big winning hole 2006, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated 14 times, so that the game balls can enter the first big winning hole 2006. If it is controlled to a 15R big hit game state in which it is possible to enter (easy), and if it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 15R big hit game state, special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the big hit game state ) is controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated unless a big win is achieved until the variation display of 77 times is executed, and if the non-time-saving state is controlled before the start of the 15R big win game state, the big win game state ends. Any one of the two kinds of small wins of the second small win to be controlled to the normal state later is determined.

In addition, 200 determination values are distributed in the small hit design determination table compared with the first design random number when the first small hit is obtained. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, the first small win is obtained with a probability of 100%, and the second small win is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 180 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win has a probability of 10%, and the second small win has a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined as the first small hit, it is determined as the first small winning pattern as the small winning pattern, and when it is determined as the second small winning pattern, it is determined as the second small winning pattern as the small winning pattern. .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, as the process of step S328. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed, and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. is determined to be a small hit pattern (“final battle”), and if the 5R time-saving jackpot is specified, the 5R time-saving jackpot pattern (left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same among the patterns “0” to “9” If the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same odd pattern among the patterns of "0" to "9"). combination). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns) and fluctuates When the variation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the jackpot game state, but the time saving state The time saving state may be ended based on the fact that a predetermined number of big hits have occurred after the shift control is performed to the state. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur after that, control is not performed to the time saving state after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. Also, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, control may be performed to the non-time-saving state during the big-win game state, and control of the time-saving state may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 216 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If so (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is acquired from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, as the processing of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of times the time saving state continues is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) ends is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Variation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times) of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed, the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big win control process described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning mouth opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big win number counter reaches "0", and the big win is performed. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win frequency counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time-short jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time-short jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R timing short jackpot) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time short jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) are set.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). The opening and closing control of the first big winning hole 2006 according to the type (for example, after the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or that 10 game balls have won the first big winning hole 2006 is described above. It is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that is closed when detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2525 is completed 2 times, 5 times, or 15 times (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). . While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) until the start of the small-hit game is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the kind of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second Second small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit medium processing (step S411 ), the opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 2007 according to the type of the small win (for example, the opening/closing control of repeating the opening/closing pattern of opening the second big winning hole 2007 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice) is completed. sometimes reset. By resetting the small hit running flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started pre-opening big winning opening (step S401)
2. The first big prize winning port 2006 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the state at the time when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped becomes a big hit pattern, or the first big prize winning port 2006 is controlled based on the start of the next round. is controlled to an open state, and after opening the first big winning hole 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when 10 game balls have won in the first big winning hole 2006, the first big winning hole sensor 2525 Large winning opening opening process (step S402) to be closed when detected
3. A post-opening process for the big winning opening to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state will end when all the rounds are completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. Further, in the process during the opening of the big prize winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the first big winning opening 2006 to open state, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning prize is set. At the end of the round in which the mouth 2006 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

[20. Pachinko machine 1 with a small hit rush]
[20-1. Specifications of pachinko machine 1 in this chapter]
The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described below. Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also called special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also called special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol variation is also called special figure 1 variation, the second special symbol variation is also called special figure 2 variation, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variations are collectively called simply variation.

Figures 220 and 221 are examples of tables showing the winning probability of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter and the distribution of the winning symbols of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Figs. All of these tables are stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example.

FIG. 220(a) is a table showing the winning probability in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. According to FIG. 220(a), both in the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 2048/65536, and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1600/65536. In addition, in the variation of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the small hit probability in the high probability state and low probability state is 63488/65536. In addition, both in the variation of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the probability of losing in the high probability state is 0/65536 (that is, the high probability state does not win the loss), and the probability of losing in the low probability state is 448/ 65536.

FIG. 220(b) is an example of a special figure 1 jackpot random number design table, and FIG. 221(c) is an example of a special figure 2 jackpot random number design table. When the normal symbols in FIGS. 220(b) and 221(c) are won, the jackpot game starts, and when the jackpot game ends, the control is performed to the low probability state. Also, when a specific pattern is won and the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability state. Hereinafter, the jackpot resulting from winning a normal pattern is also called a normal jackpot, and the jackpot resulting from winning a specific pattern is also called a probability variable jackpot. According to FIGS. 220(b) and 221(c), 40% of the winning jackpots are normal symbols and 60% are specific symbols in both special symbols 1 and 2. FIG.

Also, according to Figures 220(b) and 221(c), all the jackpots of the special figures 1 and 2 are two-round jackpots, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, even if a jackpot is won, a small amount of You can only get a ball. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state is a so-called small winning rush state, and the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter can mainly increase the number of balls in this state. That is, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (details will be described later, but if the game is executed with a so-called right-handed strike), compared to other gaming states, the frequency of occurrence per unit time of the small hit game of special figure 2 This is an advantageous state in which game balls B can be easily obtained by increasing the price (the number of expected winning balls to be obtained per variation is the largest).

FIG. 221(d) is an example of a small hit random number design table of special figure 1, and FIG. 221(e) is an example of a small hit random number design table of special figure 2. FIG. When the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are won, the small winning game starts, and even if the small winning game ends, the game state before the small winning game starts is maintained (that is, in a low probability state If a small win is won, it is controlled to a low probability state even after the small win game is ended, and if a small win is won in a high probability state, it is controlled to a high probability state even after the small win game is ended). According to Figures 221(d) and 221(e), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 have one type of small winning design.

FIG. 222 is a transition diagram showing an example of game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. FIG. 222 shows an example of state transitions in the case of playing a game in a normal game method, and detailed state transitions are omitted.

In the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the game ball is entered into the first start port 2004 by hitting the so-called left, and the game is played by receiving a special lottery (hereinafter also referred to as the first special lottery) according to the special figure 1. conduct. In a low-probability non-time-saving game state, when winning a probability-variable big win (no ceiling) which is a part of the probability-variable big win, the machine shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state without a ceiling after the big win game is finished. The high-probability time-saving gaming state without a ceiling is a state in which the time-saving gaming state continues unless a big hit is won.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, if a probability-variable big win (ceiling set) which is part of the probability-variable big win is won, the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state with a ceiling after the end of the big win game. A high-probability time-saving game state with a ceiling is a high-probability non-time-saving game, in which the time-saving game state ends when a predetermined number of fluctuations end or a predetermined number of small-hit games end even if the jackpot is not won. It is a state that transitions to a state. Although illustration is omitted, in the first special symbol variation in the low probability non-time-saving game state, even if the normal jackpot (no time-saving), which is a part of the normal jackpot, is won, after the jackpot game ends A low-probability non-time-saving game state is maintained.

In addition, since the first large winning opening 2006 is opened in the small winning game and the big winning game of the special figure 1, the game is played by so-called left hitting. However, although it is possible to win the small hit of special figure 1 with an extremely high probability, in the small hit game of special figure 1, the opening time of the first big winning opening 2006 is extremely short and the game ball B is entered. Since it is extremely difficult to make a ball, it is practically impossible to obtain a ball.

In the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) and high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), the game ball is entered into the first start port 2004 by hitting the so-called left, and the game is played by receiving the first special lottery. I do. In the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) and high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), even if the game ball B is entered into the gate 2002 by hitting the so-called left, the same as the low probability non-time-saving gaming state In the normal pattern lottery, only a very low probability is won (for example, 1/256), and the variable winning entrance door 2521 has a short opening time (for example, 0.076 seconds) as in the low probability non-time-saving game state. , Compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, the difficulty level (entering ball rate) for entering the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 does not greatly decrease, and is substantially the same.

In a high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), when a normal jackpot (no time-saving game) is won, the machine shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), when winning a probability variable jackpot (ceiling set), the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) after the jackpot game ends. Although not shown, in the high probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), even if you win the probability variable jackpot (no ceiling), the high probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) is after the end of the jackpot game. maintained.

In a high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), when a normal jackpot (no time-saving) is won, the game state is shifted to a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, in a high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling), when winning a probability variable jackpot (no ceiling), the game shifts to a high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) after the jackpot game ends. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), even if the probability variable big hit (ceiling set) is won, the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is maintained.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), when the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) is won, the number of ceiling times according to the winning pattern of the probability variable jackpot is reset. Also, in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), if you win the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) and the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) starts again, the number of remaining fluctuations up to the ceiling and the number of remaining small hit fluctuations , the state immediately before the start of the variable probability big hit (ceiling set) game may be taken over.

In the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), when the variation of the predetermined number of times ends or the small hit variation of the predetermined number of times ends (hereinafter also referred to as reaching the ceiling), the time-saving gaming state ends, and the high probability non It shifts to a time-saving game state. As described above, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state is a so-called small-hit rush state, and the player can obtain a large number of balls.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), and high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), if you win the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) that is part of the probability variable jackpot, the After the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state, but the percentage of winning the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) among the jackpots is extremely low (for example, 0.5% of the jackpots in a low-probability state, high 5% of the jackpot in the probability state).

Although the details will be described later, the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) is a low probability non-time-saving game state, a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), and a high probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling). It is a big hit pattern that shifts to a probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, for example, even if you win in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, you cannot shift to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state, but if you win in a high probability short-time gaming state (no ceiling) and a high probability short-time gaming state (with ceiling) There is also a jackpot pattern that transitions to a probability non-time-saving game state (that is, the jackpot pattern is a variable jackpot that is not a straight rush in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, but a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) and a high probability In the time-saving game state (with ceiling), it is a probability variable big hit (direct rush)).

Therefore, in order to move to a high probability non-time-saving game state and obtain a lot of balls, it is necessary to move to a high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling) and reach the ceiling without pulling a big hit in the high probability game state. is the main migration route.

Also, as described above, since all jackpot games are two rounds, the player can obtain only a small amount of balls depending on the jackpot game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state and the high probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), the player expects to win the probability variable jackpot (with ceiling), and the high probability time-saving gaming state In (with a ceiling), it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the player expects that the jackpot will not be won.

In the low-probability non-time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), and high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), if you win the normal jackpot (with time saving) that is part of the normal jackpot, the jackpot game Although it shifts to a low-probability time-saving game state after the end of, the ratio is extremely low (for example, 1% of the big hits), so illustration is omitted.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (small hit rush state), the game ball is entered into the second start port 2005, which is always open by hitting the so-called right hand, and a special lottery (hereinafter referred to as the second Also called a special lottery) is received and the game is played. As explained in FIG. 220(a), in a high probability state, a small hit is won with an extremely high probability (63488/655536), and in the small hit game won by the variation of the special figure 2, to the second big winning port 2007 Since it is easy to enter the game ball B, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the player can increase the number of balls by the small winning game that enters with this extremely high probability.

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, if a variable probability big win is won, the high-probability non-time-saving game state is maintained even after the end of the big win game. On the other hand, in the high-probability non-work-time-saving game state, when the normal jackpot is won, the state shifts to the low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is a game characteristic that the player expects not to win the jackpot, and even if he wins, he usually does not win the jackpot.

In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, if the game ball B is entered into the gate 2002 by hitting the so-called left, the probability is extremely high in the normal symbol lottery (eg, 255/256, 100% like 256/256 ), the variable winning opening door 2521 opens for a long time (for example, 5.5 seconds), and the game ball B is easily entered into the first starting opening 2004 compared to the non-time-saving gaming state. can be balled.

The low-probability time-saving game state is a so-called pull-back mode, and when a variable probability big win is won in the low-probability time-saving game state, regardless of the type of the big win, the state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state after the big win game is finished. In a low-probability time-saving game state, when a normal jackpot (without time-saving) is won, the game is shifted to a low-probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, when the normal jackpot (with time-saving) is elected, the ceiling number of times is reset. Also, in the low-high-probability time-saving gaming state, if the normal jackpot (with time-saving) is won and the low-high-probability time-saving gaming state starts again, the remaining number of fluctuations up to the ceiling and the remaining number of small hit fluctuations Yes) The state immediately before the game starts may be taken over.

Further, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, when the predetermined number of fluctuations are completed or the predetermined number of minor hit fluctuations are completed, the time-saving game state is ended, and the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the low-probability time-saving gaming state is maintained even if the normal jackpot (with time-saving) is elected.

Hereinafter, the control for realizing the small hit rush state will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 are designed to start the fluctuation display individually according to the extraction of the special random number, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (simultaneous variation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (reserved), the reserved special random numbers are individually digested according to the progress of the variation display of the individual special random numbers.

That is, when the first special symbol during fluctuation stops, the first special symbol retained in the first special symbol storage display device starts to vary, and when the second special symbol during fluctuation stops, the second special symbol. Variation of the second special symbol held in the memory display is started. In addition, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are displayed so as to change simultaneously in correspondence with the variation of each special symbol.

It should be noted that if one of the special figures 1 or special figure 2 stops in the display mode indicating the big hit, as a process for the other special figure during simultaneous fluctuation, one of the following processes is performed will be As a first processing example, while controlling the jackpot game by one special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is deleted (forcibly stopped by losing). In this case, even after the big hit game ends, the variation of the deleted special symbol is not restarted, and the next special symbol of the other is started from the variation.

As a second processing example, while controlling the big hit game by one special figure, the elapse of the variation time of the other special figure is temporarily stopped during execution of the big hit game. During the execution of the big hit game, the special symbols during the suspension of fluctuation are displayed, for example, by blinking on the special symbol display (displayed in a manner different from when not paused (the player can recognize that the player is paused)) be done. After the end of the jackpot game, the temporarily stopped variable display of the other special figure is resumed from the remaining variable time. As a third processing example, while controlling the big hit game by one special figure, the fluctuation time of the other special figure is reset, and after the end of the big hit game, the variation of the other special figure is started again.

As described above, in this chapter, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state is a state (so-called small-hit rush) in which it is easy to acquire small-hit balls. Hereinafter, only in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, an example of specifications for realizing a small hit rush will be described.

Since the second starting port 2005 is not provided with an opening/closing member or the like, the second starting port 2005 is always open. You can enter the ball and receive the second special lottery. In addition, in all game states, the probability of winning a small hit due to the variation of the special figure 2 is extremely high.

However, in the game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is very long compared to the variation time of the special figure 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest variation time of the special figure 2 (for example, about 5 minutes) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 (for example, about 3 minutes). Therefore, in the small winning game of special figure 2, the second large winning opening 2007 is opened, but after the game ball B is entered into the second starting opening 2005, the second large winning game corresponding to the entering ball It takes a very long time until the winning opening 2007 is opened. Furthermore, the opening and closing time of the second large winning opening 2007 in the small winning game is short (for example, 0.1 seconds shorter than the opening time of the first large winning opening 2006 in the big winning game) and the number of times of opening and closing is small (for example, 1 round). Even if the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007 with good timing during the small winning game.

Even if it is possible to enter the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007 with good timing during the small winning game of special figure 2, since the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is very long, per unit time The number of balls obtained is small, and the game cannot be progressed smoothly. Therefore, in the game state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, in principle, the player hits left and advances the game so as to enter the game ball B into the first start hole 2004 .

On the other hand, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the special figure 2 shortened small hit variation (variation in which the reach effect is not executed) is shorter than the shortest variation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of the special figure 1 It is set, and when the small hit variation starts in the state where the special figure 2 is held in the high probability non-time saving game state, the shortened small hit variation is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit, and by proceeding with the game so as to enter the game ball B into the second start port 2005, without reducing the number of exit balls, In addition, the game can be progressed smoothly.

Thus, in the high-probability non-working-time-saving game state, the player enters the game ball B into the second start port 2005 to frequently win a small hit, and obtains the ball released by the small win game. be able to. On the other hand, in a game state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the player cannot efficiently obtain a ball even if the game ball B is entered into the second start hole 2005 . As a result, it is possible to realize a small winning rush state in which it is easy to obtain small winning balls only in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

FIG. 223 is an example of a time saving number table (time saving number table) given when any hit (including a big hit and a small hit) is won in a low probability non-time saving game state. FIG. 224 is an example of a time saving frequency table of a high probability time saving game state. FIG. 225 is an example of a time saving frequency table of a low probability time saving game state. FIG. 226 is an example of a time saving frequency table of a high probability non-time saving game state.

The time saving frequency table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The time saving number table defines the number of times of the time saving game state for each combination of the game state when a big win is won in the special lottery and the type of the winning symbol. In addition, the time saving frequency table defines the type of variation pattern for each combination of the game state when a big win is won in the special lottery and the type of winning symbol.

For example, row 2231 of the time saving number table in FIG. A time saving game state of a low probability time saving game state to enter indicates an end opportunity (if even one of the end opportunities is satisfied, the time saving game state is ended).

As the line 2231 shows, the end opportunity is that the 31st special figure 1 variation starts after the time saving gaming state starts, the 6th special figure 2 variation starts, and the time saving gaming state is The 100th special symbol variation from the start (that is, the total number of variations of the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 is the 100th) starts, and the small hit variation ends 31 times (small hit variation The time saving game state may end at the end of , or the time saving game state may end at the start of the small win game corresponding to the small win variation). That is, "special figure 1_2R normal pattern 2" is a normal pattern (with time saving).

In the end opportunity indicated by the line 2231, the total number of fluctuations of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is defined as 100 times, but if the game is played in a normal way in the low probability time-saving gaming state, the special figure 1 Since the game will be played by executing the variation of the special figure 2, in order to prevent the time saving gaming state from being extended due to the variation of the special figure 2, the total number of variations of the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 The end trigger may be 31 times or more, which is the end trigger due to the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1.

However, in order to provide a margin, the number of times is preferably 31 plus a predetermined number (for example, 35 times). Also, in the end trigger indicated by row 2231, since the number of fluctuations of special figure 2 is defined as 6 times, the end trigger by the total number of fluctuations of the fluctuation of special figure 1 and the fluctuation of special figure 2 is special figure 1 It may be a value smaller than the sum of 31 times which is the end opportunity by the number of fluctuations and 6 times which is the end opportunity by the number of fluctuations of special figure 2.

In addition, row 2232 is a high probability short-time gaming state that enters after the end of the big-hitting game performed after the big-hitting variation when the big-hitting variation of "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 13" is performed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state of indicates the end opportunity to end. After the big hit game by the specific pattern is finished, it is set to the high probability time saving game state, but as shown in row 2232, the 100th special figure 1 fluctuation starts after the time saving game state starts, the 100th time If the fluctuation of the special figure 2 starts, the 100th special symbol fluctuation starts after the time saving game state starts, and the small hit fluctuation ends 48 times, the time saving game is achieved The state ends and shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (that is, a small hit rush state).

Therefore, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 13" is a pattern of the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set). Similarly, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the “special figure 1_2R specific pattern 2” to “special figure 1_2R specific pattern 12” are also patterns of the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 18" and "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 19" are patterns of the probability variable big hit (ceiling set). According to FIG. 2220 (b), the distribution of "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 18" and "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 19" is only 8/200 in total. less likely to be elected.

In addition, as described above, in the fluctuation of the high probability gaming state, it is not possible to win a loss, and since all fluctuations other than the big hit fluctuation are small hit fluctuations, among the end triggers indicated by the line 2232, those that are actually achievable are small hits It is only the ending opportunity due to winning (the number of fluctuations of special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, and the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both greater than the number of ending opportunities due to small hits For). Therefore, if the 48th variation starts without winning the big hit, the 48th small hit variation is substantially started, and the time-saving gaming state indicated by the row 2231 ends. ”, the ceiling of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is 48 times.

As mentioned above, although the probability is low in the low-probability time-saving game state, the number of fluctuations of special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 Time-saving game by the end opportunity Since the state may end, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 checks the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 after the time saving game state starts to check the number of remaining time saving must be counted to. On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling), the time-saving gaming state ends due to the ending trigger due to the number of fluctuations of special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of special figure 2, or the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 Since there is no such thing, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 counts the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 after the time saving game state starts to check the remaining time saving number of times OK or not.

223 and 224, it can be seen that there are multiple types of ceiling lengths in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) that shifts by winning the pattern of the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set). Details will be described later, but immediately after moving to a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), there is a case where the effect that does not notify the number of remaining small hit fluctuations to the ceiling is not executed, so when the player reaches the ceiling You can watch with a sense of tension whether you will do it or not.

In addition, in the high probability time-saving gaming state, it may be possible to win the deviation in the variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, in this case, the number of variations of the special figure 1, the number of variations of the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 And there is a possibility that the time saving game state will end due to the end opportunity due to the total number of fluctuations of special figure 2.

In addition, row 2233 is a high probability short-time gaming state that enters after the end of the big-hitting game performed after the big-hitting variation when the jackpot variation is performed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The time-saving gaming state of indicates the end opportunity to end. Although it is set to a high probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game by the specific symbol, "next time" indicated by the line 2233 indicates that the next jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, in the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 20" is a pattern of a probability variable jackpot (no ceiling). Similarly, in the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the “special figure 1_2R specific pattern 14” to “special figure 1_2R specific pattern 19” are also patterns of the probability variable jackpot (no ceiling). Similarly, “special figure 2_2R specific pattern 1” to “special figure 2_2R specific pattern 2” are also patterns of probability variable big hits (no ceiling).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 18" and "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 19" are patterns of the probability variable big hit (ceiling set). According to FIG. 2220 (b), the distribution of "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 18" and "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 19" is only 8/200 in total. The probability of winning is low compared to the probability of winning a probability variable jackpot (no ceiling), which will be described later.

In addition, according to FIG. 223, the special figure 2 jackpot pattern is a pattern of a probability variable jackpot (no ceiling) “special figure 2_2R specific pattern 1” to “special figure 2_2R specific pattern 2”, and a normal jackpot (no time saving ), which is a pattern of "Special 2_2R normal pattern 1", so even if you run a game with a so-called right-handed game in a low-probability non-time-saving game state (lottery by special 2 is performed and a big hit is won Even if you do), it is not possible to shift to the most advantageous high probability non-time-saving gaming state for the player, so in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the so-called left-handed game (a game method in which the lottery is performed by special figure 1) Recommended to do. Similarly, according to FIGS. 224 and 225, in the high probability time-saving gaming state and low probability time-saving gaming state, even if the game is executed with a so-called right-handed game, it is possible to shift to the most advantageous high probability non-time-saving gaming state Since it is not possible, it is recommended to execute the game with so-called left-handed hitting even in the high probability time saving game state and the low probability time saving game state.

In addition, row 2234 is, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the jackpot variation of "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 1" is performed, to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game is completed after the jackpot variation Indicates to migrate. The “0” indicated by the row 2234 means that even if the variation of the special figure 1, the variation of the special figure 2, the total variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the small hit variation are not executed even once (high probability) Indicates that the time saving gaming state starts.

That is, in the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the "special figure 1_2R specific symbol 1" is a symbol of a probability variable jackpot (direct rush). According to FIG. 220, the distribution of "special 1_2R specific pattern 1" is only 1/200, so the probability of winning a variable jackpot (direct rush) in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state is a variable jackpot (no ceiling) or Low compared to the probability of winning a variable jackpot (ceiling set).

Similarly, according to FIG. 224, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, "special figure 1_2R specific symbol 1" and "special figure 1_2R specific symbol 16" are symbols of the probability variable big hit (direct rush). According to FIG. 220, the ratio of being distributed to "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 1" or "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 16" is 10/200, and the probability of winning a definite variable jackpot (straight rush) in a high-probability short-time gaming state is Although the probability of winning a variable probability big win (direct rush) in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is higher than that of winning a probability-variable big win (no ceiling) in a high-probability time-saving game state, it is lower than the probability of winning a probability variable big win (no ceiling).

Also, as shown by row 2231, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the big hit variation of "special figure 1_2R normal pattern 2" is performed, it enters after the big hit game ends after the big hit variation (low Probability) In the time-saving gaming state, in the fluctuations up to the 29th time of the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern of the table A indicated by the fluctuation pattern auxiliary table described later is executed, and the next special figure 1 once (that is, 30 second), the variation of the variation pattern of the table B indicated by the variation pattern auxiliary table is executed, and the next special figure 1 1 time (that is, the 31st) variation In the variation, the table indicated by the variation pattern auxiliary table The variation of the variation pattern of C is executed, and all of the subsequent special figures 1 (that is, all of the 32nd and subsequent) variations (∞ means all subsequent variations) are indicated by the variation pattern auxiliary table. Variation of the variation pattern of table A is executed.

Also, as shown by row 2231, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the big hit variation of "special figure 1_2R normal pattern 2" is performed, it enters after the big hit game ends after the big hit variation (low Probability) In the time-saving gaming state, regarding the variation of the special figure 2, the variation of the variation pattern of the table A indicated by the variation pattern auxiliary table is executed in the variation after the first time (that is, all variations). In addition, although the details will be described later, the variation pattern auxiliary table is defined for each combination of the gaming state and the presence or absence of operation of the time saving function.

In addition, since the game state does not shift by winning the small hit as described above, in the time saving number table, the number of time saving after winning the small win game and the type of variation pattern are not defined.

According to FIG. 225, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, even if you win any jackpot pattern, after the jackpot game ends, it shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (because the values in the time-saving number of times column are all 0) . Therefore, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, if the normal pattern is won, the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit game, and if the specific pattern is won, the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state is after the end of the big hit game. to move to.

According to FIG. 226, in the high-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, if a specific symbol is won, the state shifts to the high-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit game. Further, in the high-probability non-work-time-saving game state, if the normal symbol is won, the state shifts to the low-probability time-saving game state after the big hit game ends. In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the jackpot probability and the distribution between the normal pattern and the specific pattern do not change regardless of which variation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but as described above, the so-called right hit For example, it is possible to easily enter the game ball B into the second start port 2005 which is always open, and to acquire the ball in the small hit game of the special figure 2, so that it is possible to execute right hitting. Recommended.

In addition, in the game state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is a game method that is advantageous for the player to execute the game with left-handed hitting, but the second start port 2005 is always open, and the game board 5 There is no gate for receiving the ordinary lottery on the right side of the . Therefore, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are provided with performance gates, respectively. In a game state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, when the player executes the game with the right-handed stroke and the game ball B passes through the performance gate, the left-handed stroke caution is called to call attention to execute the game with the left-handed stroke. A performance is performed.

Assuming that the performance gate is not provided, the sensor provided in the second starting port 2005 can most easily detect the game ball B provided on the right side of the game board 5 . In this case, for example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state, if the player erroneously hits to the right and executes the game, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2005, a left-handed attention calling effect is executed. However, when the game ball B enters the second start hole 2005, the next game ball B has already been struck with such strength that it reaches the right part of the game board 5, so the left Even if the rotation angle of the handle 192 is adjusted after the appearance of the performance for calling attention to hitting, there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls B may enter the second starting hole 2005.例文帳に追加

Also, according to FIG. 224, in the high probability time-saving gaming state, if you win the normal jackpot of the special figure 2, it will shift to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and if you win the probability variable jackpot of the special figure 2, the high probability time-saving gaming state ( No ceiling), the special figure 2 jackpot is a special figure 1 jackpot that can also transition to a low probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) It is disadvantageous for the player compared to . In addition, since the special figure 2 big hit is won at 2048/65536, if a plurality of game balls B enter the second start hole 2005, there is a good possibility of winning the special figure 2 big hit. .

Therefore, if the sensor of the second starting port 2005 detects the game ball B and the attention calling effect is performed, it is highly likely that the player will be disadvantaged. Then, the installation position of the effect gate is set until the next time the game ball B is fired when the right-handed game ball B passes through the effect gate (if the handle 192 is left twisted, the previous time It is desirable that the game ball B is positioned so that the rotation angle of the handle 192 can be adjusted. Specifically, for example, if the effect gate is installed at a position where the game ball B passes through the effect gate 0.2 seconds after the game ball B is shot, left-handed attention calling effect Since there is a period of 0.4 seconds from the start of the display until the next game ball B is shot, the player can adjust the rotation angle of the handle 192 .

227 and 228 are examples of the variation pattern auxiliary table. FIG. 272(a) is an example of the variation pattern auxiliary table used in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 227(b) is an example of the variation pattern auxiliary table used in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. FIG. 228(a) is an example of the variation pattern auxiliary table used in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 228(b) is an example of the variation pattern auxiliary table used in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The variation pattern auxiliary table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example.

The types of fluctuation patterns indicated by the auxiliary fluctuation time tables of FIGS. 227 and 228 will be described below. First, the type of variation pattern of the low probability non-time-saving gaming state of FIG. 227(a) will be described. "Normal time" is a normal variation pattern of special figure 1 in a low probability non-time saving gaming state.

"Normal time (irregular time only)" is, according to Figures 223, 224, and 226, used in the 30th and 31st special figure 1 fluctuations after transitioning to the low probability time saving gaming state It is a variation pattern. However, since the 30th and 31st fluctuations after shifting to the low probability time saving gaming state are low probability non time saving gaming states, before reaching these fluctuations, transition to the low probability time saving gaming state It is necessary to end the time saving game state by starting the variation of the 6th special figure 2 from.

"Capture countermeasure length variation" is a variation pattern of the special figure 2 in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. As described above, since the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter is provided with a small hit rush, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is long except for the high probability non-time-saving game state. The variation time of the deviation variation and the minor hit variation of the variation pattern of "capture countermeasure length variation" is, for example, about 4 minutes, and the effect display device 1600 does not perform any effect. The variation time of the variation pattern of "capture countermeasure length variation" is, for example, about 3 minutes. It is desirable to perform an effect indicating that a big hit variation is to be performed. Also, for the same reason, an effect may be performed to indicate that a big win variation will be performed at the time of winning corresponding to the big win variation of the variation pattern of "capture countermeasure length variation".

The kind of variation pattern of low probability time saving game state in Figure 227 (b) is explained. "Time saving variation" is a normal variation pattern of special figure 1 in a low probability time saving gaming state. "Forced confrontation" is, according to Figures 223, 224, and 226, the 30th special figure 1 fluctuation from the transition to the low probability time saving game state (that is, the time saving game As long as the state is not terminated, it is a variation pattern used in the variation of the special figure 1 before the variation of the special figure 1 immediately before the end of the low probability time saving gaming state). In the "forced confrontation" variation, a confrontation effect, which will be described later, is forcibly executed.

"Low probability time saving result" means, according to Figure 223, Figure 224, and Figure 226, the 31st special figure 1 variation after transitioning to the low probability time saving gaming state (that is, the variation of special figure 2) As long as the time saving gaming state is not terminated, it is a variation pattern used in special figure 1 variation) just before the end of the low probability time saving gaming state. In the change of "low probability time-saving result", transition to high probability non-time-saving game state, then low probability non-time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling), and high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) An effect of displaying a result screen showing the obtained balls is executed. It should be noted that, without going through the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, if the "low-probability time-saving result" is changed, the result screen may not be displayed, instead, for example, table A "time-saving It is preferable to display the effect used in "Variation".

If the variation of the "low probability time-saving result" is a variation of the probability variation jackpot, it will shift to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state again, so that the resurrection effect may be performed after displaying the result screen, or the result You may make it perform the production|presentation which shows winning a probability variable jackpot (it shifts to a high probability non-time-saving game state), without displaying a screen. In addition, in order to prevent the player from misunderstanding when moving to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the result screen is not displayed and a production indicating that a normal jackpot is won (shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is provided. You can do it.

"Capture countermeasure length variation (for time saving)" is a variation pattern of special figure 2 in a low probability time saving game state, and is a variation pattern similar to "capture countermeasure length variation" in a low probability non-time saving game state. In addition, if you win a normal jackpot in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and shift to a low-probability time-saving gaming state, the maximum suspension of special figure 2 is due to hitting right in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. There may be 4 left. In this case, when the transition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state, for example, when the special figure 1 small hit game is executed, the special figure 2 loss fluctuation and small hit fluctuation are forced (for example, a very short time of about 1 second The design may be determined as a deviation variation at the variation time). However, even in such a case, if the holding of the special figure 2 is a big hit variation, it is necessary not to forcibly fix the holding of the special figure 2 as a loss variation so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. Desirable (if this special figure 2 hold is usually a big hit change, it will shift to a low probability non-time-saving game state (the most disadvantageous state for the player), so forcibly confirm it as a loss change ).

The kind of variation pattern of high probability non-time saving game state (small hit rush state) of Figure 228 (a) is explained. "Special figure 1 variation in RUSH" is a variation pattern selected by variation of special figure 1 in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. As described above, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the execution of the variation of the special figure 1 is an irregular state in order to progress the game by hitting to the right. If the "RUSH medium special figure 1 variation" is a small hit variation (not winning during high probability), the variation time is long (for example, executed in a game state other than a high probability non-time saving game state It is desirable that it is about 4 minutes longer than all the fluctuation times in Special Figure 1).

Also, if the "RUSH medium special figure 1 variation" is a small hit variation, the player recognizes that advantageous results cannot be obtained even if the special figure 1 variation is executed in a high probability non-time saving game state. Therefore, it is desirable that the effect display device 1600 does not execute the effect.

The variation time when "RUSH medium special figure 1 variation" is a big hit variation is shorter than the variation time when it is a small hit variation, for example about 30 seconds. For example, when "RUSH middle special figure 1 variation" is a big hit variation, the variation of the special figure 2 won when this big hit variation is being executed may be forced to be a small hit variation, In this case, it is possible to obtain a ball by a small hit rush even during the big hit variation of the special figure 1.

"For RUSH" is a normal variation of the special figure 2 in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state, and an effect dedicated to the small hit rush state is executed. The variation time of variation for "for RUSH" is selected from, for example, 1 second, 4 seconds, and 10 seconds. In particular, a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected in the small winning variation with the reservation of the special figure 2, whereby the small winning is won speedily, and the increasing speed of the output balls in the small winning game state increases.

The kind of variation pattern of high probability time saving game state in Figure 228 (b) is explained. "Normal time" is a variation pattern selected in the normal variation of the special figure 1 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. "During counter activation (next training)" is, according to Figures 223 and 224, a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of the special figure 1 of the predetermined number of times after the high probability time-saving gaming state starts. In the variation of "counter activation (next training)", the next variation prepares for the confrontation production (time-saving high probability game state (with ceiling)). If it is executed in a high-probability non-time-saving game state, win in the confrontation production, and if the next variation is executed in a game state other than the high-probability non-time-saving game state, lose in the confrontation production). A production that suggests

The counter referred to here is a counter that suggests the number of remaining small hit fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling of the high probability time-saving gaming state, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600, although the details will be described later. . However, the counter may display the number of true remaining small hit fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling in the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), or in the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) The number of false remaining small hit fluctuations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling may be displayed (for example, a value greater or less than the number of remaining small hit fluctuations until the ceiling), or a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling ), the number of false remaining small hit fluctuations (variation number) may be displayed even though the ceiling is not reached. That is, when the counter is displayed, the player expects the value of the counter to become zero.

"During counter activation (next reach ceiling)" is, according to FIGS. 223 and 224, a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of the special figure 1 of the predetermined number of times after the high probability time-saving gaming state starts. In the variation of "during counter activation (next reach ceiling)", an effect is performed that suggests that the reach effect will be performed in the next variation. "During counter activation (next reach ceiling)" is, according to FIGS. is performed, and even if the small hit variation ends, it does not shift to a high probability non-time-saving game state).

According to Figures 223 and 224, "training transition" is, in the high probability time-saving gaming state, the next (after) variation of the variation of "during counter activation (next training)" variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of the special figure 1 is. In the "transition to training" variation, an effect suggesting the start of the training effect is executed. In addition, the variation of "Training shift" can be executed even with the variation of the special figure 1 from the beginning to the predetermined number of times after shifting to the high probability state.

"During training", according to Figure 223 and Figure 224, in the high probability time-saving gaming state, is a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of special figure 1 after the next time of the variation of "training transition". In the variation of "during training", a training effect is executed. It should be noted that the variation of "during training" can also be performed with the variation of special figure 1 from the beginning of the transition to the high probability state to the predetermined number of times.

"During training reach ceiling", according to Figures 223 and 224, in the high probability time-saving gaming state, it is a variation pattern that can be executed in the variation of special figure 1 after the next time of the variation of "during training". In the variation of the "training reach ceiling", a reach is formed in the training production. It should be noted that the variation of the "reach ceiling during training" can be executed even in the variation of the first special figure 1 that has shifted to the high probability state.

"Normal background reach ceiling", according to Figures 223 and 224, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern that can be executed in the next special figure 1 variation of the variation of "during counter activation (next time reach ceiling)" is. In the variation of the “normal background reach ceiling”, the reach effect is executed after the normal background (different from the training effect) in the high probability time saving game state is displayed.

"Capture countermeasure length variation" is a variation pattern that is executed in the variation of all the special figures 2 in the high probability time-saving gaming state, and is the same variation pattern as the "capture countermeasure length variation" in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state. .

The basic change in the variation pattern of the special figure 1 in the above-described high probability time-saving gaming state will be collectively described. In the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), first, the “normal” variation pattern is executed, and then the counter is displayed “during counter activation (next training)” or “during counter activation (next reach ceiling)” variation pattern is executed.

Like the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) that has been shifted by winning "special figure 1_specific pattern 7" in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state of FIG. When the variation pattern of "executing (next training)" is executed, the variation pattern of "training transition" is executed and the training production starts, followed by the "during training" variation pattern After the high In the final variation of the probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), reach production is executed according to the variation pattern of "reach ceiling during training". It is notified that the ceiling in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) has been reached in the fluctuation of this "training reach ceiling", and the game shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving game state.

Like the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) that has been shifted by winning "special figure 1 _ specific pattern 4" in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state of FIG. When the variation pattern of "during activation (next reach ceiling)" is executed, after that, the reach performance is performed by the variation pattern of "usual background reach ceiling" in the final variation of the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). In the fluctuation of this "normal background reach ceiling", it is notified that the ceiling in the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling) has been reached, and it shifts to the high probability non time saving game state.

Regarding the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), the change in the variation pattern until reaching the "training reach ceiling" or "normal background reach ceiling" is the same as above, but the high-probability time-saving gaming state ( No ceiling) does not reach the ceiling, so it is announced that it cannot transition to a high probability non-time-saving game state in the fluctuation of "training reach ceiling" or "normal background reach ceiling", and in the next and subsequent fluctuations A "normal" variation pattern is selected.

In addition, as in the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) that has been shifted by winning the "special figure 1_specific pattern 2" in the low probability non-time-saving game state of FIG. Like the pattern selected as a pattern and the high probability time saving game state (no ceiling) that has been shifted by winning the "special figure 1 _ specific pattern 3" in the low probability non time saving game state of FIG. 223, "under training" is selected as the first variation pattern.

In addition, like the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) that has been shifted by winning the "special pattern 1 _ specific pattern 16" in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state of FIG. There is also a pattern in which "time" is selected.

As described above, in both the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), by executing the variation pattern in which the counter appears, the player waits until the counter reaches zero , Since it is not possible to recognize which game state is staying in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) or the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), it is possible to have a sense of tension.

In addition, in order to increase the expectation of transition to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state when the counter appears, although the variation pattern in which the counter appears can be executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), high In the probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), the variation pattern in which the counter appears may not be executed.

Also, for example, when the number of remaining minor hit fluctuations up to the ceiling is large, it is difficult to start displaying the counter, and the smaller the number of remaining minor hit fluctuations (for example, the number of remaining minor hit fluctuations up to the ceiling is 10 times or less, Or, it is preferable that the display of the counter is easy to start, such as being less than half of the ceiling set at the time of transition to the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling). This is because even if the counter is displayed too early, it is unlikely that the counter will reach the ceiling, and the player will be disappointed after making him look forward to it.

Also, for example, after the counter is displayed, it may be erased, and when the number of remaining small hit fluctuations to the ceiling is reduced (for example, the number of remaining small hit fluctuations to the ceiling is 10 times or less, or a high probability time saving It may be redisplayed to the game state (half or less of the ceiling set at the time of transition to the game state (with ceiling), etc.). As a result, once the counter is displayed, the player has a sense of anticipation, and after the counter is erased, the player feels nervous because it is difficult to understand the number of remaining minor hit fluctuations up to the ceiling. Since the small hit variation frequency is small, a strong sense of expectation can be held. Also, in order to give the player a stronger sense of tension, it is not necessary to display the counter again after erasing it after displaying it.

Also, for example, when the counter is displayed for the first time, it may be displayed so that the exact number of remaining small hit fluctuations up to the ceiling cannot be seen (for example, "remaining?" or "remaining 30 times or less" is displayed), After that, when the number of remaining small hit fluctuations to the ceiling decreases (for example, the number of remaining small hit fluctuations to the ceiling is 10 times or less, or less than half of the ceiling set when transitioning to the high probability short-time game state (with ceiling) etc.) may display the correct number of remaining small hits. As a result, the player has a sense of anticipation when the counter is displayed although the player does not know the number of remaining small win fluctuations, and when the correct number of remaining small win fluctuations is displayed, the number of remaining small win fluctuations is small. You can have more hope. Also, in order to give the player a sense of surprise, it is not necessary to display the exact number of remaining minor hit fluctuations until the ceiling is reached.

In addition, in both the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), the player can quickly decrease the value of the counter due to the change in the variation pattern that the counter appears and undergoes training. The player can have a sense of tension while wishing that the counter will appear, and the player can have an exhilarating feeling due to the change in the fluctuation pattern that the reach ceiling is reached immediately after the counter appears.

FIG. 229 is an example of a winning time table. The winning time table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The hit time table in FIG. 229 (a) is from the start of the small winning game and the big winning game to the first opening of the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 (opening in the first round starts Define the winning performance time j, which is the time until the game is played. The hit time table in FIG. 229(b) is the final closing of the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 in the small winning game and the big winning game (after closing in the last round is completed). A final winning performance time y, which is the time until the big winning game ends, is defined.

As shown in FIG. 229, the winning start performance time j and the final winning performance time y differ depending on the game state when the winning is won even if the pattern is the same. The game state immediately before is referred to, and the game state immediately after the end of the small winning game is referred to for the small winning game. That is, for example, if you win a small hit in the final variation of the high-probability time-saving game state (with a ceiling) (variation that reaches the ceiling), the hit start production time j and the final hit production time y of the small winning game A high probability non-time-saving gaming state is referred to.

FIG. 230 is an example of a big winning opening opening time table. The special prize opening time table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The big winning opening opening time table is a table for defining the opening time in rounds of small winning games and big winning games. Pattern A and pattern B are opening times mainly used in rounds during big win games, and pattern C and pattern D are opening times mainly used in rounds during small win games.

Figures 231, 232, and 233 are examples of the big winning opening pattern table. The big winning hole opening pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The big winning hole opening pattern table in FIG. 231 shows the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 2006 (the value "left" in the table indicates the first big winning hole 2006) in the special figure 1 big win game. The 232 big winning hole opening pattern table shows the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 in the special figure 2 big winning game (the value "right" in the table indicates the second big winning hole 2007). The opening pattern is shown, and the large winning opening opening pattern table of FIG. 233 shows the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 2006 or the second large winning opening 2007 in the small winning game.

229(a) is stored in the start j column in the big winning opening opening pattern table, and one of the patterns in the big winning opening opening time table in FIG. 230 is stored in the round column. 229(b) is stored in the final y column.

First, the schedule of the small winning game will be explained. According to FIG. 233, the pattern e is selected as the winning production time j of the small winning game of the special figure 1, and the pattern f is selected as the winning production time j of the small winning game of the special figure 2. The pattern e and the pattern f are 0.992 seconds in the pattern e of the high probability non-time saving game state, but are all 0.3 seconds in the other game states. In other words, for the small hit of the special figure 1 in the high probability non-time-saving game state (small hit rush state), by taking a longer time until the start of the round, it is smoother and more smooth for the player by hitting right in the small hit rush state. It can suggest that the game progresses in an advantageous manner.

In addition, in the small winning game of special figure 1, pattern C is selected as the opening time of the big winning opening, and in the small winning game of special figure 2, pattern D is selected as the opening time of the big winning opening. The opening time of pattern D is 0.1 seconds. Since the opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, it seems difficult to win a prize in the big prize hole, but since it is structured so that the game ball rolls on the opening and closing member of the second big prize hole, It is not difficult to win a prize in the two major prize gates.

Therefore, by executing the game with the right hand during the small winning rush, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 2007 and the winning ball can be obtained. On the other hand, the open time of pattern D is 0.06 seconds. Therefore, although a small hit is won with a very high probability in a low probability non-time-saving game state, a low probability time-saving game state, and a high probability time-saving game state, even if a left hit is executed, the game ball is in the first big winning hole 2006 It is difficult to get a prize ball by entering a ball (for example, only about 0.2 balls/minute are won).

In addition, the pattern "ki" is selected as the winning final performance time y of the small winning game of the special figure 1, and the pattern "ku" is selected as the winning final performance time y of the small winning game of the special figure 2. - 特許庁In the pattern "Ki", an extremely short time (0.008 seconds) is selected in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, so that a small hit game is won with an extremely high probability in the variation of the special figure 1 However, the game can be smoothly progressed. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state in the pattern "K", a longer time (17 seconds) is selected than in other game states, so that hitting to the right in the small hit rush state is smoother and more smooth for the player. It can suggest that the game progresses in an advantageous manner. On the other hand, in the pattern "K", even in the high probability non-time-saving game state, a short time (0.008 seconds) is selected, so that the small hit game can be ended early in the small hit rush state. Increases ball speed.

The schedule of the jackpot game will be described below. According to FIG. 229(a), in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the winning start production time j is a long time (33 seconds) in pattern a and pattern c, and a short time (0.5 seconds) in pattern b and pattern d. 2 seconds) (pattern e and pattern f are used only for small winning games). Similarly, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the winning start effect time j is a long time (33 seconds) in pattern a, and a short time (0.2 seconds) in pattern b, pattern c, and pattern d.

According to Figures 231 and 232, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and high-probability time-saving gaming state, for the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) or normal jackpot (with time saving), the hit start production time j is short (0.2 seconds ) pattern is assigned, and other jackpots are assigned patterns with a long win start presentation time j (33 seconds). As described above, the winning rate of the variable probability jackpot (direct rush) and the normal jackpot (with short working hours) is low compared to other jackpots, and the jackpot is advantageous to the player. The winning start performance time j is different. For example, the screen of the effect display device 1600 suddenly blacks out at the start of the fluctuation of the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) and the normal jackpot (with short working hours), and immediately after the blackout (for example, 1 second later) the probability variable jackpot (direct rush) If you notify whether you have won the jackpot or the normal jackpot (with short working hours), it will be confirmed that you have won one of the jackpots immediately after the start of the fluctuation, so it will be a variable jackpot (direct rush). The winning start presentation time j of the normal jackpot (with short working hours) may be shorter than other jackpots.

Although details will be described later, in the jackpot game of the normal jackpot, the probability variable jackpot (no ceiling), and the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set), which was elected in the low probability non-time-saving game state and the high probability time-saving game state, among these jackpots The winning performance start time j is set long because the performance suggesting whether the game has been won (which of these jackpots has been won at the end of the big win variation is not reported) is executed.

According to FIG. 229(a), in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the winning start production time j in all patterns is a short time below the jackpot start production time j in other game states (0.2 seconds).

In addition, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (small hit rush state), the hit start production time j is a long time (11 seconds) in pattern a, pattern b, and pattern c, and a short time (0 .2 seconds). According to FIGS. 231 and 232, pattern a, pattern b, and pattern c are selected in the special-figure 1 jackpot, and pattern d is selected in the special-figure 2 jackpot. In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the normal game method executes right-handed hitting and executes the variation of the special figure 2, so that the game progresses smoothly by the short hit start performance time j in the pattern d. , and the ball output speed increases.

According to Figures 231 and 232, pattern A is selected as the opening time of the big winning opening 2006 in all rounds of all the jackpots of special figure 1 and the normal big winning of special figure 2, and the first big winning opening 2006 opens. Pattern B is selected as the opening time of the big winning opening and the second big winning opening 2007 is opened in all the rounds of the probability variable jackpot shown in FIG. Both pattern A and pattern B are set with a longer opening time (about 20 seconds) compared to the small winning game round.

According to FIG. 231, for the special figure 1 jackpot, the final hit production time y is the pattern "I" for the "special figure 1_2R normal pattern 2" (normal jackpot (with short working hours)), and the "special figure 1_2R specific pattern 1 ”(Variable big hit (direct rush)) pattern “U” is “Special figure 1_2R specific pattern 16” (Variable big hit (no ceiling) in low probability state, but in high probability state Variable big hit (direct rush)) The pattern "E" is selected for the other jackpot patterns, and the pattern "A" is selected for the other jackpot patterns (the pattern "O" and the pattern "Ka" are only for the jackpot game of the special figure 2, the pattern "K" and the pattern "K"). ” is used only for small-hit games).

According to Figure 229 (b), in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, pattern "A" and pattern "E" (that is, normal jackpot (with time saving) and probability variable jackpot (direct rush) other than the jackpot) time other In the longest (22.5 seconds) compared to the pattern of special figure 1, the pattern "I" (normal jackpot (with short working hours)) has the longest time (10.5 seconds), and the pattern "C" ( The shortest time (4 seconds) for the probability variable jackpot (straight rush)). In this way, the higher the degree of advantage for the player, the shorter the final winning performance time y, so that the transition to the game state that is likely to directly lead to the winning of balls can be made quickly, and the player's sense of exhilaration is increased. can be made

For the same reason, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the time of the pattern "a" (that is, the normal jackpot (with time saving) and the probability variable jackpot (straight rush)) compared to the other special figure 1 patterns In the longest (22.5 seconds), the pattern "I" (normal jackpot (with short working hours)) has the longest time (7.5 seconds), pattern "U" and pattern "E" (definite variable jackpot (direct rush) )) has the shortest time (4 seconds).

In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the time of pattern "a" and pattern "i" is shorter than the other special figure 1 patterns (0.5 seconds), and the time of pattern "c" and pattern "e" is long (4 seconds) compared to the other special figure 1 patterns. It should be noted that, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the pattern "A" ~ "E" time may be all the same time (for example, 4 seconds).

In the high-probability non-time-saving game state, in the normal game method, the variation of the special figure 2 is performed by hitting to the right, so it is better to perform the variation of the special figure 2 for the big hit in the variation of the special figure 1. In order to make the player aware of this fact, a time (41.5 seconds) that is longer than the final hit performance time y of the special figure 2 is adopted for all the big hits of the special figure 1.

According to FIG. 232, for the special figure 2 jackpot, as the final winning performance time y, the pattern "o" is selected for the normal design, and the pattern "ka" for the specific design. According to FIG. 229 (b), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state and high probability time-saving gaming state, the pattern "o" and the pattern "ka" are both the same length of time (3 seconds), but the The time is shorter than all the patterns in Toku-zu 1.

In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the time (4 seconds) of the pattern "ka" (specific design) is longer than the time (0.5 seconds) of the pattern "o" (normal design). In the low-probability time-saving gaming state, if you win a specific pattern, you will transition to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (that is, a state that is advantageous for the player), and if you win a normal pattern, a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (that is, disadvantageous for the player) state), the time for the pattern "F" is set longer, so that the player can take time to produce the transition to an advantageous state, which in turn gives the player a sense of exhilaration. I can hold you.

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the time (2 seconds) of the pattern "K" (specific pattern) is shorter than the time (7.5 seconds) of the pattern "O" (normal pattern). In the high-probability non-short-time gaming state, when a specific pattern is won, the high-probability non-short-time gaming state (that is, a state advantageous to the player) continues, and when the normal pattern is won, the low-probability short-time gaming state (that is, unfavorable for the player) state), by shortening the time of the pattern "K", the game can be continued in the high probability non-time-saving game state without reducing the ball output speed.

234 and 235 are examples of simultaneous variation rule tables. The simultaneous variation rule table is stored, for example, in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. The simultaneous variation rule table defines the rule when the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 are executed at the same time. The simultaneous variation rule table in FIG. 234 defines the rule when the variation in special figure 2 starts while the variation in special figure 1 is being executed, and the simultaneous variation rule table in FIG. Defines the rules when the special figure 2 variation starts while it is running.

According to Figure 234, when the variation of the special figure 2 starts in the state where the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, in principle, the variation of the special figure 1 continues as it is, the special figure 2 starts changing at the same time. Also, in the state where the variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, if the variation of the special figure 2 stops, in principle, the variation of the special figure 1 continues as it is, and the variation of the special figure 2 stops . Exceptions are described below.

When the small winning variation of the special figure 2 is stopped while the losing variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the losing variation of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the small winning game of the special figure 2 is executed, and the special figure 2 is executed. When the small hit game ends, the interrupted loss variation of the special figure 1 resumes (that is, the time from the start of the special figure 1 loss variation to the time of the special figure 2 small winning game until the end is extended).

Similarly, when the small hit variation of the special figure 2 is stopped while the small hit variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the small hit variation of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the small hit game of the special figure 2 is executed. , When the special figure 2 small hit game ends, the interrupted special figure 1 small hit variation is resumed (that is, the special figure 1 small hit variation starts for the time of the special figure 2 small hit game time from start to finish is extended). Similarly, when the small hit variation of the special figure 2 is stopped while the big hit variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the big hit variation of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the small winning game of the special figure 2 is executed, When the special figure 2 small hit game ends, the interrupted special figure 1 big hit variation is restarted (that is, the special figure 1 big hit variation starts and ends for the time of the special figure 2 small winning game. the time to complete is extended).

When the big hit variation of the special figure 2 is stopped while the losing variation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the variation of the special figure 1 is also fixed and stopped, and the big hit game of the special figure 2 is performed. As a result, after the big hit game of special figure 2 ends, the determined variation of special figure 1 is not executed. Similarly, when the special figure 2 big hit variation is stopped while the special figure 1 small hit variation is being executed, the special figure 1 small hit variation is rewritten as a loss variation and fixed and stopped. A jackpot game of FIG. 2 is executed. As a result, after the big hit game of special figure 2 ends, the determined variation of special figure 1 is not executed.

While the special figure 1 jackpot variation is being executed, the special figure 2 jackpot variation does not start. However, if the special figure 1 jackpot variation and the special figure 2 jackpot variation start at the same time, one (for example, special figure 2) jackpot variation starts, and the other (for example, special figure 1) jackpot variation is missed. It starts after being rewritten as a variation.

According to Figure 235, in the state in which the variation of the special figure 2 is being executed, when the variation of the special figure 1 starts, in principle, the variation of the special figure 2 continues as it is, the special figure 1 starts changing at the same time. Also, in the state where the variation of the special figure 2 is being executed, if the variation of the special figure 1 stops, in principle, the variation of the special figure 2 continues as it is, and the variation of the special figure 1 stops . Exceptions are described below.

When the small hit variation of the special figure 1 is stopped in the state where the loss variation of the special figure 2 is being executed, the loss variation of the special figure 2 is also forcibly fixed and stopped. For example, if the variation of the special figure 2 starts just before reaching the ceiling due to the variation of the special figure 1 (small hit) in the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), the variation time of the special figure 2 is an extremely long time is selected, and if the variation of the special figure 2 is not forcibly fixed and stopped, the ceiling Since the game cannot be progressed until the long-time variation of the special figure 2 that started immediately before reaching , the deviation variation of the special figure 2 is forcibly fixed and stopped.

For the same reason, when the small hit variation of the special figure 1 is stopped while the small hit variation of the special figure 2 is being executed, the small hit variation of the special figure 2 is rewritten to the loss variation and then forcibly Confirm stop. Also, for the same reason, when the special figure 1 big hit variation stops while the special figure 2 loss variation is being executed Because there is a possibility), the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 is also forcibly fixed and stopped. Also, for the same reason, when the special figure 1 big hit variation stops while the special figure 2 small hit variation is being executed Because of the possibility), the small hit variation of the special figure 2 is rewritten as a loss variation and then forcibly fixed and stopped.

When the small winning variation of the special figure 1 is stopped while the big winning variation of the special figure 2 is being executed, the big winning variation of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the small winning game of the special figure 1 is executed, and the special figure 1 is executed. When the small hit game ends, the interrupted special figure 2 big hit variation is resumed (that is, the time from the start of the special figure 2 big hit variation to the end of the special figure 1 for the time of the special figure 1 small hit game is extended).

While the special figure 2 big hit variation is being executed, the special figure 1 big hit variation does not start. However, if the special figure 1 jackpot variation and the special figure 2 jackpot variation start at the same time, one (for example, special figure 2) jackpot variation starts, and the other (for example, special figure 1) jackpot variation is missed. It starts after being rewritten as a variation.

Signals (external information 1 to 8) output from the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter to hall machines connected to the pachinko machine 1 will be described below. In the following description, the signals are described as being on and off, but the states may be identifiable by outputting signals with different values such as "1" and "0". First, external information 1 to 3 and external information 7 to 8 will be explained.

The external information 1 is a signal indicating that the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 have stopped. The external information 1 is turned on for 0.128 seconds from the stop of the special figure 1 or the variation of the special figure, and is off at other timings. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, since simultaneous fluctuations are performed, if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 stop within an interval of 0.128 seconds, the hall equipment will make two fluctuations. To be detectable, extrinsic information 1 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state corresponding to the previously stopped variation, and then the extrinsic information 1 is changed to correspond to the later terminated variation at an interval of 0.128 seconds. to the ON state.

The external information 2 is a signal indicating that the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2004 . The external information 2 is turned on for 0.128 seconds when the game ball B enters the first start hole 2004, and is turned off at other timings. However, if the game ball B enters the first start hole 2004 at an interval of 0.128 seconds or less, it is possible to detect the two balls entered by the hall device. After an interval of 0.128 seconds after the external information 2 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the external information 2 is changed to the ON state corresponding to the subsequent ball entry.

The external information 3 is a signal indicating that a jackpot game has been executed. The external information 3 is turned on when the big win game starts, and turned off when the big win game ends. It should be noted that the external information 3 may not be in the ON state during the whole period of the jackpot game, and may be in the ON state only during a part of the period.

The external information 7 is a signal indicating the number of prize balls. The payout control MPU adds the prize balls in all the recognized winning holes, and every time the number of prize balls becomes 10 or more, it transmits a command to the external terminal plate 558 and subtracts 10 from the added number of prize balls. The external information 7 is turned on for 0.128 seconds each time the external terminal board 558 receives the command, and is turned off at other timings. However, if the command is received by the external terminal board 558 at intervals of 0.128 seconds or less, the external terminal plate 558 can detect the prize ball corresponding to the two commands so that the hall device can detect the prize ball corresponding to the command. After changing the information 7 from the ON state to the OFF state, the external information 7 is changed to the ON state in response to the subsequent command after an interval of 0.128 seconds.

External information 8 is a signal indicating a security abnormality. The external information 8 is the big winning hole winning abnormality (game ball B enters the big winning hole at a time other than when the big winning hole opens (during a winning game)), RAM clearing, setting change completion, setting confirmation completion, Power recovery or variable winning gate door winning error (game ball B enters the variable winning gate door 2521 at a timing other than when the variable winning gate door 2521 opens (after winning a normal lottery)) is turned on for 30 seconds after the occurrence of However, when the external information 8 is in the ON state due to the above cause, if the above cause additionally occurs, the external information 8 is in the ON state for another 30 seconds from the timing when the additional cause occurs. to maintain

In addition, the external information 8 maintains the ON state until the error is canceled in the state where any error occurs such as safe switch abnormality, RWM error, magnetic abnormality, setting confirmation, or setting change. do. The external signal 8 is in an off state at timings other than those described above.

236 is a timing chart showing the state transition of external information 4. FIG. The external information 4 is a signal indicating that the player is staying in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and that the jackpot game won during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state is being executed.

By reaching the ceiling of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) at timing 2361, the time-saving function is stopped while the probability variable function is in the ON state, and the external information 4 is turned on because of the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. change to state. Timing 2362 is the timing when the normal jackpot is won in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the normal jackpot ends, and also the timing when the game shifts to the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Therefore, at timing 2362, external information 4 changes to the off state.

In addition, the low-probability time-saving gaming state has a high transition rate to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state as compared to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state and high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling) as described above (pullback zone) Therefore, at the timing 2362 when the transition to the low-probability time-saving gaming state continues the ON state of the external information 4, and when the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the external information 4 is turned off. You may make it change to a state. In this case, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state, if you win a probability variable jackpot (that is, a jackpot that shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state), the external information 4 may be turned off during the jackpot game, or turned on. may continue.

Timing 2363 is the timing when the probability variation jackpot is won in the low probability time saving gaming state and the probability variation jackpot ends, and is also the timing when the game moves again to the high probability non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, at timing 2363, external information 4 changes to the ON state.

A period 2364 is a period during which the probability variable jackpot is won during the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state and the probability variable jackpot game is in progress. In the period 2364, the external information 4 is turned off, and after the end of the probability variable jackpot, the external information 4 is turned on again.

According to the external information 4, the hall device indicates that the player is staying in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the ball is most likely to be obtained, and the number of transitions (by winning the probability variable jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state) , including the number of times the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state continues) can be recognized.

In addition, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state and the high probability non-time-saving gaming state that continues by winning the probability variable jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state are recognized by the hall equipment as one high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the period 2364, the ON state of the external information 4 may be continued in order to allow the external information 4 to be turned on. This also applies to external information 6, which will be described later.

When the on/off state of the external information 4 changes due to the transition of the game state after the jackpot game, the on/off state of the external information 4 changes at the end of the jackpot game. The change timing is any timing during the jackpot game (however, in order to be able to count the balls during the jackpot game as the balls during the high-probability non-time-saving game state or the low-probability non-time-saving game, after the start of the jackpot game ending (preferably timing). This also applies to other external information.

237 is a timing chart showing the state transition of external information 5. FIG. The external information 5 is a signal indicating that the game has transitioned to a high probability non-work-time-saving gaming state and that it has transitioned to a low-probability time-saving gaming state.

At timing 2371, the variable probability function changes to the off state and the operation of the time saving function continues, that is, the state shifts to the low probability time saving game state, so the external information 5 is turned on for 0.128 seconds and then returns to the off state. At the timing 2372, the probability variable function changes to the ON state and the operation of the time saving function stops, that is, the state shifts to the high probability non-time saving gaming state, so the external information 5 is in the ON state for 0.128 seconds, and then returns to the OFF state. .

As in the period 2373, if the transition to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state and the transition to the low probability time-saving gaming state are performed at intervals within 0.128 seconds, the hall device can detect two transitions , after an interval of 0.128 seconds after the external information 5 is changed from the on state to the off state corresponding to the previous transition, the external information 5 is changed to the on state corresponding to the subsequent transition. change.

According to the external information 5, the hall device determines the number of transitions to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the player is most likely to get the ball, and the low-probability time-saving gaming state with a high probability of transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. The number of transitions can be recognized.

238 is a timing chart showing the state transition of the external information 6. FIG. The external information 6 stays in either a high-probability non-time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state, a normal jackpot game won during a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a jackpot game won in a low-probability time-saving game state. It is a signal that indicates that

At timing 2381, by reaching the ceiling of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), the time-saving function stops while the probability variable function remains on, and the state shifts to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Change to ON state.

A period 2382 is a period during which a high-probability non-time-saving game state is won during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (that is, the high-probability non-time-saving game state continues after the end of the high-probability non-time-saving game state), and the external information 6 is turned off. After the period 2382 period 2382 period 2382 of the probability variable jackpot game is completed, the external information 6 changes to the ON state again in order to shift to the high-probability non-time-saving game state again.

A period 2383 is a period during which a normal jackpot won during a high-probability non-time-saving game state (that is, transitions to a low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the normal jackpot game) during a game, and the external information 6 continues the ON state. . The external information 6 continues to be ON even during the low-probability time-saving gaming state.

Timing 2384 is a state in which the final variation of the low-probability time-saving gaming state has ended, and the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, so the external information 6 changes to the OFF state. In addition, when the final variation of the low-probability time-saving game state is a small hit variation, the external information 6 changes to the off state after the end of the small hit game.

According to the external information 6, the hall device stays in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state where the player is most likely to get the ball, and a low probability time-saving gaming state with a high transition rate to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state. You can recognize that you are staying in In addition, the hall device is a series of game state transitions from the transition to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state (however, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the probability variable jackpot When winning and moving to the high probability time-saving gaming state again, this transition is also counted as one time) can be recognized.

In addition, since simultaneous fluctuations are performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, the low-probability time-saving gaming state ends with the ending trigger due to the number of fluctuations (as described above, the high-probability short-time gaming state can end with the ending trigger based on the number of fluctuations. ), the time-saving gaming state ends at the start of the number of fluctuations (also called time-saving final fluctuations) that satisfy the end opportunity, but the external information 6 changes from the on state to the off state when the time-saving final fluctuations stop. It is desirable to Temporarily, if the external information 6 is turned off at the start of the time saving final variation of the low probability time saving game state, the hall device moves to the time saving game state before the effect of the effect display device 1600 As detected. This is because they are visible to the players.

However, if the time saving final variation of the low probability time saving gaming state is the variation of the special figure 2, since it is a variation pattern of "capture countermeasure length variation", the variation time is very long, so the external information 6 It takes a long time to turn off, and the external information 6 is output even if the first special figure 1 fluctuation is started after shifting to the low probability non-time saving game state. However, in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, it is a game method that is advantageous for the player to execute the variation of the special figure 1 by hitting to the left, so if you hit to the left, such a situation will not occur. Absent. Also, according to FIG. 235, even if the variation of the special figure 2 is a small hit variation or a big hit variation (loss variation is not executed in a low probability time saving game state) is executed as a time saving final variation, in a low probability non time saving game state When the variation of the special figure 1 that has started (loss variation or small hit variation) is determined, the variation of the special figure 2 is determined as a variation variation, so the external information 6 is long after the low probability time saving gaming state ends The probability of occurrence of a situation in which the time-on state is maintained is low.

[20-2. Production of pachinko machine 1 in this chapter]
Figure 239, Figure 240, and Figure 241 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect from the low probability non-time-saving gaming state to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state via the high probability non-time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, in game states other than the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation of the special figure 1 is described, and in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variation of the special figure 2 is described.

Also, unless otherwise noted, the hold on the pedestal displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the game state other than the high probability non-time-saving gaming state indicates the hold of the variation of the special figure 1, and in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state The suspension on the pedestal displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicates the suspension of the variation of the special figure 2. In addition, among the pedestals displayed on the effect display device 1600, a pending display corresponding to the variation being executed is displayed on the rightmost pedestal, and the next execution is displayed on the second pedestal from the right. On the third pedestal from the right is displayed the hold corresponding to the change to be executed second, and on the fourth pedestal from the right is displayed the hold corresponding to the change to be executed third. It is assumed that the suspension corresponding to the variation to be executed is displayed on the fifth pedestal from the right, and the suspension corresponding to the variation to be executed four times next is displayed.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling), the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state occurs when the predetermined number of fluctuations are completed or the predetermined number of minor hit fluctuations are completed, but this predetermined number of fluctuations is also called a variable ceiling, and this predetermined number of small hit fluctuations is also called a small hit ceiling.

FIG. 239(A) is a state in which the probability variable jackpot of the special figure 1 is selected and the ready-to-win production is executed in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, and the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state. FIG. 239B shows a state in which the ready-to-win effect is being performed, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 303 . FIG. 239(C) shows a state in which the pressing operation part 303 is operated in FIG. 239(B), and it is suggested that the jackpot has been won by a combination of decorative symbols "7 chance 7". In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter is a machine that increases the number of balls with only small hits, the same combination of decorative symbols (for example, 7, 7, 7) that are displayed when a general pachinko machine hits a big hit ) is never displayed.

FIG. 239(D) is the state during the probability variable jackpot game state won in FIG. 239(C). Since the first big winning hole 2006 is opened in the special figure 1 jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 suggests that the game should be aimed at the first big winning hole 2006 . In addition, an aura is displayed during the jackpot game, and when the game ball B enters the first jackpot 2006, a promotion lottery of the color of the aura can be received, and the jackpot being executed is determined by the final aura color after the promotion. may indicate the degree of expectation as to whether it is a variable probability big win or a normal big win, or the degree of expectation of the number of times of small winning peaks in a high-probability time-saving game state that is entered by the variable probability big win (ceiling set).

Specifically, for example, if the final aura color is promoted to the rainbow color, the definite variable jackpot (direct rush) is confirmed, and if it is promoted to red, the definite variable jackpot (direct rush) or the hit ceiling number of 10 times or less. ) is confirmed, and if it is promoted to green, a variable hit (direct rush) or a variable hit (ceiling set) is confirmed. ) is determined, the final aura color at the end of the jackpot game is preferably determined.

FIG. 239(E) shows that the jackpot game is ending, the aura is displayed in the final aura color, and the effect display device 1600 displays a display prompting the operation of the pressing operation section 303 . FIG. 239(F) shows a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 239(E), indicating that the chance mode is entered. Chance mode is a state of staying in either a high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) or a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling). In other words, it is indicated that the probability variable jackpot (ceiling set) or the probability variable jackpot (no ceiling) was won. In this way, the player cannot recognize whether to shift to the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) or the high-probability time-saving game state (no ceiling), so that the player feels nervous in the production in the high probability state. I can hold you.

It should be noted that, when the normal jackpot (no time saving) has been elected, in FIG. If it is displayed and you have won the normal jackpot (with time saving), in FIG. In the probability time-saving gaming state, if you win a probability variable jackpot, you will move to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state), etc.), and if you have won a probability variable jackpot (direct rush), in FIG. A message (for example, "small hit rush start!" etc.) is displayed indicating that the game state is shifted to the probability non-time-saving gaming state.

Also, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, if the normal jackpot (with time-saving) or probability variable jackpot (direct rush) is elected, the state is more advantageous than the high-probability time-saving gaming state, so FIG. A dedicated SP ready-to-win effect different from the effects shown in (A) to (C) may be performed.

Hereinafter, it is assumed that the pattern determined in FIG. According to Figures 223 and 228, the high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) starting from Figure 239 (G) hit ceiling is 15 times, and from entering the high probability time-saving game state to the seventh time The variation pattern of the variation of the special figure 1 is "normal time", the variation pattern of the 8th special figure 1 is "training transition", and the variation pattern of the special figure 1 from the 9th to the 14th time is "during training ”, and the variation pattern of the special figure 1 of the 15th time (that is, the small hit ceiling) is “the reach ceiling during training”. In the variation of the "reach ceiling during training", details of which will be described later, a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character is performed.

In addition, below, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), all the variations of the special figure 1 are small hit variations (as described above, in the high probability state, the variations of the special figure 1 and the variations of the special figure 2 are always big hit variations or It is a small hit variation), and an example of reaching the ceiling will be described.

Figure 239 (G) is a state in which the first variation (variation pattern is "normal time") of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is being executed. In FIG. 239(G), a counter is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In the example of Figures 239 and 240, the counter indicates the number of small hit fluctuations of the remaining special figure 1 until the small hit fluctuation before the small hit ceiling ends, but until the small hit ceiling is reached It may indicate the number of small hit fluctuations of the remaining special figure 1.

In addition, in FIG. 239 (G), the counter is displayed from the first variation of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), but the counter is displayed from the predetermined number of fluctuations after shifting to the high probability time-saving gaming state may be made. The predetermined number of times, for example, in a high-probability time-saving gaming state (with a ceiling), may vary depending on the number of small hit ceilings (for example, the larger the number of small hit ceilings, the greater the predetermined number of times, etc.). When the counter is displayed from the predetermined number of fluctuations after transitioning to the high-probability time-saving gaming state, an effect indicating that the counter is displayed in the fluctuation before the predetermined number of times may be performed (for example, display a message such as "The next counter is activated!").

Moreover, a counter may be displayed also in a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling). However, in order to increase the rate of entering the high probability non-time-saving game state when the counter is displayed compared to when the counter is not displayed, the ratio of the counter being displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) is desirably higher than the rate at which the counter is displayed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling). Also, in order to give the player a sense of anticipation when the counter is displayed, the stage may be shifted to a dedicated performance stage when the counter is displayed.

Figure 239 (H) is a state in which the eighth variation (variation pattern is "training shift") of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is being executed. In FIG. 239(H), the effect display device 1600 displays a message indicating that the training effect will start with the next change. FIG. 239 (I) is a state in which the 9th variation (variation pattern is “under training”) of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is being executed. In FIG. 239(I), the effect display device 1600 displays a message indicating that the training effect has started.

FIG. 240(J) shows a state in which the 10th variation (variation pattern is “under training”) of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is being executed. In the training production, the production display device 1600 displays a production in which the main character (white character) is training.

Figure 240 (K) is a state in which the eleventh variation of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) (variation pattern is "under training") is being executed, and two holds of special figure 1 are accumulated . An effect has occurred on the pedestal corresponding to the fourth suspension of Toku-zu 1 (that is, the suspension indicating the 15th variation). In the example of FIG. 240, the 15th variation of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is a variation in which battle production is performed (in the high probability of time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), the 15th small hit variation is a small hit ceiling) Therefore, the effect of the pedestal can suggest the possibility that the small hit variation, which is the 4th order variation, is the small hit ceiling. In addition, instead of displaying the effect on the pedestal, or in addition to the display of the effect on the pedestal, the pedestal displays a translucent display of the battle suspension displayed in FIG. may be displayed above.

Figure 240 (L) is a state in which the 12th variation of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) (variation pattern is "under training") is being executed, and one reservation of special figure 1 is accumulated . In the state in which the variation of Figure 240 (L) is being executed, the effect is generated on the pedestal of the third pending because the small hit variation which is the third variation of the special figure 1 is the small hit ceiling there is

Figure 240 (M) is a continuation state in which the 12th variation of the high probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) is being executed, and three reserves of special figure 1 are accumulated. When the hold corresponding to the pedestal on which the effect is displayed wins, the effect is erased and the battle hold (cylinder labeled "Battle") is displayed on the pedestal.

Figure 240 (N) is a state in which the 15th variation of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) (variation pattern is "training reach ceiling") is being executed, and battle suspension corresponds to the variation during execution displayed on the pedestal. In the variation of the “reach ceiling during training”, a battle effect, which is an example of the reach effect, is executed. In FIG. 240(N), it is notified that the battle effect will start.

FIG. 240(O) shows the continuation of the fifteenth variation of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), and the battle effect between the main character and the enemy character (black character) has started. FIG. 240(P) shows the state at the end of the fifteenth variation in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling), in which the main character wins in the battle production. In addition, it is suggested that the combination of decorative patterns "7, Fate, 7" reached the small hit ceiling.

Since the small hit ceiling has been reached, although it shifts to the high probability non-time-saving game state, if the first fluctuation of the high probability non-time-saving game state is a normal big hit change, it will be output by the small hit game in the small hit rush state. To shift to a low-probability time-saving game state without increasing balls. Hypothetically, when the small hit fluctuation of the small hit ceiling ends, such a situation occurs after performing an effect that directly indicates that the state will shift to the small hit rush state (high probability non-time-saving game state). In order to deeply discourage the player if the game is over, the combination of decorative symbols "7, fate, 7" suggests that the small winning ceiling has been reached, but the state is shifted to a small winning rush state. is not shown directly.

FIG. 240(Q) is a state in which the ending effect of the small hit game shifted from the small hit variation ended in FIG. 240(P) is being performed. As described in the description of Figures 229 and 231, the performance time of the small hit game corresponding to the small hit variation that reaches the small hit ceiling is selected in a high probability non-time-saving game state, so the small hit 17 seconds (pattern "K"), which is a sufficient length for effecting, is selected as the game ending time (final winning effect time y).

FIG. 240(Q) shows a state in which the ending of the small winning game has started, and a display indicating that there is a possibility of shifting to a small winning rush state is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Since the small hit ceiling has been reached, it will definitely shift to the small hit rush state (high probability non-time-saving game state), but as described above, the first time of the small hit rush state (high-probability non-time-saving game state) When the variation is a normal big hit variation, such an effect is performed in order to shift to a low probability time-saving game state without increasing the number of output balls by the small winning game of the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Figure 240 (R) is a continuation state of the ending of the small hit game, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into two, one display area is a high probability non-time-saving game state and the small hit of the special figure 2 A display (“Rush!”) indicating that the number of balls can be increased is displayed in the other display area, and the number of balls cannot be increased by the small hit of special figure 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state. Display indicating that the transition to a low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, the first variation of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot variation) ("chance mode" (low-probability time-saving gaming state is a so-called pullback mode, but a high probability In the non-time-saving game state, the game is called the chance mode, not the pullback mode, because the ball is not obtained by the small winning game of the special figure 2)) is displayed.

In FIG. 241(S), the effect display device 1600 displays an instruction prompting the game ball B to enter the second starting hole 2005 by hitting to the right. In FIG. 241(T), in addition to the display in FIG. 240(R), the message displayed in FIG. is displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

The CPU of the peripheral control IC, in the ending of the small hit game, refers to the pre-determination command for holding the variation of the first special figure 2 after the end of the small hit game, and the first special figure 2 It is determined whether or not the variation is a normal jackpot (that is, shifts to a low-probability time-saving game state). For example, in FIG. 241 (S), the aura may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at this time, the aura color may indicate the degree of expectation that the first variation of the special figure 2 is not a normal big hit. .

It is assumed that the first variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the small hit game is a small hit variation. In this case, it is possible to acquire the ball out by the small hit game of the special figure 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

FIG. 241(R) is a state in which the ending of the small hit game ends and the high probability non-time-saving game state has started, and a display indicating that the small hit rush state has entered is displayed on the effect display device 1600. ing. The effect display device 1600 displays an image simulating the simulated big winning opening 2402 and a message indicating that the simulated big winning opening 2402 can be opened. The pseudo big winning opening 2402 may be openable in all states, or can be opened only in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state in which the game ball B can be easily acquired in the small hit game of the special figure 2. It may be possible to open only during the small winning game in all states, or only during the small winning game of special figure 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state in which the game ball B can be easily acquired may be open to Also, a display (right-handed display) indicating that the game is to be played with right-handed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . It is assumed that the right-handed display is always displayed during the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

When the first variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the small winning game is the normal big winning variation, it is not possible to obtain the ball by the special figure 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, even if the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state starts, a display such as that shown in FIG. be done. However, even if the first variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the small hit game is a normal big hit variation, in order to make the player feel a sense of accomplishment that has reached the ceiling of the high probability time-saving game state (with ceiling) , the effect of FIG. 241(R) may be executed.

In addition, for example, FIG. 240 (S) The second, third, or fourth variation of the special figure 2 after the end of the small hit game is a normal jackpot, and all the variations before the normal jackpot variation Even if it is a big hit variation, it is not possible to acquire the ball due to the small hit of the special figure 2 in the high probability non-time-saving game state. In this case, the high probability non-time-saving game state of special figure 2 cannot be obtained by the small hit of special figure 2, so the high probability non-time-saving game state is started in order not to give the player excessive expectations. 241 (R) is not performed, and a display indicating a shift to the chance mode (low probability non-time-saving game state) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display of FIG. 241(R) may be performed because it is possible to acquire the ball by .

Also, when the small hit game of FIG. 241 (T) ends without the suspension of the variation of the special figure 2, for example, the display of FIG. If the variation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the winning is other than the normal big hit variation, the display of FIG. 241 (R) is performed, and the variation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the winning is normal big hit For example, it is preferable that a display indicating a transition to a chance mode (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) is performed.

In addition, when the small hit game of FIG. 241 (T) ends in a state where there is no suspension of the variation of the special figure 2, for example, the production during the high probability non-time-saving game state described later may be performed. , Display indicating that the display of FIG. An effect during the time saving game state may be performed.

Hereinafter, control for displaying the effect of the pedestal will be described with reference to FIGS. 240(K) and (L). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the number of fluctuations and the number of small hit fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, for example, by referring to the time saving number table when transitioning to the high probability time saving game state (with ceiling), Each time the variation or the small hit variation ends, the set number of variations or the number of small hit variations is subtracted by one.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the small hit ceiling is reached by the small hit variation that is the variation of the special figure 1 after 4 times, the small hit variation that is the variation of the special figure 1 after 4 times Information indicating reaching the small hit ceiling is included in the advance determination command in step S245. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC can refer to the advance determination command and display the effect of the pedestal in FIG. 240(K). The same control is performed for the display of the effect of the pedestal in FIG. 240(L).

In addition, even if the number of remaining fluctuations of the special figure 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 before reaching the small hit ceiling (including fluctuations during execution) If the jackpot variation is included, it is not possible to reach the small hit ceiling (the jackpot variation is a probability variable jackpot (with time reduction), and after the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability time-saving game state (no ceiling) , Except for cases where the variation of the special figure 1 corresponding to the small hit ceiling in the previous high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) happens to be the “training reach ceiling”). In such a case, if the effect of the pedestal is displayed, the player may misunderstand that the battle production will be performed with the variation corresponding to the effect of the pedestal after the big win game. Therefore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC refers to the advance determination command, even if the number of remaining fluctuations of the special figure 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, before reaching the small hit ceiling If it is determined that the variation of the special figure 1 (including variation during execution) includes a big hit variation, the pedestal effect may not be displayed.

Also, after the effect of the pedestal is displayed, if the variation of the special figure 1 that won before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a big hit variation, in the variation of the special figure 1 corresponding to the effect of the pedestal Battle production is not performed (the jackpot change is a probability variable jackpot (with a short time), and after the jackpot game, it shifts to a high-probability short-time game state (no ceiling), and the special figure 1 corresponding to the effect of the pedestal Except for cases such as "training reach ceiling").

In such a case, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot variation of special figure 1 is completed, the pedestal effect should be erased (when changing to battle hold, the battle hold is erased). In addition, after the effect of the pedestal is displayed, if the variation of the special figure 1 that won before the reservation corresponding to the pedestal is a big hit variation, if the effect of the pedestal remains displayed, the big hit A player may misunderstand that a battle production is performed with a change corresponding to the effect of the pedestal after the game. Therefore, although the CPU of the peripheral control IC displays the effect of the pedestal, it refers to the pre-determination command and determines that the variation of the special figure 1 that has won before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a big hit variation. , you can delete the effect of the displayed pedestal.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC displays the effect of the pedestal, but refers to the pre-determination command and determines that the variation of the special figure 1 that was won before the hold corresponding to the pedestal is a big hit variation For example, the effect of the displayed pedestal is erased, or the effect of the pedestal is displayed on the pedestal of the variation (sudden display, moving display, etc.), and the big hit is performed. The suspension corresponding to the fluctuation may be changed to the battle suspension. At this time, the value of the counter may also be decremented so that the battle effect is performed with the variation of the big win. Then, if the variation of the big hit is a variation of the variable probability big hit (direct rush), it is sufficient to perform an effect in which the main character wins in the battle performance, and if the variation of the big hit is other than the variation of the variable probability big win (direct rush), In the battle production, the main character may be defeated.

Further, for example, when the effect is displayed on the pedestal corresponding to the small hit ceiling, and when the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is the big hit fluctuation, similar to FIG. 240 (M), display the battle pending You may In this case, for example, if the variation of the big hit is the variation of the variable probability big hit (direct rush), the main character may win in the battle performance, and the variation of the big hit may be other than the variation of the variable probability big hit (direct rush). If so, it is sufficient to produce a battle production in which the main character is defeated.

In addition, after changing the pedestal effect in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations of the special figure 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, there is a prize corresponding to the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation, and the small hit ceiling If this special figure 2 jackpot variation ends before the end of the variation corresponding to, for example, in this special figure 2 jackpot variation, a special effect (an effect indicating that the special figure 2 jackpot has been won) is performed. , After the end of the jackpot game corresponding to this special figure 2 jackpot variation, the game state (if the special figure 2 jackpot is a normal jackpot, a low probability non-time-saving game state, and if the special figure 2 jackpot is a definite variable jackpot, a high probability It shifts to the stage corresponding to the time-saving game state (no ceiling), erases the pedestal effect, and displays the suspension of the special figure 1 in a normal manner.

In addition, after changing the pedestal effect in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations of the special figure 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, there is a prize corresponding to the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation, and the small hit ceiling When the big hit variation of this special figure 2 ends before the end of the variation corresponding to the special figure 2, the performance of losing the battle performance is performed by the variation of this special figure 2, and the big hit corresponding to the big hit variation of this special figure 2 is performed. After the game is over, the stage corresponding to the game state (low probability non-time-saving game state if the special figure 2 jackpot is a normal jackpot, high probability short-time game state (no ceiling) if the special figure 2 jackpot is a variable jackpot) , the pedestal effect may be erased and the suspension of special figure 1 may be displayed in a normal manner.

In addition, although the variation of special figure 1 and the variation of special figure 2 are executed at the same time, the remaining 4 times until the special figure 1's small hit ceiling It may be set longer than the total fluctuation time of the time, and in this way, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 until the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is within 4 times, the special figure 2 Even if there is a prize corresponding to the big hit change, the change corresponding to the small hit ceiling of special figure 1 ends before the big hit change of special figure 2 ends, so even if the pedestal effect is displayed, special production you don't have to.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 240, the display of the effect of the pedestal was started during the variation being executed in a state where the variation four ahead was the small winning ceiling, but the number of remaining variations up to the small winning ceiling was The display of the pedestal effect may begin during the variation being performed no more than three times. However, in this case, if the suspension of the variation corresponding to the small hit ceiling has been won by the timing of the display start of the effect of the pedestal, for example, at that timing, the suspension display of the variation corresponding to the small hit ceiling is battle suspended A pending change effect to change to may be executed.

In addition, even in the fluctuation of the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), the effect may be displayed on the pedestal corresponding to the fluctuation of the "reach ceiling during training" (in this case, the fluctuation of the "reach ceiling during training" may change If it is not a big hit (direct rush), the main character will be defeated in the battle production described later). In addition, in both the high-probability time-saving gaming state (with ceiling) and the high-probability time-saving gaming state (no ceiling), the variation pattern (battle production is executed The effect may be displayed on the pedestal corresponding to the change in the fluctuation pattern that cannot be obtained (in this case, if the hold corresponding to the pedestal wins, the normal hold will be displayed instead of the battle hold ). With these effects, even if the effect is displayed on the pedestal, the player does not know whether the transition to the high-probability non-time-saving game state will occur after the change corresponding to the pedestal ends, so the tension can be maintained. .

In addition, according to the hit determination table of FIG. 220 (a), in the high probability game state, the loss variation is not executed, and other than the big hit variation is the small hit variation, so the counter shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 (small hit Shows the remaining number of times until the variation of the battle production that can be performed on the ceiling) is subtracted by 1 each time the variation of the special figure 1 is performed unless the variation is a big hit variation.

Here, for example, even in a high-probability gaming state, it may be possible to win the winning variation. In this case, even if the variation of the special figure 1 is executed, if the variation is a deviation variation, the value of the counter is not subtracted. Also, when the effect of the pedestal is displayed, even if the variation of special figure 1 is executed, the effect of the pedestal is displayed on the same pedestal without moving to one pedestal to the right.

If you win the loss variation even in the high probability gaming state, there is a possibility of reaching the fluctuation ceiling and moving to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, so in addition to or instead of the counter shown in FIGS. 239 and 240 A counter may be displayed indicating the number of remaining deviation fluctuations expected to reach the fluctuation ceiling. Also, in the case of winning the losing variation even in the high-probability gaming state, in addition to or instead of the effect of the pedestal shown in FIG. may be

In addition, there may be an effect stage, a background image, or the like that makes it possible to expect that the number of remaining small hit fluctuations until the small hit ceiling is small. For example, it is assumed that the background image is in the order of daytime<evening<night, and the degree of expectation is high that the number of remaining small-hit fluctuations until the small-hit ceiling is small. For example, it is assumed that the background image in the daytime is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and then changes to the background image in the evening when the small hit variation is completed. Even in a high-probability game state, when a winning variation is won in this state, the number of remaining small winning variations up to the ceiling of the small winning does not decrease, so that the evening background image is maintained.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the effect of the pedestal is displayed, or when the volume adjustment display or the light intensity adjustment display is displayed, the game can be terminated without winning a prize corresponding to the pedestal effect. If the effect of the pedestal becomes invisible (or hidden in the first place), such as when you stop and move to the demo screen, the effect of the pedestal will be displayed when you return from such a state. It is desirable that the effect of the pedestal is displayed because the player feels uneasy if the is erased.

Specifically, for example, the effect information of the pedestal may be stored as the game backup information, and the effect of the pedestal may be displayed at the same time when the game returns from this state. Also, even if the effect information of the pedestal is not stored in the game backup information, when returning from the state, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 generates the above-described pre-determination command and transmits it to the peripheral control IC again. , the effect of the pedestal may be displayed again.

In addition, some players do not want other players to know that the effect of the pedestal is displayed and the expectation of transition to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state is high, so the effect of the pedestal as described above If it becomes invisible (or hidden in the first place), the effect of the pedestal may not be redisplayed when returning from such a state.

FIG. 242 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in the high-probability non-time-saving game state. The high-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state is a small-hit rush state, and is a state in which the player can easily acquire a ball by the small-hit game of the special figure 2.例文帳に追加In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is a game method that is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right. ) is always displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600 .

Figure 242 (A) is a state in which the small hit variation of the special figure 2 has ended in the high probability non-time saving gaming state. At the end of the small hit variation of the special figure 2 (that is, immediately before the start of the small hit game), the effect is displayed. In addition, during the small winning game in the high probability non-time-saving game state and the high probability non-time-saving game state, while the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the pseudo big winning hole provided inside the second big winning hole 2007 2402 is opened (that is, when the pressing operation part 303 is pressed, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 opens, but when the pressing is stopped, it closes again). When the game ball B enters the pseudo big winning hole 2402, no new prize ball is obtained, but the presentation mode changes.

In FIG. 242A, an image of the main character saying "Erase me!" (also referred to as a first instruction display) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In addition, the number displayed at the lower left of the effect display device 1600 is one high probability non-time-saving gaming state (when the high probability non-time-saving gaming state continues by winning the probability variable jackpot in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state Treats as one high probability non-time-saving gaming state has not ended.Also, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, the normal jackpot was elected and moved to the low probability time-saving gaming state, but the low probability time-saving gaming state Even if you win a probability variable jackpot and return to the high-probability non-time-saving game state, it may be treated as if the high-probability game state has not ended once). This is an acquired ball display indicating the total number of prize balls obtained by the game ball B entering the winning hole 2402 entering the second big winning hole 2007 before that. In addition, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (even in the small winning game won in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state), "Rush!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . However, although the details will be described later, it is desirable that the display "Rush!"

FIG. 242(B) shows the state during the small winning game won in FIG. 242(A). In FIG. 242B, the player does not follow the instruction of the first instruction display and presses down the pressing operation section 303 (that is, the sensor provided in the pressing operation section 303 does not detect the operation), that is, the pseudo This is a state in which the big winning opening 2402 is not open. Since the player does not follow the instruction of the first instruction display, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed. Therefore, although the game ball B is entered into the second big winning hole 2007 during the small winning game, the game ball B does not enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402 . In this case, although a prize ball can be obtained by winning the second prize-winning hole 2007, the value of the acquired ball display is not increased.

Figure 242 (C) is a state in which a small hit variation is performed in a high probability non-time saving gaming state. In FIG. 242(C), the player presses down the pressing operation part 303 according to the instruction of the first instruction display (that is, the sensor provided in the pressing operation part 303 detects the operation). It is open. The first instruction display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed.

It should be noted that as soon as the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed (that is, as soon as the sensor provided in the pressing operation portion 303 detects the operation), the first instruction display is erased and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is opened. Alternatively, after a predetermined time has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was pressed (that is, after a predetermined time has passed since the sensor provided in the pressing operation unit 303 has detected the operation (this predetermined time has a plurality of values). Alternatively, in this case, one value may be selected from a plurality of values by predetermined allocation)), the first instruction display may be erased, and the simulated grand prize winning opening 2402 may be opened.

Similarly, after a predetermined time has passed since the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 was stopped (that is, after a predetermined time has passed since the sensor provided in the pressing operation unit 303 stopped detecting the operation (this predetermined time has a plurality of values). In this case, one value is selected from a plurality of values by predetermined sorting)), the first instruction display may be displayed.

FIG. 242(D) shows a state in which a small winning game is being executed while the pressing operation section 303 is being pressed. Since the player follows the instruction of the first instruction display, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open. Therefore, when the game ball B is made to enter the second big winning hole 2007 during the small winning game, most of them (for example 95%) enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402 as well. Each time the game ball B enters the pseudo big winning hole 2402 (that is, when the sensor provided in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 detects the game ball B), the display "+15" (that is, entering the virtual big winning hole 2402) A prize ball obtained by hitting a second big prize hole 2007 before that by hitting the game ball B is displayed for a predetermined time, and the value of the winning display is also increased by 15. - 特許庁

In this way, by operating the pressing operation portion 303 to open the simulated big winning opening 2402, the winning ball is displayed for the first time. It is possible to provide a game with high operability that is always operated with .

In addition, although the details will be described later, the exact number of acquired balls (that is, the value including the number of balls acquired by the game ball B that entered the second big winning hole 2007 but did not enter the pseudo big winning hole 2402). is displayed, for example, on the result screen at the end of the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, but for example, if the player does not dare to operate the pressing operation unit 303, the correct winning balls are displayed until the result screen is displayed. It is possible to hide the number and increase the tension. In this way, once there is a discrepancy between the correct number of balls won and the displayed number of balls won, this discrepancy cannot be corrected by the player's intention (operation), and the display of the result screen is waited for. There must be. However, since the high-probability non-time-saving game state continues for a long time and the result screen is not easily displayed, this deviation is restored by the player operating a predetermined operation unit (that is, the display of acquired balls). value matches the exact number of balls won).

In addition, the position and size of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is such that if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is open, most (for example, 95% or more) or all of the game balls B entering the second big winning hole 2007 are fake. It is desirable that the ball should be entered into the big winning hole 2402 . In spite of the fact that the player wants to know the number of winning balls and has opened the pseudo big winning hole 2402, none of the game balls B entering the second big winning hole 2007 enter the fake big winning hole 2402. This is because the player may feel stressed if the ball hitting rate is low.

In addition, in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the first instruction display may not be displayed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of thinking about how to increase the value of the acquired ball display (in the first place, what the value is without knowing that it is the acquired ball display).

Contrary to the above example, the simulated big winning opening 2402 is opened when the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed, and the simulated big winning opening 2402 is closed when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed. can be In other words, the game feature is such that a player who does not want to know the number of winning balls to be played until the result screen is displayed presses the pressing operation section 303 .

FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the production of the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. FIG. 243(A) shows that the special figure 2 is changing, and the first instruction display is displayed because the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated. In the example of FIG. 243, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in accordance with the first instruction display to open the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402, the opening angle (hereinafter also referred to as the first angle) is shallow, so the second The game balls B that have won the big prize-winning hole 2007 cannot enter the pseudo-big prize-winning hole 2402 (or only a part (about 10% of the game balls B that have won the second big prize-winning hole 2007) enter. ).

In FIG. 243(B), the variation of special figure 2 in FIG. !” prompting deletion of the character image), and a display prompting the user to press the pressing operation unit 303 twice. The three indications are collectively called a double instruction indication) is displayed.

When the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed twice according to the two-instruction display in FIG. 243(B), the states described in FIGS. 243 (C1) to (C4) show a state in which a small winning game is being played after pressing the pressing operation unit 303 twice according to the two-instruction display, prompting the user to press the pressing operation unit 303. The image has been erased.

In FIG. 243(C1), the main character and the chance character are erased. In this case, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is opened at a deep angle (hereinafter also referred to as a second angle) that allows the game ball B to enter, and the game ball B has entered the pseudo big winning hole 2402 . Therefore, a display similar to that of FIG. 243 (D1) is performed.

In FIG. 243 (C2), the chance character is displayed although the main character is erased. In this case, although the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened, the opening angle (hereinafter also referred to as the third angle) is deeper than the case according to the first instruction display, but the game ball B that has won the second big prize winning port 2007 is a pseudo big prize. It is shallow to the extent that a ball cannot be entered into the opening 2402 (or only a part (about 30% of the game balls B that have won the second prize opening 2007) is entered). Therefore, the value of the obtained ball display does not increase, and the display of "+15!" is not displayed.

In FIG. 243 (C3), the main character is displayed although the chance character is erased. In this case, since the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is open at the first angle, the game ball B does not enter the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . Therefore, the value of the obtained ball display does not increase, and the display of "+15!" is not displayed.

In FIG. 243 (C4), neither the main character nor the chance character are erased and remain displayed. In this case, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is not opened and the game ball B does not enter the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . Therefore, the value of the obtained ball display does not increase, and the display of "+15!" is not displayed.

Note that only the chance character and the display prompting the user to press the contact operation unit 302 different from the pressing operation unit 303 (these two displays are collectively referred to as the second instruction display) may be displayed. In this case, when the contact operation unit 302 is operated according to the second instruction display, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 opens at the third angle.

Further, the double instruction display in FIG. 243(B) may be a state in which both the first instruction display and the second instruction display are displayed. In this case, for example, if the pressing operation unit 303 is first operated according to the first instruction display, the first instruction display is erased and the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is opened at the first angle, and the contact operation is first performed according to the second instruction display. If the part 302 is operated, the second instruction display is erased and the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is opened at the third angle. Then, when both the pressing operation portion 303 and the contact operation portion 302 are completely operated, both the first instruction display and the second instruction display are erased, and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 opens at the third angle.

In the double instruction display, the display areas of the main character and lines of the main character and the chance characters and lines of the chance characters may overlap. Since the opening angle is large, the chance character and the lines of the chance character are displayed with priority over the main character and the lines of the main character in the overlapping display areas.

In addition, although the state in which the first instruction display is displayed may shift to the state in which the double instruction display is displayed, the state in which the second instruction display is displayed may shift to the state in which the double instruction display is displayed. It is desirable not to transition to a state. This is because, if the main character having a lower display priority and a smaller display size than the chance character is displayed after the chance character is displayed, the player's expectations may be reduced. Further, the state in which the first indication is displayed may be changed to the state in which only the second indication is displayed instead of the double indication. In this case, when the touch operation unit 302 is operated according to the second instruction display, the second instruction display may be erased and the first instruction display may be displayed.

When the first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, sounds corresponding to these instruction displays (for example, lines of each instruction, "Press the button!", etc.) are played. may be output. However, if the sound corresponding to the first indication is displayed and the display shifts to either the second indication or the double indication, the output of the sound corresponding to the first indication is stopped and Preferably, the sound corresponding to is preferentially output. In addition, when the sound corresponding to the double instruction display or the second instruction display is being output, when the transition is made to the first instruction display, the output of the sound corresponding to the one is stopped, and the sound corresponding to the first instruction display is output. A sound should be output.

Further, when the first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lamp may emit light in a mode corresponding to these instruction displays. However, if the lamp shifts to either the second instruction display or the double instruction display while the lamp is emitting light in the manner corresponding to the first instruction display, the lamp sound will be emitted in the manner corresponding to the first instruction display. is stopped, and the lamp preferentially emits light in a manner corresponding to the one. In addition, when the lamp is emitted in a mode corresponding to the second indication display or the double indication indication, and the transition is made to the first indication indication, the emission of the lamp corresponding to one of the aspects is stopped, and the first indication indication is performed. The lamp should emit light in a manner corresponding to .

Also, the timing of putting out the game ball B may be matched with the timing of increasing the winning display. That is, when the first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display is displayed, the acquired ball display does not increase, so the game ball B is not paid out at that timing. In this case, the number of game balls B that have entered the second big winning hole 2007 but have not entered the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is stored. When the display or the display of the double instruction display ends), it is preferable that the number of the game balls B that have been stored is paid out.

In addition, the chance character may be a character that appears only in the high probability non-time-saving game state, and in this case, the chance character is less likely to be seen by the player. is always displayed (in this mode, even if the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 or the effect operation unit 304, the display of the chance character is not erased and the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 is not opened). remain closed) may be present. Since this mode in which the chance character is always displayed is a very special mode, the transition between the normal mode and the mode in which the chance character is always displayed depends on the operation of the operation section that the player can operate. It is impossible to execute, and for example, it is desirable that the hall clerk can execute only by operating an operation unit that can be operated with the door frame 5 opened.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the initial state may be set to a high probability non-time-saving game state so that the player can easily obtain the ball. good. Thereby, for example, the game can be executed even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f while the first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display is being displayed. The first instruction display, the second instruction display, or the double instruction display is displayed at the same time as the state is reached or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

FIG. 244 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect performed when shifting from the high-probability non-work-time-saving game state to the low-probability time-saving game state. As described above, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, if you win the normal jackpot of special figure 2, it will shift to the low probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, and if you win the probability variable jackpot of special figure 2, even after the end of the jackpot game The high-probability non-time-saving game state continues.

FIG. 244(A) is a state in which a normal jackpot variation (that is, a jackpot variation that shifts to a low-probability time-saving gaming state) is performed in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state. Hereinafter, up to FIG. 244(F) is the state in which the normal jackpot variation is performed. In FIG. 244(B), when the effect display device 1600 blacks out, it is suggested that a big win has been won. Since it is suggested that the jackpot has been won and the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state may end, the display "Rush!!" is deleted. In FIG. 244 (C), the result screen is displayed, and in the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the winning ball display (that is, only the balls counted by entering the pseudo big winning hole 2402) were counted. The number of balls released is displayed.

Figure 244 (D) is a continuation of the result screen, and the value of the acquired ball display is the number of balls actually acquired in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (that is, all The ball has changed to a ball (including a ball that did not enter the pseudo-big prize opening 2420)). As a result, the player can confirm the number of balls actually obtained. In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when all the game balls B that have won the second big winning hole 2007 are entered into the pseudo big winning hole 2420, the display of the number of balls to be played does not change.

In FIG. 244(E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into two, and in one of the display areas there is a display indicating that the small win rush continues (that is, the winning big win is a variable probability big win). , and in the other display area, there is a display indicating that the mode will shift to the pullback mode (that is, the winning jackpot is the normal jackpot). Further, a display prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed.

FIG. 244(F) shows a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 244(E), and in the example of FIG. A transition to the pullback mode is indicated by continuing to display the display area where the display area is highlighted and blacking out the other display area.

FIG. 244(G) shows a state in which a normal jackpot game has started. Since the second big winning hole 2007 is opened in the special figure 2 jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 suggests that the second big winning hole 2007 is aimed at during the game. FIG. 244(H) shows a state of transition to a low-probability time-saving gaming state. A display showing the number of time-saving games in the low-probability time-saving game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In addition, unlike the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state that stayed until just before, the left-handed display (inside A left-pointing arrow written as "Hit Left!!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time.

In the above example, the number of balls newly acquired in the small winning game during the high probability non-time-saving game state is always more than the acquired ball display displayed during the high probability non-time-saving game state. Conversely, for example, the maximum number of balls that can be obtained in one small winning game in a small winning game before the small winning game of special figure 2 starts (for example, the second large number in one small winning game The number of balls that come out when one game ball B enters the winning hole 2007) may be added to the value of the display of acquired balls. Also, for example, the number of prize balls obtained when one game ball B enters the second big winning hole 2007, or the number of balls that exceeds the maximum number of balls that can be obtained in one small winning game (for example, The number of balls to be played when two game balls B enter the second big winning hole 2007 in one small winning game) may be added to the value of the acquired ball display.

Specifically, for example, when the peripheral control IC wins the game ball B to the second starting port 2005, the main control board 1310 sends a pre-determination command indicating that the variation corresponding to the winning is a small hit variation. When received from the main control MPU 1310a, by the time the small hit variation corresponding to the winning starts (for example, at the time of the winning or at the start or end of the small hit variation corresponding to the winning), the maximum ball Add the number to the value of the win display. Therefore, the number of balls newly acquired in the small winning game in the high-probability non-working-time-saving game state is always equal to or less than the value of the display of winning balls. However, for the variation of the special figure 2 after the normal big hit variation, it is not necessary to add the value of the acquired ball display before the start of the small hit game. (Because it is not possible to acquire the ball from the winning game).

And when the result screen is displayed, the value of the acquired ball display displayed on the result screen is the number of balls actually acquired in the high probability non-time-saving game state (that is, during the small hit game of special figure 2 Since the second grand prize opening 2007 was not won, the balls that could not be won are subtracted). As a result, the player can know the difference between the maximum number of balls that can be obtained and the number of balls that are actually obtained in the small winning game in the high probability non-time-saving game state, and confirms the skill of the player himself. can do.

In addition, the value displayed in the acquired ball display on the result screen may not be adjusted to the number of actually acquired balls at once, but may be adjusted each time a small winning game starts or ends. . Specifically, for example, although the value of the acquired ball display is increased before the start of the small winning game, the game ball B does not enter the second big winning hole 2007 in the small winning game. decreases the value of the obtained ball display at the end of the small winning game, or increases the value of the obtained ball display at the time of the next small winning game.

The comment selection effect will be described below. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter is provided with a cross key consisting of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button that can be operated by the player. The comment selection effect is an effect that can appear in any game state of a low probability non-time-saving game state, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a low probability time-saving game state. It is assumed that it is an effect that can appear even during the jackpot game. Hereinafter, an example in which the comment selection effect is executed in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state will be described.

FIG. 245 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of comment selection effects. Figure 245 (A) is the state in which the special figure 1 variation is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display prompting the user to press the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect has started. When a plurality of comments are displayed in the comment box and the up button or the down button is operated, a black arrow for selecting a comment moves up and down. In FIG. 245(A), the comment "Uma" is selected. It should be noted that the display prompting the user to press the pressing operation unit 303 does not have to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

FIG. 245(B) shows the state of FIG. 245(A) with the down button pressed. Since the down button has been operated, the black arrow for selecting the comment has moved downward, and the comment "What is this?" is selected.

FIG. 245(C) shows an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 245(B). The image prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment indicated by the black arrow in FIG. Hereinafter, the comment that is displayed while moving in a flowing manner is also referred to as a flowing comment. The flow comment is erased in order from the character reaching the left end of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

If all the comments of different categories are displayed in one box, it takes time for the player to find the comment that the player wants to select from all the comments only by operating the up button or the down button. is displayed, when the left button or right button is operated, a comment whose category is different from the comment being displayed in the comment box is displayed.

By displaying the flow comment selected by the player in the comment selection performance, the player himself/herself can select what kind of performance to appear, so that the performance can be enjoyed more. Although the details will be described later, the comment selection effect may be executed while the variation is stopped.

FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the comment selection effect. Figure 246 (A) is the state in which the special figure 1 variation is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display prompting the user to press the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect has started. One comment is displayed in the comment box. It should be noted that the display prompting the user to press the pressing operation unit 303 does not have to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

In the state of FIG. 246(A), when the left button or right button is operated, a comment whose category is different from the comment being displayed in the comment box is displayed, and when the up button is operated, it is displayed in the comment box. (However, there is an upper limit to the number of comments that can be displayed in the comment box. Even if the upper button is operated while the maximum number of comments are displayed, the number of comments in the comment box will increase. The display does not change), and when the down button is operated, the number of comments displayed in the comment box decreases (however, as in the example of FIG. 246(A), when only one comment is displayed, the down The display in the comment box does not change even if the button is operated).

FIG. 246(B1) shows an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 246(A). The image prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment displayed in the comment box in FIG.

FIG. 246(B2) shows an example of a state when the pressing operation section 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 246(A). The image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment displayed in the comment box in FIG. 1600 is displayed. In this way, when the comment selection effect and the dialogue effect can be executed with the same variation, both effects are progressed by one operation of the pressing operation part 303, thereby saving the player's operation trouble. can be done.

FIG. 246(B3) shows an example of the state when the upper button is operated in the state of FIG. 246(A). One comment is added above the comment displayed in FIG. 246(A). FIG. 246(C3) shows an example of a state when the upper button is further operated in the state of FIG. 246(B3). One more comment is added above the comment displayed in FIG. 246(B3).

By adding one comment to the top row each time the up button is operated in this manner, the player can look forward to what kind of comments are available as options. However, since a comment in the comment box is added each time the up button is operated, other effects are hidden by the added comments and the visibility of the other effects is reduced. Therefore, for the player who wants to restore the visibility of other effects, when the lower button is operated, the number of comments displayed in the comment box decreases (comments displayed at the top are deleted). ).

In other words, in the example of FIG. 245, all comments are always displayed in the comment box in the comment selection effect, so there is an advantage that the player can recognize selectable comments at once. Since the player can adjust the number of comments displayed in the comment box by operating the up button and the down button, there is an advantage that the player himself can adjust the visibility of other effects.

FIG. 246(D3) shows an example of the state when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the state of FIG. 246(C3). The image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is erased, and the comment displayed at the top of the comment box in FIG. 246(B3) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a flow comment.

As described above, when the press operation unit 303 is operated while a plurality of comments are displayed in the comment box, the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a running comment. Is displayed. That is, a comment reflecting the result of operating the up button and the down button before operating the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a flow comment. It should be noted that when the display of the running comment is started, a sound corresponding to the selected running comment (for example, the sound of the wording of the running comment itself) may be output. As a result, the player can more enjoy operating the pressing operation unit 303 in the comment selection effect. Further, a sound corresponding to the flow comment displayed at the top may be output each time the number of comments in the comment box increases or decreases by operating the up button and the down button. As a result, even if the player is not looking at the comment box while concentrating on the other effects that are changing, he/she can grasp what kind of comment there is just by operating the up button and the down button. can.

Also, when a flow comment of a certain category is displayed, a sound corresponding to the flow comment is output, and when a flow comment of another category that can be selected by operating the left button or the right button is displayed. Alternatively, the display of the effect display device 1600 may be changed to a display mode corresponding to the flow comment. For example, if the other category includes comments such as "Day!", "Evening!", and "Night!" is changed to the background of daytime, and "Evening!" is displayed as a running comment. , the background image in the effect display device 1600 is changed to the night background. Note that a plurality of comment boxes may be displayed at the same time, and comments of different categories may be displayed for each comment box (in this case, for example, a comment box can be selected by operating the left or right button). ).

By thus changing the display of the effect display device 1600 together with the display of the running comment, the player can enjoy the display of the running comment and the change of the background image at the same time. By operating the up button and the down button, each time the number of comments in the other category in the comment box increases or decreases, the display mode may change to correspond to the running comment displayed at the top.

In addition, in FIG. 246(A), one comment in the category in the comment box is displayed first, but all comments in the category may be displayed first (by operating the down button to reduce the number of comments displayed). Also, in the comment selection effect, all comments in the category are always displayed, and when the up button and the down button are operated, the cursor moves, and the comment can be selected by moving the cursor. In this way, since all comments can be recognized from the beginning, the player can easily select from the beginning which comments are to be displayed as running comments.

In the comment selection effect, the comment selected by the player by operating the up button, the down button, the left button or the right button, and the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed as a flow comment on the effect display device 1600. The content of the flow comment that has been made and the number of flow comments that have been displayed do not indicate the degree of expectation of a big win or the degree of expectation of a small win of the variation being executed.

In the comment selection effect, when at least a part of the display area of the comment box and other effect images overlaps so that the player can easily read the comment, the display priority of the comment effect display device 1600 is is preferably higher than the display priority of the effect image. In other words, when at least a part of the display area of the other effect image and the comment box overlap, the comment box is visible in the overlapping display area, and the other effect image is not visible. good.

Also, when the error display and the comment box are displayed at the same time, the display priority of the comment in the comment box on the effect display device 1600 is preferably lower than the error display. Further, when the movable body provided in the pachinko machine 1 moves onto the performance display device 1600 and covers at least a part of the comment box, the at least a part of the area becomes invisible. Needless to say.

As described above, in the comment selection effect, the comment selected by the player can be displayed as a running comment on the effect display device 1600, so that the player can enjoy the effect selected by himself/herself. Also, a comment box may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that the comment selection effect is always executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the stream comment at any time.

FIG. 247 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the comment selection rendering. Figure 247 (A) is the state in which the special figure 1 variation is being executed. A character, a comment box, and a display prompting repeated hits of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the comment selection effect has started. One comment is displayed in the comment box. It should be noted that the display prompting the pressing operation unit 303 to repeatedly hit may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

FIG. 247(B) shows a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 is repeatedly pressed in FIG. 247(A). The effect display device 1600 displays the flow comment for the number of times the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. In this way, when the pressing operation unit 303 is further operated in a state in which the flow comment is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of flow comments can be simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 1600. By repeatedly hitting the operation unit 303 at high speed, an effect of displaying a large number of flow comments on the effect display device 1600 can be executed.

FIG. 248 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the comment selection rendering. In the example of FIG. 248, similarly to the example of FIG. 246, the player can adjust the number of comments displayed in the comment box by operating the up and down buttons. Figure 248 (A) is the state where the variation of the special figure 1 has started. FIG. 248(B) shows a continuation state of the variation of special figure 1 of FIG. The display of the comment box may be started simultaneously with the start of the variation, or the display of the comment box may be started by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303) during the variation.

In the example of FIG. 248, no image prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed. The comment displayed at the top is displayed as a running comment. Also, the comment box may be displayed at the same time as the change starts, or may be displayed when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated once during the change.

FIG. 248(C) shows a state in which one comment is added by operating the up button in FIG. 248(B). FIG. 248(D) shows a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 248(C) to display the topmost comment in the comment box as a rolling comment. FIG. 248(E) shows that one comment is added by operating the up button in FIG. 248(D), and the pressing operation part 303 is operated and the top comment in the comment box is also displayed as a running comment.

FIG. 248(F) shows a state in which the variation performed in FIGS. 248(A) to (E) has been completed. The comment box is erased at the same time when the variation ends or when a predetermined time elapses from the end of the variation (for example, after 5 seconds). When the comment box is not displayed, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the running comment is not displayed.

Fig. 248(G) shows a state in which the change has stopped, and in Fig. 248(F), the comment box is redisplayed after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the comment box was deleted. . As a result, the flow comment can be displayed even when the fluctuation is stopped, and even if the player wants to concentrate on the production other than the flow comment during the fluctuation, the flow comment production can be performed after the fluctuation is finished. can be confirmed.

For example, a player who likes a certain comment displays the comment as a running comment, so the comment box is erased while the comment is displayed at the top of the comment box. 248(G) is displayed so that the comment that the player likes can be immediately displayed as a running comment when the comment box is redisplayed after the fluctuation is finished (that is, it is redisplayed after the fluctuation is stopped). It is desirable that the comment in the comment box is the same as the comment in the comment box displayed in FIG.

FIG. 248(H) shows a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in FIG. 248(G), and the comment displayed at the top of the comment box is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a rolling comment. In addition, when the state where the fluctuation is stopped is maintained as it is, for example, the comment box continues to be displayed so that the player can enjoy the running comment at any time. Moreover, when the state in which the fluctuation is stopped is maintained, a loop may be repeated in which the comment box is erased after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the comment box is redisplayed after the predetermined period of time has passed. It is desirable that the content of the redisplayed comment box be the same as the content of the comment box immediately before the deletion, even in this deletion and redisplay loop.

In FIG. 248(F), the comment box is once erased after the fluctuation is stopped, but since there are players who want to enjoy the flow comment immediately after the fluctuation is stopped, the comment box may remain displayed. After the comment box was temporarily erased after the fluctuation stopped, the comment box was automatically redisplayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The comment box may be redisplayed when an operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303) is operated.

Note that the comment box displayed during fluctuation and the comment box displayed during stop of fluctuation may have the same display size and display position, or may be different. The display size of the comment box displayed while the fluctuation is stopped may be the same or different. For example, only the comment selection effect is executed while the fluctuation is stopped, and effects other than the comment selection effect are also executed during the fluctuation. It is preferable to display it in a large size near the center of 1600.

As in the example of FIG. 248, by making the comment selection effects that can be executed during fluctuations also executable after the fluctuations are stopped, even though the player is playing the game by operating the handle 195, The performance can be enjoyed even when the game ball B does not enter the starting hole and the variation does not start.

FIG. 249 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the comment selection rendering. In FIG. 249 (A), in the variation of the special figure 1 in the low-probability non-working-time-saving gaming state, the SP reach effect (the reach effect with a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach) is executed, and the white character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the SP reach of FIG. 249, a white character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and whether or not a character is displayed on the face of the character after that, and the character itself indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit.

FIG. 249(B) shows the continuation of the SP ready-to-win effect, in which the characters "meat" are displayed on the character's face, suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. FIG. 249(C) shows the state after the SP ready-to-win effect. A plurality of flow comments are automatically displayed regardless of the player's operation while the character displaying the character "meat" remains displayed.

Flow comments that can be automatically displayed in the SP reach effect may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, for example, by the number of displayed flow comments or the contents of the comments. Moreover, it is desirable that the flow comment that can be automatically displayed in the SP reach effect does not overlap with the flow comment that can be displayed by the player's operation. If these flow comments overlap, the flow comment that can be displayed by the player's operation can be displayed even at a timing when the expectation of a big hit is not high. This is because there is a risk that the expectations of people will be reduced.

On the other hand, since some players want to check the flow comment displayed during the SP reach production later, the flow comment that can be displayed by the player's operation includes the flow comment that can be displayed during the SP reach production. good too.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and the game is a pachislot machine or a game that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained. Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the player never touches the game ball B, or a game machine called a management game machine.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5A game board 5B game board 5a game area 1000 front constituent member 1100 game panel 1110 panel board 1112 opening 1120 panel holder 1310 main control board 1510 peripheral control board 1600 effect display device 2002 gate 2002,
2004 first starting port 2004
2005 Second starting gate 2006 First big prize gate 2007 Second big prize gate 2402 Pseudo big prize gate 3000 Back unit (back unit)
3010 back box (holding body)
3010a opening 3011 functional surface portion (specific surface portion)
3012 Functional hole 3015 Predetermined member 3016 Intermediate member 3017 Intermediate member 3200 Back front peripheral decoration unit 3201 Back front peripheral decoration (decoration)

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a win-lose lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition;
Any one of a plurality of winning games including at least a first winning game and a second winning game in which the expected acquisition number of game media is smaller than that of the first winning game, based on the result of the winning lottery by the lottery means. a winning game executing means capable of executing
an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the winning lottery;
A gaming machine comprising an effect display means for displaying an effect executed by the effect execution means,
When the first winning game is executed, the congratulatory image notifying that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state is not displayed on the performance display means, and the second winning game is executed. Sometimes it can be displayed on the effect display means ,
As an indication effect of the display of the blessing image, it is possible to execute an anticipation effect to expect the control to be in the advantageous state, and the anticipation effect is executed and the control to the advantageous state is not performed. The congratulatory image is always displayed when the effect is controlled to the advantageous state instead of the effect result,
In the advantageous state after the blessing image is displayed, a blessing continuation image can be displayed to indicate that control is being performed to the advantageous state different from the blessing image, and the second winning game is executed again. In this case, both the anticipation effect and the blessing image are not displayed, and instead a predetermined effect image is displayed,
Further, when the execution of the first winning game is suggested under the condition that the blessing continuation image is displayed, an effect based on the result of the win-lose lottery despite being controlled to the advantageous state. The blessing continuation image is hidden in the progress of
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images